12 SM Physics English 2019 20

DIRECTORATE OF EDUCATION
GNCT of Delhi, Delhi Government
SUPPORT MATERIAL
(2019-20)
Class : XII
PHYSICS
Under the Guidance of
Mr. Sandeep Kumar

Secretary (Education)
Mr. Binay Bhushan

Director (Education)
Dr. Saroj Bala Sain

Addl. DE (School & Exam.)
Coordinators
Ms. Savita Drall Mrs. Mukta Soni Dr. Raj Kumar Mr. Krishan Kumar
DDE (Exam) Addl. DDE (Exam) OSD (Exam) OSD (Exam)
Production Team
Anil Kumar Sharma
Deepak Tanwar
Published at Delhi Bureau of Text Books , 25/2 Institutional Area, Pankha Road,
New Delhi-110058 by Anil Kaushal, Secretary, Delhi Bureau of Text Books
and Printed by Supreme Offset Press, New Delhi-110017
DIRECTORATE OF EDUCATION
Govt. of NCT, Delhi
SUPPORT MATERIAL
(2019-20)
PHYSICS
Class : XII
NOT FOR SALE
PUBLISHED BY : DELHI BUREAU OF TEXTBOOKS

MEMBERS OF REVIEW COMMITTEE OF
Sr.No. Name Designation School
1. Sh. Pundrikaksh Kaudinya Principal RPVV, Raj Niwas Marg
2. Dr. Arvid Kumar Lecturer Physics Core Academic Unit,

Doe
3. Sh. Devender Kumar Lecturer Physics RPVV Kishan Ganj
4. Sh. Mayank Kumar Singh Vice Principal GBSSS F-Block

Sultanpur
5. Mrs. Garima Singh Solanki Lecturer Physics G.G.S.S.S. C-Block

Dilsha Garden
ix
COURSE STRUCTURE
CLASS - XII (2019-20)
Time : 3 hrs. Marks : 70

No. of Periods Marks
Unit-I Electrostatics
Chapter-1: Electric Charges and Fields 22
Chapter-2: Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 16
Unit-ll Current Electricity 20
Chapter-3: Current Electricity
Unit-Ill Magnetic Effects of Current and Magnetism
Chapter-4: Moving Charges and Magnetism 22
Chapter-5: Magnetism and Matter 17
Unit-IV Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating 20
Currents
Chapter-6: Electromagnetic Induction
Chapter-7: Alternating Current
Unit-V Electromagnetic Waves 04
Chapter-8: Electromagnetic Waves
Unit-VI Optics 18
Chapter-9: Ray Optics and Optical Instruments 27
Chapter-10: Wave Optics
Unit-VI I Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 08
Chapter-11: Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 12
Unit-VIll Atoms and Nuclei
Chapter-12: Atoms 15
Chapter-13: Nuclei
Unit-IX Electronic Devices 12
Chapter-14: Semiconductor Electronics: Materials,
Devices and Simple Circuits 7
Total 150 70
x
Unit I: Electrostatics 22 Periods
Chapter - 1: Electric Charges and Fields
Electric Charges; Conservation of charge, Coulomb's law-force between two
point charges, forces between multiple charges; superposition principle and
continuous charge distribution.
Electric field, electric field due to a point charge, electric field lines, electric
dipole, electric field due to a dipole, torque on a dipole in uniform electric
field.
Electric flux, statement of Gauss's theorem and its applications to find field
due to infinitely long straight wire, uniformly charged infinite plane sheet
and uniformly charged thin spherical shell (field inside and outside).
Chapter - 2: Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance
Electric potential difference, electric potential due to a point charge, a dipole
and system of charges; equipotential surfaces, electrical potential energy of a
system of two point charges and of electric dipole in an electrostatic field.
Conductors and insulators, free charges and bound charges inside a conductor.
Dielectrics and electric polarization, capacitors and capacitance, combination
of capacitors in series and in parallel, capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor
with and without dielectric medium between the plates, energy stored in a
capacitor.
Unit II: Current Electricity 20 Periods
Chapter - 3: Current Electricity
Electric current, flow of electric charges in a metallic conductor, drift velocity,
mobility and their relation with electric current; Ohm's law, electrical
resistance, V-l characteristics (linear and non-linear), electrical energy and
power, electrical resistivity and conductivity, Carbon resistors, color code for
carbon resistors; series and parallel combinations of resistors; temperature
dependence of resistance.
Internal resistance of a cell, potential difference and emf of a cell, combination
of cells in series and in parallel, Kerchiefs laws and simple applications.
Wheatstone bridge, metre bridge.
Potentiometer - principle and its applications to measure potential difference
and for comparing EMF of two cells; measurement of internal resistance of
a cell.
Unit III: Magnetic Effects of Current and Magnetism 22 Periods
Chapter - 4: Moving Charges and Magnetism
Concept of magnetic field, Oersted's experiment.
Biot - Savart law and its application to current carrying circular loop.
xi
Ampere's law and its applications to infinitely long straight wire. Straight and
toroidal solenoids (only qualitative treatment), force on a moving charge in
uniform magnetic and electric fields. Cyclotron.
Force on a current-carrying conductor in a uniform magnetic field, force
between two parallel current-carrying conductors-definition of ampere,
torque experienced by a current loop in uniform magnetic field; moving
coil galvanometer-its current sensitivity and conversion to ammeter and
voltmeter.
Chapter - 5: Magnetism and Matter
Current loop as a magnetic dipole and its magnetic dipole moment, magnetic
dipole moment of a revolving electron, magnetic field intensity due to a
magnetic dipole (bar magnet) along its axis and perpendicular to its axis,
torque on a magnetic dipole (bar magnet) in a uniform magnetic field; bar
magnet as an equivalent solenoid, magnetic field lines; earth's magnetic field
and magnetic elements.
Para-, dia- and Ferro - magnetic substances, with examples. Electromagnets
and factors affecting their strengths, permanent magnets.
Unit IV: Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Currents 20 Periods
Chapter - 6: Electromagnetic Induction
Electromagnetic induction; Faraday's laws, induced EMF and current; Lend's
Law, Eddy currents. Self and mutual induction.
Chapter - 7: Alternating Current
Alternating currents, peak and RMS value of alternating current/voltage:
reactance and impedance; LC oscillations (qualitative treatment only), LCR
series circuit, resonance; power in AC circuits, power factor, watt less current.
AC generator and transformer.
Unit V: Electromagnetic waves 04 Periods
Chapter - 8: Electromagnetic Waves
Basic idea of displacement current, Electromagnetic waves, their
characteristics, their Transverse nature (qualitative ideas only).
Electromagnetic spectrum (radio waves, microwaves, infrared, visible,
ultraviolet, X-rays, gamma rays) including elementary facts about their uses.
Unit VI: Optics 27 Periods
Chapter - 9: Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
Ray Optics: Reflection of light, spherical mirrors, mirror formula, refraction
of light, total internal reflection and its applications, optical fibers, refraction
at spherical surfaces, lenses, thin lens formula, lensometer's formula,
magnification, power of a lens, combination of thin lenses in contact,
refraction of light through a prism.
xii
Scattering of light - blue color of sky and reddish appearance of the sun at
sunrise and sunset.
Optical instruments: Microscopes and astronomical telescopes (reflecting
and refracting) and their magnifying powers.
Chapter - 10: Wave Optics
Wave optics: Wave front ana Hagen's principle, reflection and refraction of
plane wave at a plane surface using wave fronts. Proof of laws of reflection
and refraction using Hagen's principle. Interference, Young's double slit
experiment and expression for fringe width, coherent sources and sustained
interference of light, diffraction due to a single slit, width of central maximum,
resolving power of microscope and astronomical telescope, polarization,
plane polarized light, Burster's law, uses of plane polarized light and Pol
aroids.
Unit VII: Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 08 Periods
Chapter - 11: Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter
Dual nature of radiation, Photoelectric effect, Hertz and Leonard's
observations; Einstein's photoelectric equation-particle nature of light.
Matter waves-wave nature of particles, debrided relation, Davison-Germier
experiment (experimental details should be omitted; only conclusion should
be explained).
Unit VIII: Atoms and Nuclei 15 Periods
Chapter - 12: Atoms
Alpha-particle scattering experiment; Rutherford's model of atom; Bohr
model, energy levels, hydrogen spectrum.
Chapter - 13: Nuclei
Composition and size of nucleus, Radioactivity, alpha, beta and gamma
particles/rays and their properties; radioactive decay law.
Mass-energy relation, mass defect; binding energy per nucleon and its
variation with mass number; nuclear fission, nuclear fusion.
Unit IX: Electronic Devices 12 Periods
Chapter - 14: Semiconductor Electronics: Materials, Devices and Simple
Circuits
Energy bands in conductors, semiconductors and insulators (qualitative ideas
only)
Semiconductor diode - l-V characteristics in forward and reverse bias, diode
as a rectifier;
Special purpose p-n junction diodes: LED, photodiode, solar cell and Zener
diode and their characteristics, zener diode as a voltage regulator.
xiii
PRACTICALS (Total Periods 60)
The record to be submitted by the students at the time of their annual examination
has to include:
● Record of at least 15 Experiments [with a minimum of 6 from each section],
to be performed by the students.
● Record of at least 5 Activities [with a minimum of 2 each from section A and
section B], to be demonstrated by the teachers.
● The Report of the project to be carried out by the students.
Evaluation Scheme
Time Allowed: Three hours Max. Marks: 30
Two experiments one from each section 8+8 Marks
Practical record [experiments and activities] 6 Marks
Investigatory Project 3 Marks
Viva on experiments, activities and project 5 Marks
Total 30 marks
SECTION-A
Experiments
1. To determine resistance per cm of a given wire by plotting a graph for
potential difference versus current.
2. To find resistance of a given wire using metre bridge and hence determine
the resistivity (specific resistance) of its material.
3. To verify the laws of combination (series) of resistances using a metre bridge.
4. To verify the laws of combination (parallel) of resistances using a metre
bridge.
5. To compare the EMF of two given primary cells using potentiometer.
6. To determine the internal resistance of given primary cell using potentiometer.
7. To determine resistance of a galvanometer by half-deflection method and to
find its figure of merit.
8. To convert the given galvanometer (of known resistance and figure of merit)
into a voltmeter of desired range and to verify the same.
9. To convert the given galvanometer (of known resistance and figure of merit)
into an ammeter of desired range and to verify the same.
10. To find the frequency of AC mains with a sonometer.
xiv
Activities (For the purpose of demonstration only)
1. To measure the resistance and impedance of an inductor with or without iron
core.
2. To measure resistance, voltage (AC/DC), current (AC) and check continuity
of a given circuit using multimeter.
3. To assemble a household circuit comprising three bulbs, three (on/off)
switches, a fuse and a power source.
4. To assemble the components of a given electrical circuit.
5. To study the variation in potential drop with length of a wire for a steady
current.
6. To draw the diagram of a given open circuit comprising at least a battery,
resistor/rheostat, key, ammeter and voltmeter. Mark the components that are
not connected in proper order and correct the circuit and also the circuit
diagram.
SECTION-B
Experiments
1. To find the value of v for different values of u in case of a concave mirror and
to find the focal length.
2. To find the focal length of a convex mirror, using a convex lens.
3. To find the focal length of a convex lens by plotting graphs between u and v
or between 1/u and 1/v.
4. To find the focal length of a concave lens, using a convex lens.
5. To determine angle of minimum deviation for a given prism by plotting a
graph between angle of incidence and angle of deviation.
6. To determine refractive index of a glass slab using a travelling microscope.
7. To find refractive index of a liquid by using convex lens and plane mirror.
8. To draw the l-V characteristic curve for a p-n junction in forward bias and
reverse bias.
9. To draw the characteristic curve of a zener diode and to determine its reverse
breaks down voltage.
10. To determine the wavelength of a laser beam by diffraction.
Activities (For the purpose of demonstration only)
1. To identify a diode, an LED, a resistor and a capacitor from a mixed collection
of such items.
2. Use of multimeter to see the unidirectional flow of current in case of a diode
and an LED and check whether a given electronic component (e.g., diode) is
in working order.
xv
3. To study effect of intensity of light (by varying distance of the source) on an
LDR.
4. To observe refraction and lateral deviation of a beam of light incident
obliquely on a glass slab.
5. To observe polarization of light using two Periods.
6. To observe diffraction of light due to a thin slit.
7. To study the nature and size of the image formed by a (i) convex lens, (ii)
concave mirror, on a screen by using a candle and a screen (for different
distances of the candle from the lens/mirror).
8. To obtain a lens combination with the specified focal length by using two
lenses from the given set of lenses.
Suggested Investigatory Projects
1. To study various factors on which the internal resistance/EMF of a cell
depends.
2. To study the variations in current flowing in a circuit containing an LDR
because of a variation in
(a) the power of the incandescent lamp, used to 'illuminate' the LDR
(keeping all the lamps at a fixed distance).
(b) the distance of a incandescent lamp (of fixed power) used to 'illuminate'
the LDR.
3. To find the refractive indices of (a) water (b) oil (transparent) using a plane
mirror, an equi convex lens (made from a glass of known refractive index)
and an adjustable object needle.
4. To design an appropriate logic gate combination for a given truth table.
5. To investigate the relation between the ratio of (i) output and input voltage
and (ii) number of turns in the secondary coil and primary coil of a self-
designed transformer.
6. To investigate the dependence of the angle of deviation on the angle of
incidence using a hollow prism filled one by one, with different transparent
fluids.
7. To estimate the charge induced on each one of the two identical styrofoam
(or pith) balls suspended in a vertical plane by making use of Coulomb's law.
8. To study the factor on which the self-inductance of a coil depends by
observing the effect of this coil, when put in series with a resistor/(bulb) in a
circuit fed up by an A.C. source of adjustable frequency.
9. To study the earth's magnetic field using a tangent galvanometer.
xvi
Practical Examination for Visually Impaired Students of
Classes XI and XII Evaluation Scheme
Time Allowed: Two hours Max. Marks: 30
Identification/Familiarity with the apparatus 5 marks
Written test (based on given/prescribed practicals) 10 marks
Practical Record 5 marks
Viva 10 marks
Total 30 marks
General Guidelines
● The practical examination will be of two hour duration.
● A separate list of ten experiments is included here.
● The written examination in practical for these students will be conducted at
the time of practical\ examination of all other students.
● The written test will be of 30 minutes duration.
● The question paper given to the students should be legibly typed. It should
contain a total of 15 practical skill based very short answer type questions. A
student would be required to answer any 10 questions.
● A writer may be allowed to such students as per CBSE examination rules.
● All questions included in the question papers should be related to the listed
practical. Every question should require about two minutes to be answered.
● These students are also required to maintain a practical file. A student is
expected to record at least five of the listed experiments as per the specific
instructions for each subject. These practical should be duly checked and
signed by the internal examiner.
● The format of writing any experiment in the practical file should include
aim, apparatus required, simple theory, procedure, related practical skills,
precautions etc.
● Questions may be generated jointly by the external/internal examiners and
used for assessment.
● The viva questions may include questions based on basic theory/principle/
concept, apparatus/ materials/chemicals required, procedure, precautions,
sources of error etc.
xvii
Class XII
A. Items for Identification/ familiarity with the apparatus for assessment in
practical (All experiments)
Meter scale, general shape of the voltmeter/ammeter, battery/power supply,
connecting wires, standard resistances, connecting wires, voltmeter/
ammeter, meter bridge, screw gauge, jockey Galvanometer, Resistance Box,
standard Resistance, connecting wires, Potentiometer, jockey, Galvanometer,
Lichened cell, Daniel cell [simple distinction between the two vis-a-
vis their outer (glass and copper) containers], rheostat connecting wires,
Galvanometer, resistance box, Plug-in and tapping keys, connecting wires
battery/power supply, Diode, Resistor (Wire-wound or carbon ones with
two wires connected to two ends), capacitors (one or two types), Inductors,
Simple electric/electronic bell, battery/power supply, Plug-in and tapping
keys. Convex lens, concave lens, convex mirror, concave mirror, Core/
hollow wooden cylinder, insulated wire, ferromagnetic rod, Transformer
core, insulated wire.
B. List of Practical
1. To determine the resistance per cm of a given wire by plotting a graph
between voltage and current.
2. To verify the laws of combination (series/parallel combination) of resistances
by Ohm's law.
3. To find the resistance of a given wire using a meter bridge and hence
determine the specific resistance (resistivity) of its material.
4. To compare the e.m.f of two given primary cells using a potentiometer.
5. To determine the resistance of a galvanometer by half deflection method.
6. To identify a resistor, capacitor, inductor and diode from a mixed collection
of such items.
7. To understand the principle of (i) a NOT gate (ii) an OR gate (iii)an AND
gate and to make their equivalent circuits using a bell and cells/battery and
keys /switches
8. To observe the difference between
(i) a convex lens and a concave lens
(ii) a convex mirror and a concave mirror and to estimate the likely difference
between the power of two given convex /concave lenses.
9. To design an inductor coil and to know the effect of
(i) change in the number of turns
(ii) Introduction of ferromagnetic material as its core material on the
inductance of the coil.
xviii
10. To design a (i) step up (ii) step down transformer on a given core and know
the relation between its input and output voltages.
Note: The above practical may be carried out in an experiential manner rather
than recording observations.
Prescribed Books:
1. Physics, Class XI, Part -I and II, Published by NCERT.
2. Physics, Class XII, Part -I and II, Published by NCERT.
3. Laboratory Manual of Physics for class XII Published by NCERT.
4. The list of other related books and manuals brought out by NCERT (consider
multimedia also).
xix
QUESTION PAPER DESIGN (CLASS : XI/XII) (2019-20)
Board Examination – Theory
Maximum Marks : 70 Duration : 3 hrs.
S. Typology of Questions Very Short Long Long-II 5 Total %
No. Objective 2 Marks 3 Marks Marks Marks
Type
1 Mark
1. Remembering: Exhibit
memory of previously learned
material by recalling facts, 2 2 1 – 9 12%
terms, basic concepts, and
answers.
2. Understanding: Demonstrate
understanding of facts
and ideas by organizing,
comparing, translating,
6 2 2 1 21 30%
interpreting, giving descr-
iptions, and stating main ideas
3. Application Solve problems
to new situations by applying
acquired knowledge, facts,
techniques and rules in a
6 2 1 2 23 33%
different way
4. Analysing and Evaluating:
Examine and break
information into parts by
identifying motives or
causes. Make inferences 6 1 2 – 14 20%
and find evidence to support
generalizations Present and
defend opinions by making
judgments about information,
validity of ideas, or quality of
work based on a set of criteria
5. Creating: Compile information
together in a different way
by combining elements in – – 1 – – 5%
a new pattern or proposing
alternative solutions
Total 20 × 1 = 20 7 × 2 =14 7 × 3 = 21 3 × 5 = 15 70 100
Practical : 30
1. Internal Choice. There is no overall choice in the paper. However, there will be a least 33%
internal choice.
2. The above template is only a sample. Suitable internal variations may be made for gener-
ating similar templates keeping the overall weightage to different form of questions and
typology of questions same.
xx
KEY POINTS
Physical Quantity Formulae Used SI Unit
Quantization of charge q = + ne C
kq q
Coulomb’s force | F| = 12 2 N
r
kq1q2 → kq1q2 
In vector form = r21 = 2 . r 21
r213 r21
Dielectric constant (or relative KD = ∈r = = = Unit less
permitivity) =
Hence F0 > Fm as free space has
minimum permitivity
Linear charge density λ= Cm–1
Surface charge density σ= Cm–2
Volume charge density ρ= Cm–3
Electric field due to a
 kq1 
point charge  In numerical, we use E = 2 
 r 
Unit I - II 1
The components of electric field, Ex = = NC–1
Ez =
Torque on a dipole in a uniform (or τ = pE sin θ) Nm
electric field
→
Electric dipole moment p = q ⋅ (2a ) or Cm
Potential energy of a dipole in a U= (or U = – pE cos θ) J
uniform electric field
Electric field on axial line of an Eaxial = NC–1
electric dipole
When 2a << r, Eaxial =
Electric field on equatorial line Eequatorial =

of an electric dipole
When 2a << r, Eequatorial
dV → →
Electric field as a gradient of E= − or E⋅ d r =
− dV
dr
potential
Electric potential differences VA – VB = Volts (or JC–1)

between ponts A & B
Electric potential at a point VA = =
2 Physics Class - XII)

C1V1 + C 2V2
Common potential V=
C1 + C 2
Electric potential due to a V=
system of charges
1 p cos θ
V=
4π ε 0 (r − a 2 cos 2 θ)
2
Electric potential at any point due When, θ = 0° or θ = 180°,
to an electric dipole V=
If r >> a, V =
When, θ = 90°, Vequi = 0
qnet
Total electric flux through a φe = = ∈ Nm2C–1
0
closed surface S qnet = Net charge enclosed by a

⇒ Gaussian surface
Electric field due to line charge E= NC–1 (or V/m)
Electric field due to an infinite E=
plane sheet of charge
Electric field between two infinitely E =

charged plane parallel sheets
having change density +s and –s
Electric field due to a uniformly E=
charged spherical shell

When r = R, E0 =
When r < R, E × 4πr2 = 0

⸫E=0
Unit I - II 3
Loss of energy (in Parallel 1 C1C2 2
compinaton of two capacitors DU = 2 (C + C ) (V1 − V2 )
1 2
Electrical capacitance C= F(SI Unit)
Capacitance of an isolated sphere C0 = 4π∈0 r
Capacitance of a parallel plate C=
Capacitors in series
Capacitors in parallel C = C1 + C2 + C3
Capacitance of a parallel plate C=

capacitor with dielectric slab
between plates
Capacitance of a parallel plate

capacitor with conducting slab
between plates
Energy stored in a charged U= J

capacitor
Resultant electric field in a where Cm–1

polarised dielectric slab

= Applied electric field and
= Electric field due to
polarization
Polarization density P = ∈0 χE Vm–1 or Nc–1
Dielectric constant (in terms of KD = 1 + χ

electric susceptibility or atomic Where K is dieletric
polarisability) Contant

CURRENT ELECTRICITY
IMPORTANT FORMULA

 eE
1. Drift Velocity vd =
− τ – electric fluid
m
τ = Relaxation time
2. Relation b/w I = neAυd e = charge on electrons.
current and m = mass of electron
Drift Velocity n = number density of electrons
3. Ohm’s Law V = RI A = Cross Section Area
4. Resistance R= V = potential difference across

conductor
5. Specific Resistance ρ= l = length of conductor
or Resistivity
6. Current density j = I/A = neVd
7. Electrical Conductivity σ = 1/ρ
8. Resistances in Series Req = R1 + R2 + R3
Parallel Combination
9. Temperature Rt = R0 (1 + αt) Rt = Resistance at t°C

Dependance of a = Cofficent of temprature
Resistance t = Temperature
10. Internal Resistance r= Ro = Resistance at 0°C
of a cell
11. Power P = VI = I2R =
12. Cells in Series Eeq = E1 + E2

E1 E2
Equivalent emf Eeq = E1 – E2 E1 > E2
A B
Equivalent Internal req = r1 + r2 E1 & E2 are emf of two cells
Resistance
vd
Mobility ( µ ) CGS unit Cm2s–1v-1
E SI unit M s–1s–v-1
2
Unit I - II 5
r1 and r2 are their internal
resistances respectively
Equivalent Current I= n = no. of cells in series.
13. Cells in parallel Equivalent e.m.f.
Eeq =
Equivalent resistance
req =
Equivalent Current I= m = number of cells in parallel
14. Kirchoff’s Laws Σi = o (at a junction) i = Current

ΣiR = ΣE or ΣiR = 0 R = Resistance
(in a closed loop)
E = e.m.f.
15. Wheatstone Bridge P, Q, R and S are resistances in
(balanced condition) Ohm in four arms of Wheatstone
Bridge.
16. Slide wire Bridge or S= R

metre Bridge
17. Potentiometer
Comparison of Emf l1 and l2 are balancing lengths

on potentiometer wire for cells
E1 and E2
Internal Resistance r= l1 and l2 are balancing lengths on

potentiometer wire for emt E and
Pot. diff. V across R.
=

UNIT–I & UNIT–II
ELECTROSTATICS AND
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
QUESTIONS
VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS (1 MARK)

1. Draw schematically an equipotential surface of a uniform electrostatic field
along x-axis.
Ans.
2. Sketch field lines due to (i) two equal positive charges near each other (ii)
a dipole.
Ans.
3. Name the physical quantity whose SI unit is volt/meter. Is it a scalar or a

vector quantity ?
Ans. Electric field intensity. It is a vector quantity.
4. Two point charges repel each other with a force F when placed in water of
dielectric constant 81. What will be the force between them when placed
the same distance apart in air ?
Ans. ∈r = ⇒ F0 = ∈r Fm ⇒ F0 = 81 Fm
5. Electric dipole moment of CuSO4 molecule is 3.2 × 10–28 Cm. Find the
separation between copper and sulphate ions.
3.2 × 10–28
Ans. p = q(2a) ⇒ Length of dipole a = = 10–9 cm
2×1.6×10-19
6. Net capacitance of three identical capacitors connected in parallel is
12 microfarad. What will be the net capacitance when two of them are
connected in (i) parallel (ii) series ?
Ans. Cp = 12µf ⇒ C = = 4µF.

Cp = C1 + C2 = 8µF
Unit I - II 7
Cs = = = 2µF
7. A charge q is placed at the centre of an imaginary spherical surface. What

will be the electric flux due to this charge through any half of the sphere.
Ans. φ =
φ′ =
8. Draw the electric field vs distance (from the centre) graph for (i) a long
charged rod having linear charge density λ > 0 (ii) spherical shell of radius
R and charge Q > 0.
Ans.

9. Diagrammatically represent the position of a dipole in (i) stable (ii) unstable

equilibrium when placed in a uniform electric field.
Ans.
–q +q +q –q
10. A charge Q is distribution over a metal sphere of radius R. What is the

electric field and electric potential at the centre ? Ans. E = 0, V = kQ/R
Ans. Electric field inside conductor E = 0
dV Q
E = = 0 ⇒ V = Constant = =k
dr R
11. If a body contains n1 electrons and n2 protons then what is the total charge
on the body ?
Ans. Q = q1 + q2 +.... + qn. (Additive property of charge)
Q = (n2 – n1)e

12. What is the total positive or negative charge present in 1 molecule of water.
Ans. H2O has 10 electrons (2 of hydrogen and 8 of oxygen)
Total charge = 10e
13. How does the energy of dipole change when it is rotated from unstable
equilibrium to stable equilibrium in a uniform electric field.
Ans. Work done = pE (cos 180° – cos 0°)
= – 2pE
i.e., energy decreases.
14. Write the ratio of electric field intensity due to a dipole at a point on the
equatorial line to the field at a point on the axial line, when the points are
at the same distance from the centre of dipole.
2kp kp
Ans. Eaxial = 3 Eequatorial = 3
r r
∴ Eaxial = 2Eequatorial
15. Draw equipotential surface for a dipole.
Ans.
16. An uncharged conductor A placed on an insulating stand is brought near a

charged insulated conductor B. What happens to the charge and potential
of B ?
Ans. Total charge = 0 + q = q remains same.
P. D. decreases due to induced charge on A.
17. A point charge Q is placed at point O shown in Fig. Is the potential difference
VA – VB positive, negative or zero, if Q is (i) positive (ii) negative charge.
Ans. VA – VB > 0 for Q > 0 and VA – VB < 0 for Q < 0

As electric field lines are in the direction of decreasing potential.
18. An electron and proton are released from rest in a uniform electrostatic
field. Which of them will have larger acceleration ?
Unit I - II 9
Ans. acceleration = , mp > me
ap < ae
19. In an uniform electric field of strength E, a charged particle Q moves point
A to point B in the direction of the field and back from B to A. Calculate
the ratio of the work done by the electric field in taking the charge particle
from A to B and from B to A.
Ans. = – 1
∴ WAB + WBA = 0
| WAB | = | – WBA |
20. If a dipole having charge ±2µC is placed inside a sphere of radius 2 m, what
is the net flux linked with the sphere.
Ans. Net flux = = =0
21. Four charges + q, – q, + q, – q are placed as shown in the figure. What is

the work done in bringing a test charge from ∞ to point 0.

Here, OA = OB = OC = OD
& q0 = Test charge
Ans. V0 =
W = q0 × V0 = 0
22. Calculate electric flux linked with a sphere of radius 1m and charge of 1C
at its centre.
Ans. Electric flux linked with the sphare (closed surface)
q 1
φe =
0 0
23. If the metallic conductor shown in the figure is continuously charged from
which of the points A, B, C or D does the charge leak first. Justify.

Ans. Charge leaks from A first as surface charge density (σ) at A (sharp ends) is
more.
24. What is dielectric strength ? Write the value of dielectric strength of
air.
Ans. Maximum electric field which can be safely applied across a dielectric
before its break down is called dielectric strength.
Dielectric strength of air = 3 × 106 V/m.
25. Two charges – q and + q are located at points A (0, 0, – a) and B (0, 0, +
a). How much work is done in moving a test charge from point (b, 0, 0) to
Q (– b, 0, 0) ?
Ans. W = Edr cos 90° = 0

∴ E along equitorial line of dipole is anti-parallel to dipole moment, hence
perpendicular to displacement or W = 20 × q0 × Vequatorial = q0 × 0 = 0 J.
26. If an electron is accelerated by a Potential difference of 1 Volt, Calculate
the gain in energy in Joule and electron volt.
Ans. Gain in Energy = eV = 1.6 × 10–19 × 1 = 1.6 × 10–19 J
or ∆KE = 1e × 1 volt = 1.6 × 10–19 C × 1 volt = 1.6 × 10–19J
27. Draw schematically the equipotential surface corresponding to a field
that uniformly increases in magnitude but remains in a constant (say z)
direction.
Ans.
E increases therefore, equipotential surface are closer i.e., d1 > d2.

28. Figure shows six charged lumps of plastic coin. The cross-section of a
Guassian surface S is indicated. What is the net electric flux through the
surface ?
Unit I - II 11
+ q1 −q2 + q3 q4
Ans. φ = − .
∈0 ∈0 ∈0 ∈0
29. Without referring to the formula C = ∈0 A/d. Explain why the capacitance
of a parallel plate capacitor reduces on increasing the separation between
the plates ?
Ans. P. D. = V = E × d
‘d’ increases hence V increases.
as C = ∴ C decreases.
30. Draw field lines to show the position of null point for two charges + Q1
and – Q2 when magnitude of Q1 > Q2 and mark the position of null point.
Ans. |Q1| > |Q2 |, N is the neutral point.

31. How does the relaxation time of electron in the conductor change when
temperature of the conductor decreases.
Ans. When temperature of the conductor decreases, ionic vibration in the
conductor decreases so relaxation time increases.
32. Sketch a graph showing variation of resistivity with temperature of (i)
Copper (ii) Carbon.

Ans.
33. The emf of the driver cell (Auxiliary battery) in the potentiometer experiment
should be greater than emf of the cell to be determined. Why ?
Ans. If emf of a driver cell is less, then null point will not be obtained on the
potentiometer wire.
34. You are required to select a carbon resistor of resistance 47kΩ + 10% from
a large collection. What should be the sequence of color bands used to code it ?
Ans. Yellow, Violet, Orange, Silver.
35. Find the value of i in the given circuit :
Ans. On applying Kirchoff current law on junction A, at junction A

2 + 3 = I + 4
so, I = + 1A
36. Two wire one of copper and other of manganin have same resistance and
equal length. Which wire is thicker ?
lc l ρ A
Ans. R = ρc =
ρm m ⇒ c =c < 1
Ac A m ρm A m
∴ Manganin is thicker.
Unit I - II 13
37. You are given three constants wires P, Q and R of length and area of
cross-section (L, A), respectively. Which has highest
resistance ?
ρ(2 L) 4ρL
Ans. RP = RQ = =
A A
2
Þ RR = ⇒ RQ = 4RP, RR =
Q has the highest resistance,

38. V – I graph for a metallic wire at two different temperatures T1 and T2
is as shown in the figure. Which of the two temperatures is higher and
why ?
Ans. Slope of T1 is large, so T1 represents higher temperature as resistance

increases with temperature for a conductor
R = = slope.
39. Out of V – I graph for parallel and series combination of two metallic
resistors, which one represents parallel combination of resistors ? Justify
your answer.

Ans. The resistance for parallel combination in lesser than for series combination
for a given set of resistors. Hence B represents parallel combination sinc
is more. Hence Resistance = is less.
40. Why is the potentiometer preferred to a voltmeter for measuring emf of a

cell ?
Ans. Emf measured by the potentiometer is more accurate than cell because the
cell is in open circuit giving no current.
41. How can a given 4 wires potentiometer be made more sensitive ?
Ans. By connecting a resistance in series with the potentiometer wire in the
primary circuit, the potential drop across the wire is reduced.
42. Why is copper not used for making potentiometer wires ?
Ans. Copper has high temperature coefficient of resistance and hence not
preferred.
43. In the figure, what is the potential difference between A and B ?
Ans. VA – VB = – 8 volt.
44. A copper wire of resistance R is uniformally stretched till its length is
increased to n times its original length. What will be its new resistance ?
Ans. R′ = n2R
\ R′ = = = n2R
45. Two resistance 5Ω and 7Ω are joined as shown to two batteries of emf
2V and 3V. If the 3V battery is short circuited. What will be the current
through 5Ω
Ans. I =
46. Calculate the equivalent resistance between points A and B in the figure
given below.
Unit I - II 15
Ans. We obtain using wheatstone bridge balencing condition.
47. What is the largest voltage that can be safely put across a resistor marked
196Ω, 1W ?
Ans. P = = P R = 1 × 196 = 196
V = 14 Volt.
48. When does the terminal voltage of a cell become (i) greater than its emf
(ii) less than its emf ?
Ans. (i) When the cell is being charged terminal potential difference (V) becomes
greater than emf (E), V = E + Ir
(ii) When the cell is discharged, then V < E
V = E – I r
49. A car battery is of 12V. Eight dry cells of 1.5 V connected in series also
give 12V, but such a combination is not used to start a car. Why ?
Ans. Dry cell used in series will have high resistance (= 10Ω) and hence provide
low current, while a car battery has low internal resistance (0. 1Ω) and hence
gives high current for the same emf, needed to start the car.
50. Two electric lamps A and B marked 220 V, 100W and 220V, 60W
respectively. Which of the two lamps has higher resistance ?
Ans. As R = lamp has higher resistance.
51. Resistors of high value are made up of carbon. Why ?

Ans. High resistivity and low temperature Coefficient of resistance.

52. Draw graph showing the variation of electronic field & electronic potential
with distances 'r' due to a point change.
53. Net capacitance of three identical capacitors in series is 1µF. What will be
their net capacitance if connected in parallel. Find the raio of energy stored
in two combinations connected across the same battery.
54. Distinguish with the help of a suitable diagram,the difference in the
behaviour of conductor and a dielectric substance placed in an external
electric field. How does the polarised dielectric modifies the external field.
55. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C is charged to a potential of
V volt. It is then connected across another uncharged capacitor of same
capacitance .Find the ratio of initial energy of single capacitor to the final
energy combination . [Ans -2:1]
56. An infinite large plane thin charged sheet has surface charge density σ.
Obtain an expression for work done in carrying a point charge q from finity
to a point at a distance
57. A proton and a alpha particle are accelerated from rest through a potential
difference of 100 volt. Find (i) Their KE in eV and Joule (ii) which particle
will move faster.
[Ans: (1) 100 eV, 200 eV, 1.6 x 10-17J, 3.2x 10-17J (ii) Proton]
58. An electron starting from rest takes 14×10-9 sec to reach from one plate to
other of a capacitor placed 2 cm apart. If charge to mass ratio of electron
is 1.8×1011 CI kg. Then find the potential difference between the plates.
[Ans: V = 2400 Volt]
59. An alpha particle of charge 3.2×10- cm/sec and mass 6.8×10-27Kg is
19
initially moving at speed 107 when it is at far distance from another fixed
point charge 112×10-19C. Find the distance of closest approach.
[Ans: r = 9.4×10-15 m]
6
60. If the dielectric strength of air is 3×10 V /m, what will be the maximum
potential at the surface of a metal sphere of radius 1m.
[Ans: V = 3×106 Volt]
61. Two point charge each +3 µC are placed along the diameter of a circle of
radius 15 cm. Calculate the ectric potential at the ends of perpendicular
diameter [Ans: V = 2.52×105 Volt]
62. An electric dipole of dipole moment 40×10-6C-m is enclosed by a closed
surface. What is the net flux coming out of the surface? [Ans: zero]
Unit I - II 17
63. Does the charge given to a metallic sphere depend on whether it is solid or
hollow .Give reason.
[Ans: Charge comes on the outer surface only, like charges repel and
conductor allows flow of charge]
64. A and B are two conducting spheres of the same radius, A being solid and
B hollow. Both have same field on their surface. What will be the relation
between the charges on the two spheres? [Ans: Same]
65. How does the electric flux due to a point charge enclosed by a spherical
gaussian surface is affected ,if radius is increased
[Ans: remains same as it does not depend upon shape and size of
Gaussian surface]
66. How does the Coulomb force between two point charges depend upon the
dielectric constant of the intervening medium?
[Ans: It decreases with increasing dielectric constant of medium]
67. The distance of the field point, on the equatorial plane of a small electric
dipole, is halved. By what factor will the electric field, due to the dipole,
change?[Ans: As E oc 1/r3, 8 times]
68. Two plane sheets of charge densities +σ and -σ are kept in air as shown in
figure.What are the electric field intensities at points A and B?
[Ans: zero, σ/ ε0]
•A
+σ
•B
-σ
69. Why does the electric field inside a dielectric decrease when it is `aced in
an external electric field?
[Ans: Due to induced field is opposite direction]
70. A charge Q is uniformly distributed over a ring of radius a.Obtain an
expression for electric field intensity at a point on the axis of ring. show
that at far point ring behaves as a point charge.
71. Figure shows electric lines of force due to two point charges q1 and q2 placed
at points A and B respectively. Write the nature of charge on them.
[Ans: Q1 <0, Q2 < 0]
A B
Q1 Q2

72. Two points charges q1 and q2 are placed close to each other. What is the
nature of force between the charges when q1 <0, q2 > 0, q1 < 0, q2 < 0
[Ans: Attractive, repulsive]
73. A metal rod of square cross-section area A having length l has current I
flowing through it, when a potential difference of V volt is applied across
its ends (figure I). Now the rod is cut parallel to its length in two Identical
pieces and joined as shown in (figure-II). What potential difference must
be maintained across the length 2l so that the current in the rod is still
remains I ?
Ans. R1 =
R2 = = 4R1
I = =
V V
= 2
R1 4R1
V2 = 4V
74. (a) Define torque acting on a dipole moment Placed in a uniform electric
field Express it in the vector form and point out the direction along
which it acts.
(b) What happens if the electric field is non-uniform ?
(c) What would happen if the external field is increasing (i) Parallel to
→ →
p (ii) anti-parallel to p ?
75. State the condition under which the terminal potential difference across a
battery and its emf are equal.
Ans. When battery is in open circuit i.e. when no current is being drawn from
the cell. Vopen = emf of cell or battery
Unit I - II 19
76. State the condition for maximum current to be drawn from a cell.
Ans. I = for I maximum R = 0 i.e., for maximum current the terminals of
a cell must be short circuited.

SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS (2 MARKS)
1. An oil drop of mass m carrying charge – Q is to be held stationary in the
gravitational field of the earth. What is the magnitude and direction of the
electrostatic field required for this purpose ? Ans. E = mg/Q, downward
2. Draw E and V versus r on the same graph for a point charge.
3. Find position around dipole at which electric potential due to dipole is zero
but has non zero electric field intensity. →
– 1 p
Ans. Equitorial position, V = 0, = (a << r)
4π ∈0 r 3
4. Derive an expression for the work done in rotating an electric dipole

from its equilibrium position to an angle θ with the uniform electrostatic
field.
5. A electrostatic field line can not be discontinuous.Why ?
6. A thin long conductor has linear charge density of 20 µC/m. Calculate
the electric field intensity at a point 5 cm from it. Draw a graph to show
variation of electric field intensity with distance from the conductor.
Ans. 72 × 105 N/C
7. What is the ratio of electric field intensity at a point on the equatorial line
to the field at a point on axial line when the points are at the same distance
from the centre of the dipole ? Ans. 1 : 2
8. Show that the electric field intensity at a point can be given as negative of
potential gradient.
9. A charged metallic sphere A having charge qA is brought in contact with an
uncharged metallic sphere of same radius and then separated by a distance
d. What is the electrostatic force between them. Ans.
10. An electron and a proton travel through equal distances in the same uniform
electric field E. Compare their time of travel. (Neglect gravity)
11. Two point charges – q and + q are placed 2l metre apart, as shown in Fig.
Give the direction of electric field at points A, B, C and D, A is mid point
between charges – q and + q.
D
B –q A +q C
2l
12. The electric potential V at any point in space is given V = 20x3 volt, where
x is in meter. Calculate the electric intensity at point P (1, 0, 2).
Ans. 60 NC–1
13. Justify why two equipotential surfaces cannot intersect.
14. Find equivalent capacitance between A and B in the combination given
below : each capacitor is of 2 µF. Ans. 6/7 µF
15. What is the electric field at O in Figures (i), (ii) and (iii), ABCD is a square
of side r.
2q 4q
Ans. (i) Zero, (ii) 2 along OB (iii) r2 along OD
4πε 0 r 4πε 0
16. What should be the charge on a sphere of radius 4 cm, so that when it is
brought in contact with another sphere of radius 2 cm carrying charge of
10 µC, there is no transfer of charge from one sphere to other ?
Ans. Va = Vb, Q = 20µC.
17. For an isolated parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C and potential
difference V, what will be change in (i) charge on the plates (ii) potential
difference across the plates (iii) electric field between the plates (iv)
energy stored in the capacitor, when the distance between the plates is
increased ?
Unit I - II 21
Ans. (i) No change (ii) increases (iii) No change (iv) increases.
18. Does the maximum charge given to a metallic sphere of radius R depend
on whether it is hollow or solid ? Give reason for your answer.
Ans. No, charge resides on the surface of conductor.
19. Two charges Q1 and Q2 are separated by distance r. Under what conditions
will the electric field be zero on the line joining them (i) between the charges
(ii) outside the charge?
Ans. (i) Charge are alike (ii) Unlike charges of unequal magnitude.
20. Obtain an expression for the electric field due to electric dipole at any point
on the equatorial line.
21. The electric field component in the figure are
Calculate the electric flux through, (1, 2, 3) the square surfaces of side
5 m.
22. Calculate the work required to separate two charges 5µc and – 2µc placed
at (– 3 cm, 0, 0) and (+ 3 cm, 0, 0) infinitely away from each other.
Ans. 1.5 J
23. What is electric field between the plates with the separation of 2 cm and (i)
with air (ii) dielectric medium of dielectric constant K. Electric potential
of each plate is marked in the following figure.
_____________ 150 V
(i) ______________ – 50 V Ans. E0 = 104 NC–1, E =
24. A RAM (Random access Memory) chip a storage device like parallel plate
capacitor has a capacity of 55pF. If the capacitor is charged to 5.3V, how
may excess electrons are on its negative plate ? Ans. 1.8 × 109
25. The figure shows the Q (charge) versus V (potential) graph for a combination
of two capacitors. identify the graph representing the parallel combination.

Ans. A represents parallel combination
26. Calculate the work done in taking a charge of 1 µC in a uniform electric
field of 10 N/C from B to C given AB = 5 cm along the field and AC = 10
cm perpendicular to electric field.
Ans. WAB = WBC = 50 × 10–8 J. WAC = 0J

27. Two charges – q and + q are located at points A (0, 0, – a) and B (0, 0, + a)
respectively. How much work is done in moving a test charge from point
P (7, 0, 0) to Q (– 3, 0, 0) ? (zero)
28. The potential at a point A is – 500 V and that at another point B is + 500 V.
What is the work done by external agent to take 2 units (S.I.) of negative
charge from B to A. WBA = 2000 J
29. How does the (i) Potential energy of mutual interaction (ii) net electrostatic
P.E. of two charges change when they are placed in an external electric field.
30. With the help of an example, show that Farad is a very large unit of
capacitance.
31. What is meant by dielectric polarisation ? Why does the electric field inside
a dielectric decreases when it in placed in an external field ?
32. In charging a capacitor of capacitance C by a source of emf V, energy
supplied by the sources QV and the energy stored in the capacitor is ½QV.
Justify the difference.
33. An electric dipole of dipole moment p, is held perpendicular to an electric
field. If the dipole is released does it have (a) only rotational motion
Unit I - II 23
(b) only translatory motion (c) both translatory and rotatory motion
explain?
34. The net charge of a system is zero. Will the electric field intensity due to
this system also be zero.
35. A point charge Q is kept at the intersection of (i) face diagonals (ii) diagonals
of a cube of side a. What is the electric flux linked with the cube in (i) &
(ii) ?
36. There are two large parallel metallic plates S1 and S2 carrying surface charge
densities σ1 and σ2 respectively (σ1 > σ2) placed at a distance d apart in
vacuum. Find the work done by the electric field in moving a point charge
q a distance a (a < d) from S1 and S2 along a line making an angle π/4 with
the normal to the plates.
37. Define mobility of electron in a conductor. How does electron mobility
change when (i) temperature of conductor is decreased (ii) Applied potential
difference is doubled at constant temperature ?
38. On what factor does potential gradient of a potentiometer wire depend ?
39. What are superconductors ? Give one of their applications.
40. Two copper wires with their lengths in the ratio 1 : 2 and resistances in
the ratio 1 : 2 are connected (i) in series (ii) in parallel with a battery.
What will be the ratio of drift velocities of free electrons in two wires in (i)
and (ii) ? Ans. (1 : 1, 2 : 1)
41. The current through a wire depends on time as i = i0 + at where i0 = 4A and
a = 2As–1. Find the charge crossing a section of wire in 10 seconds.
42. Three identical resistors R1, R2 and R3 are connected to a battery as shown
in the figure.What will be the ratio of voltages across R1 and R2. Support
your answer with calculations. (2 : 1)
E
R2
R1
R3
43. In the arrangement of resistors shown, what fraction of current I will pass
through 5Ω resistor ?

44. A 100W and a 200 W domestic bulbs joined in series are connected to the
mains. Which bulb will glow more brightly ? Justify. (100W)
45. A 100W and a 200 W domestic bulbs joined in parallel are connected to
the mains. Which bulb will glow more brightly ? Justify. (200W)
46. A battery has an emf of 12V and an internal resistance of 2Ω. Calculate
the potential difference between the terminal of cell if (a) current is drawn
from the battery (b) battery is charged by an external source.
47. A uniform wire of resistance R ohm is bent into a circular loop as shown
in the figure. Compute effective resistance between diametrically opposite
points A and B. [Ans. R/4]
48. In a potentiometer arrangement, a cell of emf 1.25V gives a balance point

at 35 cm length of the wire. If the cell is replaced by another cell, then the
balance point shifts to 63 cm. What is the emf of the second cell ?
[Ans. 2.25V]
49. In a meter bridge, the balance point is found to be 39.5 cm from end A. The
known resistance Y is 12.5Ω. Determine unknown resistance X.
[Ans. 8. 16Ω]
50. A meterbridge is in balance condition. Now if galvanometer and cell are

interchanged, the galvanometer shows no deflection. Give reason.
[Ans. Galvanometer will show no deflection. Proportionality of the arms
are retained as the galvanometer and cell are interchanged.]
Unit I - II 25
51. If the emf of the driving cell be decreased. What will be effect on the position
of zero deflection in a potentiometer.
52. Why should the area of cross section of the meter bridge wire be uniform
? Explain.
53. Given any two limitations of Ohm’s law.
54. Which one of the two, an ammeter or a milliammeter has a higher resistance
and why ?
55. Name two factors on which the resistivity of a given material depends ? A
carbon resistor has a value of 62kΩ with a tolerance of 5%. Give the colour
code for the resistor.
56. If the electron drift speed is so small (~ 10–3 m/s) and the electron’s
charge is very small, how can we still obtain a large amount of current in
a conductor.
57. A battery of emf 2.0 volts and internal resistance 0.1Ω is being charged with
a current of 5.0 A. What is the potential difference between the terminals
of the battery ?
A B
5A 2.0V 0.1Ω
58. Why should the jockey be not rubbed against potentiometer wire ?
59. What is meant by the sensitivity of a potentiometer of any given length ?
60. Five identical cells, each of emf E and internal resistance r, are connected
in series to form (a) an open (b) closed circuit. If an ideal voltmeter is
connected across three cells, what will be its reading ?
[Ans. (a) 3E; (b) zero]
61. An electron in a hydrogen atom is considered to be revolving around a
proton with a velocity in a circular orbit of radius If I is the
equivalent current, express it in terms of m, e, n.
62. In the given circuit, with steady current, calculate the potential drop across
the capacitor in terms of V.

63. A cell of e.m.f. ‘E’ and internal resistance ‘r’ is connected across a variable
resistor ‘R’. Plot a graph showing the variation of terminal potential ‘V’
with resistance ‘R’. Predict from the graph the condition under which ‘V’
becomes equal to ‘E’.
64. Winding of rheostat wire are quite close to each other why do not they get
short circuted ?
Ans. The wire has a coating of insulating oxide over it which insulate the
winding from each other.
65. Why is it necessary to obtain the balance point in the middle of bridge wire
? Explain.
66. What are the possible cause of one side deflection in Galvanometer while
performing potentiometer experiment ?
Ans. (i) Either +ve terminals of all the cells are not connected to same end
of potentiometer.
or
(ii) The total potential drop across wire is less than the emf to be measured.

1. Define electrostatic potential and its unit. Obtain expression for electrostatic
potential at a point P in the field due to a point charge.
2. Calculate the electrostatic potential energy for a system of three point
charges placed at the corners of an equilateral triangle of side ‘a’.
3. What is polarization of charge ? With the help of a diagram show why
the electric field between the plates of capacitor reduces on introducing a
dielectric slab. Define dielectric constant on the basis of these fields.
4. Using Gauss’s theorem in electrostatics, deduce an expression for electric
field intensity due to a charged spherical shell at a point (i) inside (ii) on
Unit I - II 27
its surface (iii) outside it. Graphically show the variation of electric field
intensity with distance from the centre of shell.
5. Three capacitors are connected first in series and then in parallel. Find the
equivalent capacitance for each type of combination.
6. A charge Q is distributed over two concentric hollow sphere of radii r
and R (R > r), such that their surface density of charges are equal. Find
Potential at the common centre.
7. Derive an expression for the energy density of a parallel plate capacitor.
8. You are given an air filled parallel plate capacitor. Two slabs of dielectric
constants K1 and K2 having been filled in between the two plates of the
capacitor as shown in Fig. What will be the capacitance of the capacitor of
initial area was A distance between plates d ?
Ans. C1 = (K1 + K2)C0
C2 =
9. In the figure shown, calculate the total flux of the electrostatic field through
the sphere S1 and S2. The wire AB shown of length l has a liner charge
density λ given λ = kx where x is the distance measured along the wire
from end A.
l l
1 2
Ans. Total charge on wire AB = Q = ∫ =
λdx ∫ k x=
dx kl
o o
2
By Gauss’s theorem.

Total flux through S1 =
Total flux through S2 =
10. Explain why charge given to a hollow conductor is transferred immediately

to outer surface of the conductor.
11. Derive an expression for total work done in rotating an electric dipole
through an angle θ in an uniform electric field. Hence calculate the potential
energy of the dipole.
12. Define electric flux. Write its SI unit. An electric flux of f units passes
normally through a spherical Gaussian surface of radius r, due to point
charge placed at the centre.
(1) What is the charge enclosed by Gaussian surface ?
(2) If radius of Gaussian surface is doubled, what will be the flux
through it ?
13. A conducting slab of thickness ‘t’ is introduced between the plates of
a parallel plate capacitor, separated by a distance d (t < d). Derive an
expression for the capacitance of the capacitor. What will be its capacitance
when t = d ?
14. If a dielectric slab is introduced between the plates of a parallel plate
capacitor after the battery is disconnected, then how do the following
quantities change.
(i) Charge
(ii) Potential
(iii) Capacitance
(iv) Energy.
15. What is an equipotential surface ? Write three properties Sketch equipotential
surfaces of
(i) Isolated point charge
(ii) Uniform electric field
(iii) Dipole
16. If charge Q is given to a parallel plate capacitor and E is the electric field
between the plates of the capacitor the force on each plate is 1/2 QE and
Unit I - II 29
if charge Q is placed between the plates experiences a force equal to QE.
Give reason to explain the above.
17. Two metal spheres A and B of radius r and 2r whose centres are separated
by a distance of 6r are given charge Q, are at potential V1 and V2. Find the
ratio of V1/V2. These spheres are connected to each other with the help of
a connecting wire keeping the separation unchanged, what is the amount
of charge that will flow through the wire ?
18. Define specific resistance. Write its SI unit. Derive an expression for
resistivity of a wire in terms of its material’s parameters, number density
of free electrons and relaxation time.
19. A potential difference V is applied across a conductor of length L and
diameter D. How are the electric field E and the resistance R of the conductor
affected when (i) V is halved (ii) L is halved (iii) D is doubled. Justify your
answer.
20. Define drift velocity. A conductor of length L is connected to a dc source of
emf E. If the length of conductor is tripled by stretching it, keeping E constant,
explain how do the following factors would vary in the conductor ?
(i) Drift speed of electrons (ii) Resistance and (iii) Resistivity
21. Define potential gradient. How can potential gradient of a potentiometers
be determined experimentally. In the graph shown here, a plot of potential
drop versus length of the potentiometer is made for two potentiometers.
Which is more sensitive – A or B ?

22. Define conductivity of a substance. Give its SI units. How does it vary
with temperature for (i) Copper (ii) Silicon ?
23. Two cells of emf E1 and E2 having internal resistance r1 and r2 are connected
in parallel. Calculate Eeq and req for the combination.
24. The graph A and B shows how the current varies wiht applied potential
difference across a filament lamp and nichrome wire respectively. Using
the graph, find the ratio of the values of the resistance of filament lamp to
the nichrome wire
(i) when potential difference across them is 12 V.
(ii) when potential difference across them is 4V. Give reason for the change
in ratio of resistance in (i) and (ii).
25. Electron drift speed is estimated to be only a few mm/s for currents in the
range of few amperes ? How then is current established almost the instant
a circuit is closed.
26. Give three differences between e.m.f. and terminal potential difference of
a cell.
27. Define the terms resistivity and conductivity and state their S. I. units.
Draw a graph showing the variation of resistivity with temperature for a
typical semiconductor.
28. The current flowing through a conductor is 2mA at 50V and 3mA at 60V.
Is it an ohmic or non-ohmic conductor ? Give reason.
29. Nichrome and copper wires of same length and area of cross section are
connected in series, current is passed through them why does the nichrome
wire get heated first ?
Unit I - II 31
30. Under what conditions is the heat produced in an electric circuit :
(i) directly proportional
(ii) inversely proportional to the resistance of the circuit.
LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS (5 MARKS)

1. Two charged capacitors are connected by a conducting wire. Calculate
common potential of capacitors (ii) ratio of their charges at common
potential. Show that energy is lost in this process.
2. Derive an expression for the strength of electric field intensity at a point on
the axis of a uniformly charged circular coil of radius R carrying charge Q.
3. Derive an expression for potential at any point distant r from the centre O
of dipole making an angle θ with the dipole.
4. Suppose that three points are set at equal distance r = 90 cm from the
centre of a dipole, point A and B are on either side of the dipole on the axis
(A closer to +ve charge and B closer to negative charge) point C which is
on the perpendicular bisector through the line joining the charges. What
would be the electric potential due to the dipole of dipole moment 3.6 ×
10 19 Cm at points A, B and C ?
5. Derive an expression for capacitance of parallel plate capacitor with
dielectric slab of thickness t(t < d) between the plates separated by distance
d. How would the following (i) energy (ii) charge, (iii) potential be affected
(a) if dielectric slab is introduced with battery disconnected, (b) dielectric
slab is introduced after the battery is connected.
6. Derive an expression for torque experienced by dipole placed in uniform
electric field. Hence define electric dipole moment.
7. State Gauss’s theorem. Derive an expression for the electric field due to
a charged plane sheet. Find the potential difference between the plates of
a parallel plate capacitor having surface density of charge 5 × 10–8 Cm–2
with the separation between plates being 4 mm.
8. Define current density. Give its SI unit. Whether it is vector or scalar ?
How does it vary when (i) potential difference across wire increases (ii)
length of wire increases (iii) temperature of wire increases (iv) Area of
cross-section of wire increases justify your answer.
9. Using Gauss’s theorem obtain an expression for electric field intensity
due to a plane sheet of charge. Hence obtain expression for electric field
intensity in a parallel plate capacitor.
10. Write any four important results regarding electro statics of conductors.
11. State Kirchhoffs’s rules for electrical networks. Use them to explain the
principle of Wheatstone bridge for determining an unknown resistance.
How is it realized in actual practice in the laboratory ? Write the formula
used.
12. Define emf and terminal potential difference of a cell. When is the terminal
charging potential difference greater than emf ? Explain how emf and
terminal potential difference can be compared using a potentiometer and
hence determine internal resistance of the cell.
13. For three cells of emf E1, E2 and E3 with internal resistance r1, r2, r3
respectively connected in parallel, obtain an expression for net internal
resistance and effective current. What would be the maximum current
possible if the emf of each cell is E and internal resistance is r each ?
14. Derive an expression for drift velocity of the electron in conductor. Hence
deduce ohm’s law.
15. State the principle of potentiometer. How can it be used to :
(i) Compare e.m.f. of two cells
(ii) Measure internal resistance of a cell ?
16. Explain how does the conductivity of a :
(i) Metallic conductor
(ii) Semi conductor and
(iii) Insulator varies with the rise of temperature.
17. Derive expression for equivalent e.m.f. and equivalent resistance of a :
(a) Series combination
(b) Parallel combination
of three cells with e.m.f. E1, E2, E3 & internal resistances r1, r2, r3
respectively.
Unit I - II 33
18. Deduce the condition for balance in a Wheatstone bridge. Using the
principle of Wheatstone bridge, describe the method to determine the
specific resistance of a wire in the laboratory. Draw the circuit diagram
and write the formula used. Write any two important precautions you
would observe while performing the experiment.
NUMERICALS
1. What should be the position of charge q = 5µC for it to be in equilibrium on
the line joining two charges q1 = – 4 µC and q2 = 16 µC separated by 9 cm.
Will the position change for any other value of charge q ? (9 cm from – 4
µC)
2. Two point charges 4e and e each, at a separation r in air, exert force of
magnitude F. They are immersed in a medium of dielectric constant 16.
What should be the separation between the charges so that the force between
them remains unchanged. (1/4 the original separation)
3. Two capacitors of capacitance 10 µF and 20 µF are connected in series
with a 6V battery. If E is the energy stored in 20 µF capacitor what will be
the total energy supplied by the battery in terms of E. (6E)
4. Two point charges 6 µC and 2 µC are separated by 3 cm in free space.
Calculate the work done in separating them to infinity. (3. 6 joule)
5. ABC is an equilateral triangle of side 10 cm. D is the mid point of BC
charge 100 µC,– 100µC and 75 µC are placed at B, C and D respectively.
What is the force experienced by a 1 µC positive charge placed at A ?
6. A point charge of 2 µC is kept fixed at the origin. Another point charge of

4 µC is brought from a far point to a distance of 50 cm from origin. (a)
Calculate the electrostatic potential energy of the two charge system.
Another charge of 11 µC is brought to a point 100 cm from each of the
two charges. What is the work done ? (a) 144 × 10–3 J
7. A 5 MeV α particle is projected towards a stationary nucleus of atomic
number 40. Calculate distance of closest approach. (1.1 × 10–4 m)

8. To what potential must a insulated sphere of radius 10 cm be charged so
that the surface density of charge is equal to 1 µC/m2. (1.13 × 104V)
9. A slab of material of dielectric constant K has the same area as the plates
of parallel plate capacitor but its thickness is where d is separation
between plates, How does the capacitance change when the slab is inserted
between the plates ?
10. A point charge developes an electric field of 40 N/C and a potential
difference of 10 J/C at a point. Calculate the magnitude of the charge and
the distance from the point charge. (2.9 × 10–10 C, 25 cm)
11. Figure shows three circuits, each consisting of a switch and two capacitors
initially charged as indicated. After the switch has been closed, in which
circuit (if any) will the charges on the left hand capacitor (i) increase (ii)
decrease (iii) remain same ?
(1 remains unchanged, 2 increases, 3 decreases).

12. For what value of C does the equivalent capacitance between A and B is
1µF in the given circuit.
All capacitance given in micro farad Ans. 2 µF

13. A pendulum bob of mass 80 mg and carrying charge of 3 × 10–8 C is
placed in an horizontal electric field. It comes to equilibrium position at an
angle of 37° with the vertical. Calculate the intensity of electric field. (g =
10m/s2) (2 × 104 N/C)
14. Eight charged water droplets each of radius 1 mm and charge 10 × 10–10 C
coalesce to form a single drop. Calculate the potential of the bigger drop.
(3600 V)
Unit I - II 35
15. What potential difference must be applied to produce an electric field that
can accelerate an electron to 1/10 of velocity of light. (2.6 × 103 V)
16. A 10 µF capacitor can withstand a maximum voltage of 100 V across it,
whereas another 20 µF capacitor can withstand a maximum voltage of
only 25 V. What is the maximum voltage that can be put across their series
combination ?
17. Three concentric spherical metallic shells A < B < C of radii a, b, c
(a < b < c) have surface densities σ, – σ and σ respectively. Find the potential
of three shells A, B and C (ii). If shells A and C are at the same potential
obtain relation between a, b, c.
18. Four point charges are placed at the corners of the square of edge a as shown
in the figure. Find the work done in disassembling the system of charges.
19. Find the potential at A and C in the following circuit :
20. Two capacitors A and B with capacitances 3 µF and 2 µF are charged

100 V and 180 V respectively. The capapitors are connected as shown in the
diagram with the uncharged capacitor C. Calculate the (i) final charge on
the three capacitors (ii) amount of electrostatic energy stored in the system
before and after the completion of the circuit.

21. Fig. shows two parallel plate capacitors X and Y having same area of plates
and same separation between them : X has air while Y has dielectric of
constant 4 as medium between plates
(a) calculate capacitance of each capacitor, if equivalent capacitance of

combination is 4µF (b) calculate potential difference between plate X and
Y (c) what is the ratio of electrostatic energy stored in X & Y.
Ans. (a) 5µF, 20µF, (b) 9.6V, 2.4V (c) 4
22.
In the following arrangement of capacitors, the energy stored in the 6µF

capacitor is E.
Find :
(i) Energy stored in 12 µF capacitors.
(ii) Energy stored in 3µF capacitor.
(iii) Total energy drawn from the battery.
Ans. (i) E = = = 3 × 10–6 V2
V2 =
Unit I - II 37
Energy stored in 12µF capacitor =
= 2E
(ii) Charge on 6µF capacitor
Q1 =
=
Charge on 12µF capacitor
Q2 =
=
=
Charge on 3µF capacitor Q = Q1 + Q2
=
Energy stored in 3µF capacitor
= =
= 18E
(ii) Capacitance of parallel combination = 18µF
Charge on parallel combination Q = CV
= 18 × 10–6 V
Charge on 3µF = Q = 3 × 10–6 V1
18 × 10–6 V = 3 × 10–6 V1
V1 = 6V
Energy stored in 3µF capacitor =
= 18E
(iii) Total eEnergy drawn = E + 2E + 18E = 21E
23. The charge passing through a conductor is a function of time and is given as
q = 2t2 – 4t + 3 milli coulomb. Calculate (i) current through the conductor (ii)
potential difference across it at t = 4 second. Given resistance of conductor
is 4 ohm. Ans. I = 12A, V = 48 V

24. The resistance of a platinum wire at a point 0°C is 5.00 ohm and its resistance
at steam point is 5.40Ω. When the wire is immersed in a hot oil bath, the
resistance becomes 5.80Ω. Calculate the temperature of the oil bath and
temperature coefficient of resistance of platinum.
Ans. a = 0.004°C; T = 200°C
25. Three identical cells, each of emf 2V and internal resistance 0.2 ohm, are
connected in series to an external resistor of 7.4 ohm. Calculate the current
in the circuit and the terminal potential difference across an equivalent.
Ans. I = 0.75; V = 5.55 V
26. Calculate the equivalent resistance and current shown by the ammeter in
the circuit diagram given. Ans. R = 2Ω ; I = 5A
27. A storage battery of emf 12V and internal resistance of 1.5Ω is being
charged by a 12V supply. How much resistance is to be put in series for
charging the battery safely, by maintaining a constant charging current of
6A. Ans. R = 16.5 Ω
28. Three cells are connected in parallel, with their like poles connected
together, with wires of negligible resistance. If the emf of the cell are 2V,
1V and 4V and if their internal resistance are 4Ω, 3Ω and 2 Ω respectively,
find the current through each cell.
29. A 16 ohm resistance wire is bent to form a square. A source of emf 9 volt is
connected across one of its sides. Calculate the potential difference across
any one of its diagonals. Ans. 1V
Unit I - II 39
30. A length of uniform ‘heating wire’ made of nichrome has a resistance 72
Ω. At what rate is the energy dissipated if a potential difference of 120V is
applied across (a) full length of wire (b) half the length of wire (wire is cut
into two). Why is it not advisable to use the half length of wire ?
Ans. (a) 200W, (b) 400W, 400W >> 200W but since current becomes large
so it is not advisable to use half the length
31. With a certain unknown resistance X in the left gap and a resistance of 8Ω
in the right gap, null point is obtained on the metre bridge wire. On putting
another 8Ω in parallel with 8Ω resistance in the right gap, the null point is
found to shift by 15 cm. Find the value of X from these observations.
Ans. 8/3 Ω
32. Figure show a potentiometer circuit for comparison of two resistances.
The balance point with a standard resistance R = 10Ω is found to be 160
cm. While that with the unknown resistance X is 134.4 cm. Determine the
value of X. [Ans. 2 Ω]
33. In a potentiometer, a standard cell of emf 5V of negligible internal resistance

maintains a steady current through Potentiometer wire of length 5m. Two
primary cells of emf E1 and E2 are joined in series with (i) same polarity
(ii) opposite polarity. The balancing point are found at length 350 cm and
50 cm in two cases respectively.
(i) Draw necessary circuit diagram
(ii) Find the value of emf E1 and E2 of the two cells (if E1 > E2)
Ans. E1 = 2V, E2 = 1.5V

34. Potential difference across terminals of a cell are measured (in volt)
against different current (in ampere) flowing through the cell. A graph was
drawn which was a straight line ABC. Using the data given in the graph.
Determine (i) the emf. (ii) The internal resistance of the cell.
Ans. r = 5Ω emf = 1.4V
35. Four cells each of internal resistance 0.8Ω and emf 1.4V, d are connected
(i) in series (ii) in parallel. The terminals of the battery are joined to the
lamp of resistance 10Ω. Find the current through the lamp and each cell in
both the cases.
Ans. Is = 0.424A, Ip = 0.137A current through each cell is 0.03A
36. In the figure, an ammeter A and a resistor of resistance R = 4Ω have been
connected to the terminals of the source to form a complete circuit. The
emf of the source is 12V having an internal resistance of 2Ω. Calculate
voltmeter and ammeter reading.
Ans. Voltmeter reading : 8V, Ammeter reading = 2A
37. In the circuit shown, the reading of voltmeter is 20V. Calculate resistance
of voltmeter. What will be the reading of voltmeter if this is put across
200Ω resistance ?
Unit I - II 41
38. For the circuit given below, find the potential difference b/w points B
and D. Ans. 1.46 Volts
39. (i) Calculate Equivalent Resistance of the given electrical network b/w
points A and B.
(ii) Also calculate the current through CD & ACB if a 10V d.c. source
is connected b/w points A and B and the value of R = 2Ω.
40. A potentiometer wire AB of length 1m is connected to a driver cell of emf

3V as shown in figure. When a cell of emf 1.5V is used in the secondary
circuit, the balance point is found to be 60 cm. On replacing this cell by a
cell of unknown emf, the balance point shifts to 80 cm. :

(i) Calculate unknown emf of ε′ the cell.
(ii) Explain with reason, whether the circuit works if the driver cell is
replaced with another a cell of emf IV.
(iii) Does the high resistance R, used in the secondary circuit affect the
balance point ? Justify your answer.
41. A battery of emf 10V and internal resistance 3Ω is connected to a
resistor. If the current in the circuit is 0.5A, what is the resistance of the
resistor ? What is the terminal voltage of the battery when the circuit is
closed ?
42. A network of resistance is connected to a 16V battery with internal
resistance of 1Ω as shown in Fig. on next page.
(i) Compute the equivalent resistance of the network.
(ii) Obtain the current in each resistor.
(iii) Obtain the voltage drop VAB, VBC & VCD.
43. The number density of conduction electrons in a Copper Conductor

estimated to be 8.5 × 1028 m–3. How long does an electron take to drift
from one end of a wire 3.0 m long to its other end ? The area of cross
section of the wire is 2.0 × 10–6 m2 and it is carrying a current of 3.0 A.
Unit I - II 43
44. A voltmeter of resistance 400Ω is used to measure the potential difference
across the 100Ω resistor in the circuit shown in figure. What will be the
reading of voltmeter.
45. Find magnitude of current supplied by battery. Also find potential

difference between points P and Q in the given fig. Ans.1A, 1.5V
46. A copper wire of length 3 m and radius r is nickel plated till its radius
becomes 2r. What would be the effective resistance of the wire, if specific
resistance of copper and nickel are ρc and ρn respectively.
[Hint : Pc = Rn =
R= .
47. In the figure, if the potential at point P is 100V, what is the potential at point
Q?
Ans. – 10V

48. Given two resistors X and Y whose resistances are to be determined using
an ammeter of resistance 0.5Ω and a voltmeter of resistance 20 kΩ. It is
known that X is in the range of a few ohms, while Y is in the range of
several thousand ohm. In each case, which of the two connection shown
should be chosen for resistance measurement ?
Ans. Small resistance : X will be preferred; large resistance :

Y will be preferred
49. When resistance of 2Ω is connected across the terminals of a battery,
the current is 0.5A. When the resistance across the terminal is 5Ω, the
current is 0.25A. (i) Determine the emf of the battery (ii) What will be
current drawn from the cell when it is short circuited.
Ans. E = 1.5 V, I = 1.5A
50. A part of a circuit in steady state, along with the currents flowing in
the branches and the resistances, is shown in the figure. Calculate energy
stored in the capacitor of 4µF capacitance. Ans. VAB = 20V, U = 8 × 10–4 J
51. With two resistance wires in two gaps of a meter bridge, balance point was
found to be 1/3m from zero end, when a 6Ω coil is connected in series with
smaller of two resistances the balance point shifted to 2/3m from the same
end. Find resistances of two wires. Ans. 2Ω, 4Ω
52. A voltmeter with resistance 500Ω is used to measure the emf of a cell of
internal resistance 4Ω. What will be the percentage error in the reading of
the voltmeter. Ans. 0.8%
Unit I - II 45
HINTS FOR 2 MARKS QUESTIONS
10. =
14.
21. φ = =
φ1 = 0, φ2 = 50 Vm, φ3 = 150 Vm
28. WBA = 90 (VB – VA) = 2 × 1000 = 2000 J
40. = ⇒ ⇒ = ∴ =1
(i) in series neA, (Vd) = neA2(Vd)2 ⇒ =1
(ii) i1R1 = i2R2 ⇒ =
43. Current through 5Ω = =
64. Sensitivity of Wheatstone Bridge is maximum when resistance of all

its four arms are nearly of same order, so the accuracy of result of the
experiment will be highest, if balance point is in the middle of wire.
32. In the capacitor the voltage increases from O to V, hence energy stored
will correspond to average which will be ½ QV. While the source is at
constant emf V. So energy supplied will be QV. The difference between
the two goes as heat and emf radiations.
35. Construct a closed system such that charge is enclosed within it. For the
charge on one face, we need to have two cubes place such that charge is

on the common face. According to Gauss’s theorem total flux through the
Gaussian surface (both cubes) is equal to . Therefore the flux through
one cube will be equal to
36. Work done = fd cos θ = qEd cos θ =
e
61. I = = v → speed
2πr / v
ev
=
2πr
ee 2 me 2 me5
= =
n 2πn 2 2πn3
62. In steady state the branch containing C can be omitted hence the current
I = =
For loop EBCDE

– VC – V + 2V – 1 (2R) = 0
⇒ VC =
51. If e.m.f. decreases ⇒ decreases ⇒ position of zero deflection increases.

52. Otherwise resistance per unit length of Bridge wire be different over
different length of meter Bridge.
54. Milliammeter. To produce large deflection due to small current we need a
large number of turns we need a large number of turns in armature coil ⇒
Resistance increases.
55. Temperature, Material Blue, Red, Orange, Gold
56. The electron number density is of the order of 1029 m–3 , ⇒ the net current
can be very high even if the drift spread is low.
57. V = E + ir
= 2 + 0.15
= 2.15V
Unit I - II 47
58. Affects the uniformity of the cross-section area of wire and hence changes
the potential drop across wire.
59. A potentiometer is said to be sensitive if :
(i) It can measure very small potential differences.
(ii) For a small change in potential difference being measured it shows
large change in balancing length.
HINTS FOR NUMERICALS
9. V = =
V =
C = = =
14. r = 1 mm
= ⇒ R = 2 mm
Q = 8q = 8 × 10 × 10–10 C
V =
= = 36000 Volt
21. Cx = C, Cy = KC = 4C
= C = 4 ⇒ C = 5µf
(a) Ceq = Cx = 5µf

Cy = 20µf
(b) = 12 (Vx = V, Vy = as q constant)
V = 9.6 Volt, Vx = 9.6 Volt, Vy = 2.4 Volt

(c) = =4
31. = ...(1)
= = ⇒ Rp = 4,
= ...(2)
⇒ u sing (1) & (2)
l2 – 85l + 1500 = 0
l = 25 cm or l = 60 cm
At l = 60 cm using (1) X =
l = 60 cm using (1) X = 12Ω.
32. ix = = =
= = = ⇒ x = 2 Ω.
HINTS FOR 3 MARKS QUESTIONS

16. If E′ be the electric field due to each plate (of large dimensions) then net
electric field between them
E = E′ + E′ ⇒ E′ = E/2
Force on change Q at some point between the plates F = QE
Force on one plate of the capacitor due to another plate F′ = QE′ = QE/2
17. V1 = =
V2 = = =
Vcommon = = = V′
Unit I - II 49
Charge transferred equal to
q′ = C1V1 – C1V′ =
= =
28. R1 = = = 25,000Ω
R2 = = = 20,000Ω.
As resistance changes with I, therefore conductor is non ohmic.
29. Rate of production of heat, P = I2R, for given l, P × R, ∴ ρnichrome > ρcu
∴ RNichrome > Rcu of same length and area of cross section.
30. (i) If I in circuit is constant because H = I2 Rt
(ii) If V in circuit is constant because H =
NUMERICALS
17. VA =
= k 4πaσ – k4πbσ + k4πcσ
= 4πaσ (a – b + c)
VB = =
=
VC =
When VA = VC
ac – bc + c2 = a2 – b2 + c2

c (a – b) = (a – b) (a + b)
c = a + b
19. Q = CV
Total charge Q = Total capacitance in series × voltage
= = 10 × 10–3 coulomb
VAB = = = 10V
VBC = = = 2V.
When B is earthed VB = 0, VA = 10V and VC = – 2V.

21. Before dielectric is introduced.
EA = EB =
E = EA + EB = CV2
After disconnecting the battery and then introducing dielectric
E′A =
E′B = =
=
E′ = E′A + E′B
33. Pot. gradient k = = 1Vm–1
l1 = 350 cm = 3.5 m
E1 + E2 = kl1 = 3.5 ...(1)
Unit I - II 51
E1 – E2 = 0.5 ...(2)
E1 = 2V, E2 = 1.5 Volt
39. RAB = 2Ω
ICD = 0, IACB = = = 2.5A
40. (i) ⇒ = = 2.0V
(ii) The circuit will not work if emf of driven cell is IV,/total Voltage
across AB is 1 V, which cannot balance the voltage 1.5V.
(iii) No, since at balance point no current flows through galvanometer G.
i.e., cell remains in open circuit.
41. E = I (R + r)
10 = 0.5 (R + 3)
R = 17Ω
V = E – Ir = 10 – 0.5 × 3 = 8.5V
42. Req = 7W
I4Ω = 1A, I1Ω = 2A, I12Ω = I6Ω = A,

VAB = 4V, VBC = 2V, VCD = 8V
43. I = enAVd =
t = = 2.7 × 104 s
44. I = = = 0.3A
P.d. across voltmeter & 100Ω combination
= = 24V.
When, I << r,
45. RAB = 4.5Ω
i = = = 1A.
iAP = iAQ = 0.5A, VAP = 3 ⇒ Vp = 3 Volt
VAQ = 1.5 VQ = 4.5 Volt
VQ – VP = 1.5 Volt
Unit I - II 53
51. For two resistor P and Q
= = = ...(i)
Q = 2P, P < Q
Now, P′ = P + 6, I′ = 2/3
= = =
= ...(ii)
On solving (i) & (ii), P = 2Ω, Q = 4Ω.

KEY POINTS
Physical Quantity Formulae SI Unit
Biot-Savart’s Law = Tesla (T);
= 104 Gauss = 1T
Magnetic field due to a straight B= T

current carrying conductor
Magnetic field at the centre of B= T
a circular loop B= (For n loops)
Magnetic Field at a Point on the B = T

Axis of a current carrying loop
When, x = 0, B =
For a << x, B =
For n loops, B =
Ampere’s Circuital Law T–m
Unit III - IV 55
Magnetic field due to a long B = µ0nI T
straight solenoid
At the end of solenoid,
B= µ0nI
If solenoid is filled with

material having magnetic
permeability µr
B = µ0µr nI
Magnetic field due to a toroidal B = µ0 nI T
solenoid
2
qE  x 
Motion of a charged particle y= m
2m  vx 
inside electric field
Megnetic force on a moving =q ( v × B) N

→
charge
Or F = qn B sin θ
Lorentz Force (Electric and = ( v × B)

→
N
Magnetic)
The Cyclotron
mv
Radius of circular path r=
Bq
The period of circular motion T=
The cyclotron frequency v=
1 2 B2 q 2 r 2
Maximum energy of the positive =mvmax = qV = qV
ions 2 2m
The radius corresponding to r=

maximum velocity

The maximum velocity Vmax =
The radius of helical path when
v and are inclined to each
mv sin θ
other by an angle θ r=
qB
→ →
Force on a current carrying cond- = I  l × B  N
uctor placed in a magnetic field  
Force per unit length betwen two f= Nm–1

parallel current carrying
conductors
Magnetic dipole moment = Am2 or JT–1
Torque on a rectangular current
carrying loop ABCD =

= MB sin α
If coil has n turns,
= n B I A sin α
α → angle between
normal drawn on the
plane of loop and
magnetic field
Period of oscillation of bar T= S
magnet if external magnetic
field
The potential energy associated U=– = – MB cos θ
with magnetic field
Current through a galvanometer I= A
φ→ angle by which the coil G→galvanometer constant

rotates
Unit III - IV 57
Sensitivity of a galvanometer or
Current sensitivity Is = rad A–1
Voltage sensitivity Vs = rad V–1
The current loop as a magnetic B= T
dipole on axis at very large

distance from the centre
Gyromagnetic ratio C Kg–1
→ Angular momentum
Bohr magneton (µe)min = h Am2
= 9.27×10–24
Magnetic dipole moment = JT–1 or Am2
µ 0  2Mr 
Magnetic field on axial line Baxial = T
4π  (r 2 − l 2 ) 2 
of a bar magnet
When, l < < r,
Beq =
Gauss’s Law in magnetism Tm2 or weber
Magnetic inclination (or Dip) tan δ = , δ→ angle of dip
Magnetic intensity (or Magnetic H= = nI Am–1
field strength) n is the no. of terms/length

Intensity of magnetization Im = Am–1

Magnetic flux φ= Weber or Tm2
Magnetic induction (or Magnetic B = B0 + µ0Im T

flux density or Magnetic field) = µ0 (H + Im)
Magnetic susceptibility χm = —
Magnetic permeability µ= TmA–1
(or NA–2)
Relative permeability (µ)
Curie’s Law χm = , C → curie constant
Conversion of a Galvanometer
into Ammeter
IgG = (I – Ig)S
Ig(G+S) = SI
S
Ig = I
G+S
S → shunt resistance
Conversion of a Galvanometer
into voltmeter
G → Galvanometer resistance
Unit III - IV 59
UNIT–III & UNIT–IV
MAGNETIC EFFECTS OF
CURRENT AND MAGNETISM
&
E.M.I. AND ALTERNATING
CURRENT
QUESTIONS
VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS (1 Mark)

1. Must every magnetic field configuration have a north pole and a south
pole? What about the field due to a toroid?
Ans. No, pole exists only when the source has some net magnetic moment.
There is no pole in toroid. Magnetic field due to a toroid B = µ0 nl
2. How are the figure of merit and current sensitivity of galvanometer
related with each other ?
Ans. Reciprocal.
3. Show graphically the variation of magnetic field due to a straight
conductor of uniform cross-section or radius ‘a’ and carrying steady
currently as a function of distance r (a > r) from the axis of the conductor.
Ans.
4. The force per unit length between two parallel long current carrying
conductor is F. If the current in each conductor is tripled, what would
be the value of the force per unit length between them?

Ans. F =

F= = 9 times
5. How does the angle of dip vary from equator to poles?

Ans. 0º to 90º
6. What is the effect on the current measuring range of a galvanometer
when it is shunted?
Ans. Increased.
7. An electric current flows in a horizontal wire from East to West. What
will be the direction of magnetic field due to current at a point (i) North
of wire; (ii) above the wire.
Ans.
(i) Going into the plane of the paper.

(ii) Going out of the plane of paper.
8. Suggest a method to shield a certain region of space from magnetic
fields.
Ans. By using a ferromagnetic case. Put an iron ring in the magnetic field
inside the ring field will be zero.
9. Why the core of a moving coil galvanometer is made of soft iron?
Ans. To increase magnetic flux linked and sensitivity.
10. Where on the earth’s surface is the vertical component of earth’s magnetic
field zero?
Ans. At equator.
11. If the current is increased by 1% in a moving coil galvanometer. What
will be percentage increase in deflection?
Ans. 1%.
12. Write S.I. unit of (i) Pole strength and (ii) Magnetic dipole moment.
Ans. (i) Am
(ii) Am2
13. If the magnetic field is parallel to the positive y-axis and the charged
particle is moving along the positive x-axis, which way would the
Lorentz force be for (a) an electron (negative charge), (b) a proton
(positive charge) ?
Unit III - IV 61
Ans. When velocity ( ) of positively charged particle is along x-axis and
the magnetic field ( ) is along y-axis, so × is along the z-axis
(Fleming’s left hand rule).
Therefore,
(a) for electron Lorentz force will be along -z axis;
(b) for a positive charge (proton) the force is along +z axis.
14. If a toroid uses Bismuth at its core, will the field in the core be lesser
or greater than when it is empty?
Ans. Bismuth is diamagnetic, hence, the overall magnetic field will be slightly
less.
15. An electron beam projected along + x-axis, experiences a force due to a
magnetic field along the + y-axis. What is the direction of the magnetic
field?
Ans. + Z-axis
16. What do you understand by figure of merit ?
Ans. Figure of merit is defined as the current required per division of deflection
derivation
K = , SI unit A/div
in observation for half deflection method
ig = Kθ, ig =
k =
It enables us to find current required for full scale deflection.

17. What is the direction of magnetic dipole moment ?
Ans. S to N.
18. What is the angle of dip at a place where vertical and horizontal
component of earth’s field are equal ?
Ans. 45°

19. Does a charge Particle gain K.E. when passed through magnetic field
region? Justify.
Ans. No, as the magnetic force acting on the charge particle is always
perpendicular to the velocity, hence
dω → →
= f . v = f v cos 90° = 0
dt
∴ there is no gain in KE of particle.
20. Sketch the magnetic field lines for a current carrying circular loop.
Ans.
21. Why core of a transformer is laminated ?

Ans. To reduce loss due to eddy currents.
22. What is the direction of induced currents in metal rings 1 and 2 seen
from the top when current I in the wire is increasing steadily ?
Ans.
23. In which of the following cases will the mutual inductance be (i)
minimum (ii) maximum?
Ans. (i) b (ii) c
Unit III - IV 63
24.
In a series L–C–R circuit, voltages across inductor, capacitor, and resistor
are VL, VC and VR respectively. What is the phase difference between
(i) VL and VR (ii) VL and VC?
π
Ans. (i) (ii) π
2
25. Why can’t transformer be used to step up or step down dc voltage?
Ans. In steady current no induction phenomenon will take place.
26. In an a.c. circuit, instantaneous voltage and current are V = 200 sin
300 t volt and i = 8 cos 300t ampere respectively. What is the average
power dissipated in the circuit?
π
Ans. As the phase difference between current and voltage is .
2
π

∴ Pav = IvEv cos =0
2
27. Sketch a graph that shows change in reactance with frequency of a
series LCR circuit. (x) (ν)
Ans.
28. A coil A is connected to an A.C. ammeter and another coil B to A

source of alternaing e.m.f. How will the reading of ammeter change if
a copper plate is introduced between the coils as shown.
Ans. Reading of ammeter will decrease due to eddy currents.

29. In a circuit instantaneously voltage and current are V = 150 sin 314t
volt and i = 12 cos 314t ampere respectively. Is the nature of circuit is
capacitive or inductive ?
Ans. i = 12 sin
i.e. Current is ahead the voltage by a phase difference of . Hence

circuit is a capacitive circuit.
30. In a series L–C–R circuit VL = VC ≠ VR. What is the value of power
factor?
Ans. At Resonance cos φ = 1.
31.
In an inductor L, current passed I0 and energy stored in it is U. If the
current is now reduced to I0/2, what will be the new energy stored in
the inductor?
Ans. UL ∝ I2 ⇒ U′ =
32. A square loop a, b, c, d of a conducting wire has been changed into a

rectangular loop a′, b′, c′, d′ as shown in figure. What is the direction
of induced current in the loop?
Ans. Clockwise.
33. Twelve wires of equal lengths are connected in the form of a skeleton of
a cube, which is moving with a velocity in the direction of magnetic
field . Find the emf in each arm of the cube.
Unit III - IV 65
Ans. emf in each branch will be zero since V & B are parallel for all arms.

∴ =q =0
34. Current versus frequency (I – v) graphs for two different series L–C–R
circuits have been shown in adjoining diagram. R1 and R2 are resistances
of the two circuits. Which one is greater–R1 or R2?
Ans. R1 > R2 as I is smaller in larger resistance.

35. Why do we prefer carbon brushes than copper in an a.c. generator?
Ans. Corrosion free and small expansion on heating maintains proper
contact.
36. What are the values of capacitive and inductive reactance in a dc circuit?
Ans. XC = ∞ for dc υ = 0 XC = =∞
XL = 0 & XL = ω L = 2πυL = 0
37.
Give the direction of the induced current in a coil mounted on an
insulating stand when a bar magnet is quickly moved along the axis of
the coil from one side to the other as shown in figure.

Ans. If observer is situated at the side from which bar magnet enters the
loop. The direction of current is clockwise when magnet moves towards
the loop and direction of current is anticlockwise when magnet moves
away from the loop.
38. In figure, the arm PQ is moved from x = 0 to x = 2b with constant
speed V. Consider the magnet field as shown in figure. Write
(i) direction of induced current in rod
(ii) polarity induced across rod.
39. A wire moves with some speed perpendicular to a magnetic field. Why
is emf induced across the rod?
Ans. Lorentz force acting on the free charge carrier of conducting wire hence
polarity developed across it.
40. Predict the polarity of the capacitor in the situation described in the
figure below.
Ans. Plate a will be positive with respect to ‘b’. When the observer is looking
from the side of moving bar magnet.
41. A circular coil rotates about its vertical diameter in a uniform horizontal
magnetic field. What is the average emf induced in the coil?
Ans. Zero
42. Define RMS Value of Current.
Unit III - IV 67
Ans. RMS value of ac is defined as that value of direct current which produces
the same heating effect in a given resistor as is produced by the given
alternating current when passed for the same time.
Irms = = 0.707 I0
43.
In given figure three curves a, b and c shows variation of resistance, (R)
capacitive reactance (xc) and inductive (xL) reactance with frequency.
Identify the respective curves for these.
a
b
X/R (Ω)
f(Hin
Frequency 3) Hz
44.
A long straight wire with current i passes (without touching) three square
wire loops with edge lengths 2L, 1.5L and L. The loops are widely
spaced (so as do not affect one another). Loops 1 and 3 are symmetric
about the long wire. Rank the loops according to the size of the current
induced in them if current i is (a) constant and (b) increasing.
Ans. (a) No induced current

(b) Current will be induced only in loop 2.
45. In an L–C circuit, current is oscillating with frequency 4 × 106 Hz.
What is the frequency with which magnetic energy is oscillating?
Ans. υm = 2υ = 8 × 106 Hz.
46. A current carrying wire (straight) passes inside a triangular coil as shown
in figure. The current in the wire is perpendicular to paper inwards.
Find the direction of induced current in the loop if current in the wire
is increasing with time.

Ans. Magnetic field line are tangential to the triangular plane θ = 90º so
φ=0
47. Wire carrying a study current and rod AB are in the same plane the
rod move parallel to wire with velocity v then which end of the rod is
at higher potential.
Ans. End A will be at higher potential.

48. The current i in an induction coil varies with time t according to the
graph
Draw the graph of induced e.m.f. with time.

Ans.
49. Can a capacitor of suitable capacitance replace an inductor in an AC

circuit?
Ans. Yes, because average power consumed in both is least while controlling
an AC.
Unit III - IV 69
50. In the given figure,
a cylinderical bar magnet is rotated about its axis. A wire is connected

from the axis and is made to touch the cylinderical surface through a
contact. Then, current in the Ammeter is.....
Ans. When cylinderical bar magnet is rotated about its axis, no change in
magnetic flux linked with the circuit take place hence no e.m.f. is
induced hence no current flows through the ammeter (A)
SHORT ANSWERS QUESTIONS (2 MARKS)
1. Write the four measures that can be taken to increase the sensitivity of
galvanometer.
2. A galvanometer of resistance 120Ω gives full scale deflection for a
current of 5mA. How can it be converted into an ammeter of range 0
to 5A? Also determine the net resistance of the ammeter.
3. A current loop is placed in a uniform magnetic field in the following
orientations (1) and (2). Calculate the magnetic moment in each case.
4. A current of 10A flows through a semicircular wire of radius 2 cm as

shown in figure (a). What is direction and magnitude of the magnetic
field at the centre of semicircle? Would your answer change if the wire
were bent as shown in figure (b) ?

5. A proton and an alpha particle of the same enter, in turn, a region of
uniform magnetic field acting perpendicular to their direction of motion.
Deduce the ratio of the radii of the circular paths described by the proton
and alpha particle.
6. Why does the susceptibility of dimagnetic substance independent of
temperature ?
Ans. As there is no permanent dipoles in dimagnetic substance, so, there is
no meaning of randomness of dipoles on increasing temp.
7. Mention two properties of soft iron due to which it is preferred for
making electromagnet.
Ans. Low retentivity, low coercivity
8. A magnetic dipole of magnetic moment M is kept in a magnetic field
B. What is the minimum and maximum potential energy? Also give the
most stable position and most unstable position of magnetic dipole.
9. What will be (i) Pole strength, (ii) Magnetic moment of each of new
piece of bar magnet if the magnet is cut into two equal pieces :
(a) normal to its length?
(b) along its length?
10. A steady current I flows along an infinitely long straight wire with circular
cross-section of radius R. What will be the magnetic field outside and
inside the wire at a point r distance far from the axis of wire?
11. A circular coil of n turns and radius R carries a current I. It is unwound
and rewound to make another square coil of side ‘a’ keeping number
of turns and current same. Calculate the ratio of magnetic moment of
the new coil and the original coil.
12. A coil of N turns and radius R carries a current I. It is unwound and
rewound to make another coil of radius R/2, current remaining the same.
Calculate the ratio of the magnetic moment of the new coil and original
coil.
13. At a place horizontal component of the earths magnetic field is B
and angle of dip at the place is 60°. What is the value of horizontal
component of the earths magnetic field.
(i) at Equator; (ii) at a place where dip angle is 30°
14. A galvanometer coil has a resistance G. 1% of the total current goes
through the coil and rest through the shunt. What is the resistance of
the shunt in terms of G?
Unit III - IV 71
15. Prove that magnetic moment of a hydrogen atom in its ground state is
eh/4πm. Symbols have their usual meaning.
16. Each of conductors shown in figure carries 2A of current into or out
of page. Two paths are indicated for the line integral . What is
the value of the integral for the path (a) and (b).
17. What is the radius of the path of an electron (mass 9 × 10–31 kg and
charge 1.6 × 10–19 C) moving at a speed of 3 × 107 m/s in a magnetic
field of 6 × 10–4 T perpendicular to it? What is its frequency? Calculate
its energy in keV. (1 eV = 1.6 × 10–19 J).
Ans. Radius, r = mv/(qB)
= 9.1 × 10–31 kg × 3 × 107 ms–1/(1.6 × 10–19 C × 6 × 10–4 T) = 20 cm
v = v/(2πr) = 1.7 ×107 Hz
E = (1/2)mv2 = (1/2) 9 × 10–31 kg × 9 × 1014 m2/s2
= 40.5 × 10–17 J = 4 × 10–16 J = 2.5 keV.
18. Why is it necessary for voltmeter to have a higher resistance?
Ans. Since voltmeter is to be connected across two points in parallel, if it
has low resistance, a part of current will pass through it which will
decrease actual potential difference to be measured.
19. Can d.c. ammeter use for measurement of alternating current?
Ans. No, it is based on the principle of torque. When ac is passing through
it (of freq. 50 Hz). It will not respond to frequent change in direction
due to inertia hence would show zero deflection.
20. Define the term magnetic dipole moment of a current loop. Write the
expression for the magnetic moment when an electron revolves at a
speed ‘v’, around an orbit of radius ‘r’ in hydrogen atom.
Ans. The product of the current in the loop to the area of the loop is the
magnetic dipole moment of a current loop.
The magnetic moment of electron

21. An ac source of rms voltage V is put across a series combination of
an inductor L, capacitor C and a resistor R. If VL, VC and VR are the
rms voltage across L, C and R respectively then why is V ≠ VL + VC
+ VR? Write correct relation among VL, VC and VR.
Ans. Hint :
VL, VC and VR are not in the same phase
VL + VC + VR > V
22. A bar magnet is falling with some acceleration ‘a’ along the vertical axis
of a coil as shown in fig. What will be the acceleration of the magnet
(whether a > g or a < g or a = g) if (a) coil ends are not connected to
each other? (b) coil ends are connected to each other?
23.
The series L–C–R circuit shown in fig. is in resonance state. What is
the voltage across the inductor?
Ans. [Hint VL = I XL where I = ]
24. The division marked on the scale of an a.c. ammeter are not equally
spaced. Why?
25. Circuit shown here uses an air filled parallel plate capacitor. A mica
sheet is now introduced between the plates of capacitor. Explain with
reason the effect on brightness of the bulb B.
Unit III - IV 73
26. In the figure shown, coils P and Q are identical and moving apart with
same velocity V. Induced currents in the coils are I1 and I2. Find I1/I2.
× × × × × ×
× × × × × ×
× × × × l × ×
V b V
× × × × × ×
l
× × × × × ×
× × × × × ×
b
27. An electron moving through magnetic field does not experience mgnetic
force, under what conditions is this possible ?
Ans. when electron moving parallel to magnetic field.
28. A 1.5 µF capacitor is charged to 57V. The charging battery is then
disconnected, and a 12 mH coil is connected in series with the capacitor
so that LC Oscillations occur. What is the maximum current in the coil?
Assume that the circuit has no resistance.
29. The self inductance of the motor of an electric fan is 10H. What should
be the capacitance of the capacitor to which it should be connected in
order to impart maximum power at 50Hz?
30. A galvanometer needs 50mV for full scale deflection of 50 Divisions.
Find it voltage sensitivity. What must be its resistance if its current
sensitivity is 1 Div/A.
θ 50Div
Ans. Vs = = = 103 div/ v Is → Current sensitivity
V 50mv
Rg = = 10–3W VS → Voltage sensitivity
31. How does an inductor behave in an AC circuit at very high frequency?

Justify.
32. An electric bulb is connected in series with an inductor and an AC
source. When switch is closed. After sometime an iron rod is inserted
into the interior of inductor. How will the brightness of bulb be affected?
Justify your answer.

Ans. Decreases, due to increase in inductive reactance.
33. Show that in the free oscillation of an LC circuit, the sum of energies
stored in the capacitor and the inductor is constant with time.
Ans. Hint : U = LI2 +
34. Show that the potential difference across the LC combination is zero at
the resonating frequency in series LCR circuit
Ans. Hint : P.d. across L is = IXL
P.D. across C is = IXC
⇒ V = IXL – IXC
at resonance XL = XC
⇒ V = O.
34. When a large amount of current is passing through solenoid, it contract,
explain why ?
Ans. Current in two consecutive turns being in same direction make them to
form unlike poles together hence, they attract each other.
35. for circuits used for transmitting electric power, a low power factor
implies large power loss in transmission. Explain.
∴ P = VI cos θ
I =
If cos φ is low I will be high ⇒ Large power loss.

36. An applied voltage signal consists of a superposition of DC Voltage and
an AC Voltage of high frequency. The circuit consists of an inductor
and a capacitor in series. Show that the DC signal will appear across
C where as AC signal will appear across L.
37. A bar magnet M is dropped so that is falls vertically through the coil
C. The graph obtained for voltage produced across the coil Vs time is
shown in figure.
Unit III - IV 75
(i) Explain the shape of the graph.
(ii) Why is the negative peak longer than the positive peak ?
Ans. (i) When the bar magnet moves towards the coil magnetic flux passing
through the coil increases as velocity of magnet increases in downward
direction, e.m.f. induced also increases, due to formation of similar
pole repulsive force decreases the rate of increase of flux.
(ii) once the magnet has passed through the coil, flux decreases in
downward direction but increases as self induced e.m.f. in the
coil maintains its flux in the same direction. Thus due to the addition
of self induced e.m.f. in same direction according to Lenz’s law.
38. What is the significance of Q-factor in a series LCR resonant circuit ?
39. How does mutual inductance of a pair of coils kept coaxially at a
distance in air change when
(i) the distance between the coils is increased?
(ii) an iron rod is kept between them?
40. Two circular conductors are perpendicular to each other as shown in
figure. If the current is changed in conductor B, will a current be induced
in the conductor A,
41. What is a radial magnetic field? Why is it required in a galvanometer ?

Ans. Using concave shaped pole of magnet and placing soft iron cylinderical
core, A magnetic field, having field lines along radii is called as radial
magnetic field.
To make Torque independent of ‘θ’ (constant) radial magnetic field is
required τ = NIAB sin θ
for radial Magnetic Field θ = 90°
τ = NIAB. (independent of θ)

42. The hysterisis loop of material depends not only on the nature of material
but also on the history of its magnetization cycles. Suggest a use of this
property of material.
Ans. The value of magnetization is record/memory of its cycles of
magnetisation. If information bits can be made correspond to these
cycles, the system displaying such hysterisis loop can act as a device
for storing information’s.
43. A wire in the form of a tightly wound Solenoid is connected to a DC
source, and carries a current. If the coil is stretched so that there are
gaps between successive elements of the spiral coil, will the current
increase or decrease ? Explain ?
Ans. When the coil is stretched so that there are gaps between successive
elements of the spiral coil i.e. the wires are pulled apart which lead
to the flux leak through the gaps. According to Lenz’s law, the e.m.f.
produced must oppose this decrease, which can be done by an increase
in current. So, the current will increase.
44. Show that the induced charge does not depend upon rate of change of
flux.
Ans. | E | = N
i =

∴ dq =
45. Consider a magnet surrounded by a wire with an on/off switch S (figure).
If the switch is thrown from the ‘off’ position (open circuit) to the ‘on’
position (Closed circuit) will a current flow in the circuit ? Explain.
Ans. φ = BA cos θ so flux linked will change only when either B or A or

the angle between B and A change.
Unit III - IV 77
When switch is thrown from off position to the on position, then
neither B nor A nor the angle between A and B change. Thus there is
no change in magnetic flux linked with the coil, hence no electromotive
force (e.m.f.) is produced and consequently no current will flow in the
circuit.
Short answers Questions (3 marks)
1. Derive the expression for force between two infinitely long parallel
straight wires carrying current in the same direction. Hence define
‘ampere’ on the basis of above derivation.
2. Define (i) Hysterisis (ii) Retentivity (iii) Coercivity
3. Distinguish between diamagnetic, paramagnetic and ferromagnetic
substances in terms of susceptibility and relative permeability.
4. Name all the three elements of earth magnetic field and define them
with the help of relevant diagram.
5. Describe the path of a charged particle moving in a uniform magnetic
field with initial velocity
(i) parallel to (or along) the field.
(ii) perpendicular to the field.
(iii) at an arbitrary angle θ (0º < θ < 90º).
6. Obtain an expression for the magnetic moment of an electron moving
with a speed ‘v’ in a circular orbit of radius ‘r’. How does the magnetic
moment change when :
(i) the frequency of revolution is doubled?
(ii) the orbital radius is halved?
7. State Ampere, circuital law. Use the law to obtain an expression for the
magnetic field due to a toroid.
8. Obtain an expression for magnetic field due to a long solenoid at a
point inside the solenoid and on the axis of solenoid.
9. Derive an expression for the torque on a magnetic dipole placed in a
magnetic field and hence define magnetic moment.
10. Derive an expression for magnetic field intensity due to a bar magnet
(magnetic dipole) at any point (i) Along its axis (ii) Perpendicular to
the axis.
11. Derive an expression for the torque acting on a loop of N turns of area
A of each turn carrying current I, when held in a uniform magnetic
field B.
12. How can a moving coil galvanometer be converted into a voltmeter
of a given range. Write the necessary mathematical steps to obtain the
value of resistance required for this purpose.

13. A long wire is first bent into a circular coil of one turn and then into a
circular coil of smaller radius having n turns. If the same current passes
in both the cases, find the ratio of the magnetic fields produced at the
centres in the two cases.
Ans. When there is only one turn, the magnetic field at the centre,
B =
2πa′ × n = 2πa ⇒ a′ = a/n
The magnetic field at its centre, B1 = = n2B
The ratio is, B1/B = n2

14. Obtain an expression for the self inductance of a straight solenoid of
length l and radius r (l > > r).
15. Distinguish between : (i) resistance and reactance (ii) reactance and
impedance.
16. In a series L–C–R circuit XL, XC and R are the inductive reactance,
capacitive reactance and resistance respectively at a certain frequency f.
If the frequency of a.c. is doubled, what will be the values of reactances
and resistance of the circuit?
Ans. [Hint : XL = ωL, XC = , R independent]
17. What are eddy currents? Write their any four applications.
18. In a series L–R circuit, XL = R and power factor of the circuit is P1.
When capacitor with capacitance C such that XL = XC is put in series,
the power factor becomes P2. Find P1/P2.
Ans. [Hint P = cos θ = ]
19. Instantaneous value of a.c. voltage through an inductor of inductance L

is e = e0 cos ωt. Obtain an expression for instantaneous current through
the inductor. Also draw the phasor diagram.
20. In an inductor of inductance L, current passing is I0. Derive an expression
for energy stored in it. In what forms is this energy stored?
Unit III - IV 79
21. Which of the following curves may represent the reactance of a series
LC combination.
22. A sinusoidal e.m.f. device operates at amplitude E0 and frequency

across a purely (1) resistive (2) capacitive (3) inductive circuit. If the
frequency of driving source is increased. How would (a) amplitude E0
and (b) amplitude I0 increase, decrease or remain same in each case?
23. A conducting rod held horizontally along East-West direction is dropped
from rest at certain height near Earth’s surface. Why should there be
an induced e.m.f. across the ends of the rod? Draw a graph showing
the variation of e.m.f. as a function of time from the instant it begins
to fall.
Ans. Hint : e = BlV and V = gt
24. In an LC circuit, resistance of the circuit is negligible. If time period

of oscillation is T then :
(i) at what time is the energy stored completely electrical
(ii) at what time is the energy stored completely magnetic
(iii) at what time is the total energy shared equally between the inductor
and capacitor.
Ans. (i) t = 0, T/2, 3T/2,........
(ii) t = T/4, 3T/4, 5T/4...........
(iii) t =

25. An alternating voltage of frequency f is applied across a series LCR
circuit. Let fr be the resonance frequency for the circuit. Will the current
in the circuit lag, lead or remain in phase with the applied voltage when
(i) f > fr (ii) f < fr (iii) f = fr? Explain your answer in each case.
Ans. (i) Current will lag because.
VL < VC Hence VL – VC > O
(ii) Current will lead, because.
VL < VC Hence VL – VC < O
(iii) In phase
26. Figure (a), (b), (c) show three alternating circuits with equal currents.
If the frequency of alternating emf be increased, what will be the effect
on current in the three cases? Explain.
Ans. (i) No effect, R is not affected by frequency.

(ii) Current will decrease as XL increase.
(iii) Current will increase as XC decrease.
27. Study the circuit (a) and (b) shown in the figure and answer the following
questions.
(a) Under which condition the rms current in the two circuits to be the
same?
(b) Can the r.m.s. current in circuit (b) larger than that of in (a) ?
Ans. Irms(a) = Irms(b) =
Unit III - IV 81
(a)
Irms(a) = Irms(b)
when XL = Xc (resonance condition)
I rms(a) Z
= = 1
I rms(b) R
(b) As z R
Irms(a) Irms(b)
No, the rms current in circuit (b), cannot be larger than that in (a).
28. Can the instantaneous power output of an AC source ever be negative ?
Can average power output be negative ? Justify your answer.
Ans. Yes, Instantaneous power output of an AC source can be negative.
Instantaneous power output P = EI = [cos φ – cos (2ωt + φ)]
No, Pavc = Vrms Irms cos f

Pavc > 0
cos φ = >0
29. A device ‘X’ is connected to an AC source. The variation of voltage,
current and power in one complete cycle is shown in fig.
(a) Which curves shows power consumption over a full cycle?

(b) What is the average power consumption over a cycle?
(c) Identify the device X if curve B shows voltage.
Ans. (a) A (a curve of power have a max. Amplitude of V and I)
(b) Zero.
(c) as average power is zero the device is a capacitor.

1. How will a diamagnetic, paramagnetic and a ferromagnetic material
behave when kept in a non-uniform external magnetic field? Give two
examples of each of these materials. Name two main characteristics of
a ferromagnetic material which help us to decide suitability for making.
(i) Permanent magnet (ii) Electromagnet.
2. State Biot-Savart law. Use it to obtain the magnetic field at an axial
point, distance d from the centre of a circular coil of radius ‘a’ and
carrying current I. Also compare the magnitudes of the magnetic field
of this coil at its centre and at an axial point for which the value of d
is .
3. Write an expression for the force experienced by a charged particle
moving in a uniform magnetic field B. With the help of diagram, explain
the principle and working of a cyclotron. Show that cyclotron frequency
does not depend on the speed of the particle.
*4. Write the principle, working of a moving coil galvanometer with the
help of neat labelled diagram. What is the importance of radial field and
phosphor bronze used in the construction of moving coil galvanometer?
5. Draw a labelled diagram to explain the principle and working of an a.c.
generator. Deduce the expression for emf generated. Why cannot the
current produced by an a.c. generator be measured with a moving coil
ammeter?
6. Explain, with the help of a neat and labelled diagram, the principle,
construction and working of a transformer.
7. An L–C circuit contains inductor of inductance L and capacitor of
capacitance C with an initial charge q0. The resistance of the circuit is
negligible. Let the instant the circuit is closed be t = 0.
(i) What is the total energy stored initially?
(ii) What is the maximum current through inductor?
(iii) What is the frequency at which charge on the capacitor will oscillate?
(iv) If a resistor is inserted in the circuit, how much energy is eventually
dissipated as heat?
Unit III - IV 83
8. An a.c. i = i0 sin ωt is passed through a series combination of an inductor
(L), a capacitor (C) and a resistor (R). Use the phasor diagram to obtain
expressions for the (a) impedance of the circuit and phase angle between
voltage across the combination and current passed in it. Hence show
that the current
(i) leads the voltage when ω <
(ii) is in phase with voltage when ω = .
9.
Write two differences in each of resistance, reactance and impedance
for an ac circuit. Derive an expression for power dissipated in series
LCR circuit.
NUMERICALS
1. An electron travels on a circular path of radius 10 m in a magnetic field
of 2 × 10–3 T. Calculate the speed of electron. What is the potential
difference through which it must be accelerated to acquire this speed?
[Ans. Speed = 3.56 × 109 m/s; V = 3.56 × 107 volts]
2. A charge particle of mass m and charge q entered into magnetic field B
normally after accelerating by potential difference V. Calculate radius
of its circular path. [Ans. r = ]
3. Calculate the magnetic field due to a circular coil of 500 turns and of
mean diameter 0.1m, carrying a current of 14A (i) at a point on the
axis distance 0.12 m from the centre of the coil (ii) at the centre of the
coil.
[Ans. (i) 5.0 × 10–3 Tesla; (ii) 8.8 × 10–2 Tesla]
4. An electron of kinetic energy 10 keV moves perpendicular to the direction
of a uniform magnetic field of 0.8 milli tesla. Calculate the time period
of rotation of the electron in the magnetic field.
[Ans. 4.467 × 10–8 s.]
5. If the current sensitivity of a moving coil galvanometer is increased by
20% and its resistance also increased by 50% then how will the voltage
sensitivity of the galvanometer be affected? [Ans. 25% decrease]

6. A uniform wire is bent into one turn circular loop and same wire is
again bent in two circular loop. For the same current passed in both
the cases compare the magnetic field induction at their centres.
[Ans. Increased 4 times]
7. A horizontal electrical power line carries a current of 90A from east to
west direction. What is the magnitude and direction of magnetic field
produced by the power line at a point 1.5 m below it?
[Ans. 1.2 × 10–5 T South ward]
8. A galvanometer with a coil of resistance shows full scale deflection
for a potential difference 25mV. What should be the value of resistance
to convert the galvanometer into a voltmeter of range 0V to 5V. How
should it be converted? [Ans. 1910 Ω in series]
9. Two identical circular loops P and Q carrying equal currents are placed
such that their geometrical axis are perpendicular to each other as
shown in figure. And the direction of current appear’s anticlockwise
as seen from point O which is equidistant from loop P and Q. Find
the magnitude and direction of the net magnetic field produced at the
point O.
x x
tan θ = = 1, θ = π/4. [Ans. ]
10. A cyclotron’s oscillator frequency is 10 MHz. What should be the

operating magnetic field for accelerating protons, if the radius of its dees
is 60 cm ? What is the kinetic energy of the proton beam produced by
the accelerator? Given e = 1.6 × 10–19 C, m = 1.67 × 10–27 kg. Express
your answer in units of MeV [1MeV = 1.6 × 10–13 J].
[Ans. B = 0.656T, Emax = 7.421 MeV]
11. The coil of a galvanometer is 0.02 × 0.08 m2. It consists of 200 turns
of fine wire and is in a magnetic field of 0.2 tesla. The restoring torque
Unit III - IV 85
constant of the suspension fibre is 10–6 Nm per degree. Assuming the
magnetic field to be radial.
(i) What is the maximum current that can be measured by the
galvanometer, if the scale can accommodate 30° deflection?
(ii) What is the smallest, current that can be detected if the minimum
observable deflection is 0.1°?
[Ans. (i) 4.69 × 10–4 A; (ii) 1.56 × 10–6 A]
12. A voltmeter reads 5V at full scale deflection and is graded according
to its resistance per volt at full scale deflection as 5000ΩV–1. How will
you convert it into a voltmeter that reads 20V at full scale deflection?
Will it still be graded as 5000 ΩV–1? Will you prefer this voltmeter to
one that is graded as 2000 ΩV–1? [Ans. 7.5 × 104 Ω]
13. A short bar magnet placed with its axis at 30° with an external field
1000G experiences a torque of 0.02 Nm. (i) What is the magnetic
moment of the magnet. (ii) What is the work done in turning it from
its most stable equilibrium to most unstable equilibrium position?
[Ans. (i) 0.4 Am2; (ii) 0.08 J]
14. What is the magnitude of the equatorial and axial fields due to a bar
magnet of length 4 cm at a distance of 40 cm from its mid point? The
magnetic moment of the bar magnet is a 0.5Am2.
[Ans. BE = 7.8125 × 10–7 T; BA = 15.625 × 10–7 T]
15. What is the magnitude of magnetic force per unit length on a wire
carrying a current of 8A and making an angle of 30° with the direction
of a uniform magnetic field of 0.15T?
16. Two moving coil galvanometers, M1 and M2 have the following
specifications.
R1 = 10Ω, N1 = 30, A1 = 3.6 × 10–3m2, B1 = 0.25T
R2 = 14Ω, N2 = 42, A2 = 1.8 × 10–3m2, B2 = 0.50T
Given that the spring constants are the same for the two galvanometers,
determine the ratio of (a) current sensitivity (b) voltage sensitivity of
M1 & M2. [Ans. (a) 5/7 (b) 1:1]
17. In the given diagram, a small magnetised needle is placed at a point O.
The arrow shows the direction of its magnetic moment. The other arrows
shown different positions and orientations of the magnetic moment of
another identical magnetic needs B.
(a) In which configuration is the systems not in equilibrium?

(b) In which configuration is the system.
(i) stable and (ii) unstable equilibrium?
(c) Which configuration corresponds to the lowest potential energy
among all the configurations shown?
18. In the circuit, the current is to be measured. What is the value of the
current if the ammeter shown :
(a) is a galvanometer with a resistance RG = 60 Ω,

(b) is a galvanometer described in (i) but converted to an ammeter by
a shunt resistance rs = 0.02Ω
(c) is an ideal ammeter with zero resistance?
19. An element ∆I = ∆x· is placed at the origin and carries a large current
I = 10A. What is the magnetic field on the y-axis at a distance of 0.5
m. ∆x = 1 cm.
Y
0.5
X
|∆x|
Unit III - IV 87
20. A straight wire of mass 200 g and length 1.5 m carries a current of
2A. It is suspended in mid-air by a uniform horizontal magnetic field
B. What is the magnitude of the magnetic field?
21. A rectangular loop of sides 25 cm and 10 cm carrying current of 15A
is placed with its longer side parallel to a long straight conductor
2.0 cm apart carrying a current of 25A. What is the new force on the
loop ? [Ans. 7.82 × 10–4 N towards the conductor]
Hint :
F1 = = 9·38 × 10–4 N attractive
F2 = = 1.56 × 10–4 N repulsive
Net F = F1 – F2 = 7.82 × 10–4 N
22.
In a chamber of a uniform magnetic field 6.5G is maintained. An electron
is shot into the field with a speed of 4.8 × 106 ms–1 normal to the field.
Explain why the path of electron is a circle.
(a) Determine the radius of the circular orbit (e = 1.6 × 10–19 C, me =
9.1 × 10–31 kg)
(b) Obtain the frequency of resolution of the electron in its circular
orbit.
Hint : (a) r =
= 4.2 cm
(b) frequency v = = 18 MHz
23.
The horizontal and vertical components of earth’s magnetic field at a
place are 0.22G and 0.38G respectively. Calculate the angle of dip and
resultant intensity of earth’s field.

Hint : tan δ =
= 1.73 = 60º, B = = 0.44 G
24. Figure shows the path of an electron that passes through two regions
containing uniform magnetic fields of magnitude B1 and B2. Its path in
each region is a half circle. (a) which field is stronger? (b) What are
the directions of two fields? (c) Is the time spend by the electron in
the , region greater than, less than, or the same as the time spent in
region?
[Ans. (a) B1 > B2; (b) B1 inward; B2 outward (c) Time spent in
B1 < Time spent in B2]
25.
In a series C–R circuit, applied voltage is V = 110 sin 314t volt. What
is the (i) The peak voltage (ii) Average voltage over half cycle ?
26. Magnetic flux linked with each turn of a 25 turns coil is 6 milliweber.
The flux is reduced to 1 mWb in 0.5s. Find induced emf in the coil.
27. The current through an inductive circuit of inductance 4mH is i = 12
cos 300t ampere. Calculate :
(i) Reactance of the circuit.
(ii) Peak voltage across the inductor.
28. A power transmission line feeds input power at 2400 V to a step down
ideal transformer having 4000 turns in its primary. What should be
number of turns in its secondary to get power output at 240V?
29. The magnetic flux linked with a closed circuit of resistance 8Ω varies
with time according to the expression φ = (5t2 – 4t + 2) where φ is
in milliweber and t in second. Calculate the value of induce current at
t = 15 s.
Unit III - IV 89
30. A capacitor, a resistor and 4 henry inductor are connected in series
to an a.c. source of 50 Hz. Calculate capacitance of capacitor if the
current is in phase with voltage.
31. A series C–R circuit consists of a capacitance 16 mF and resistance 8Ω.
If the input a.c. voltage is (200 V, 50 Hz), Calculate (i) voltage across
capacitor and resistor. (ii) Phase by which voltage lags/leads current.
32. A rectangular conducting loop of length l and breadth b enters a uniform
magnetic field B as shown below.
The loop is moving at constant speed v and at t = 0 it just enters the

field B. Sketch the following graphs for the time interval t = 0 to

t= .
(i) Magnetic flux versus time

(ii) Induced emf versus times
(iii) Power versus time
Resistance of the loop is R.
33. A charged 8mF capacitor having charge 5mC is connected to a 5mH
inductor. What is :
(i) the frequency of current oscillations?
(ii) the frequency of electrical energy oscillations in the capacitor?
(iii) the maximum current in the inductor?
(iv) the magnetic energy in the inductor at the instant when charge on
capacitor is 4mC?
34. A 31.4Ω resistor and 0.1H inductor are connected in series to a 200V,
50Hz ac source. Calculate
(i) the current in the circuit
(ii) the voltage (rms) across the inductor and the resistor.
(iii) is the algebraic sum of voltages across inductor and resistor more
than the source voltage ? If yes, resolve the paradox.

35. A square loop of side 12 cm with its sides parallel to X and Y-axis is
moved with a velocity of 8 cm/s in positive x-direction. Magnetic field
exists in z-directions.
(i) Determine the direction and magnitude of induced emf if the field
changes with 10–3 Tesla/cm along negative z-direction.
(ii) Determine the direction and magnitude of induced emf if field
changes with 10–3 Tesla/s along +z direction.
Ans. (i) Rate of change of flux = induced emf
2 –3
= (0.12) × 10 × 8
= 11.52 × 10–5 Wb/s in +z direction.
(ii) Rate of change of flux = induced emf
= (0.12)2 × 10–3 × 8
= 11.52 × 10–5 Wb/s in –z direction.
36. Figure shows a wire ab of length l which can slide on a U-shaped rail
of negligible resistance. The resistance of the wire is R. The wire is
pulled to the right with a constant speed v. Draw an equivalent circuit
diagram representing the induced emf by a battery. Find the current in
the wire.
37. A loop, made of straight edges has six corners at A(0, 0, 0), B(1, 0,
0), C(1, 1, 0), D(0, 1, 0), E(0, 1, 1) and F(0, 0, 1) a magnetic field
B = B0 (iˆ + kˆ) T is present in the region. Find the flux passing through
the loop ABCDEFA?
Unit III - IV 91
Ans. Loop ABCDA lie in x-y plane whose area vector A1 = where
ADEFA lie in y-z plane where are vector A2 =

φ = B.A, A = A1 + A2 = ( + )
B = B0 = 2 B0L2 Wb.
38. A coil of 0.01 H inductance and 1Ω resistance is connected to 200V, 50
Hz AC supply. Find the impendence and time lag between maximum
alternating voltage and current.
Ans. Z= = = 3.3Ω
tan φ = = = 3.14
φ 72º
Phase diff. φ = rad.
ω= , time lag ∆t =
= s
39. An electrical device draws 2 KW power from AC mains (Voltage = 223V,
Vrms = ). The current differ (lags) in phase by φ

as compared to voltage. Find
(a) R
(b) XC – XL
(c) Im
Ans. P = 2KW = 2000W ; tan φ = ; Im = I0 ? R = ? XC – XL = ?
Vrms = V = 223V
Z = = 25Ω

Z =
625 = R2 + (XL – XC)2
Again
tan φ =
XL – XC =
using this R = 20Ω; XL – XC = 15Ω, I = = = 8·92 A,
Im = I = 12.6A
40. In a LCR circuit, the plot of Imax versus ω is shown in figure. Find the
bandwith ?
Ans. Irms = = 0.7 At
from diagram w1 = 0.8 rad/s

w2 = 1.2 rad/s

∆w = 1.2 – 0.8 = 0.4 rad/s
41. An inductor of unknown value, a capacitor of 100µF and a resistor of
10Ω are connected in series to a 200V, 50Hz ac source. It is found that
the power factor of the circuit is unity. Calculate the inductance of the
inductor and the current amplitude.
Ans. L = 0.10 H, I0 = 28.3A
Unit III - IV 93
42. A 100 turn coil of area 0.1 m2 rotates at half a revolution per second.
It is placed in a magnetic field of 0.01 T perpendicular to the axis of
rotation of the coil. Calculate max. e.m.f. generated in the coil.
Ans. ε0 = 0.314 Volt.
43. The magnetic flux linked with a large circular coil of radius R is 0.5
× 10–3 Wb, when current of 0.5A flows through a small neighbouring
coil of radius r. Calculate the coefficient of mutual inductance for the
given pair of coils.
If the current through the small coil suddenly falls to zero, what would
be the effect in the larger coil.
Ans. M = 1mH.
If the current through small coil suddenly falls to zero, [as, e2 = – M
] so initially large current is induced in larger coil, which soon

becomes zero.
2 MARKS QUESTIONS
2. S = × 120 = 0.12Ω.
3. (i) – mB (ii) zero
4. (i) B = = 5π ×10–5 T (inwards).
(ii) B = 5p × 10–5 T (inwards).
5. rp = and rα = = 2rα ⇒ .
7. Low Retentivity and high permeability.

8. Minimum potential = – MB when θ = 0 (most stable position)
Maximum potential = MB when θ = 180º (most unstable position).
9. (a) Pole strength same; magnetic moment half.
(b) Pole strength half; magnetic moment half.

10. B (2πr) = µ0
B = (R r)
= µ0I
∴ B = (r R)
2
11. M1 = NIπR2; M2 = NIa2 ∴ M2 = a 2
M1 R
2πrN = 4aN ⇒ a =
= π/4
12. = (As N2 = 2N1)
13. 2B, .
16. (a) = µ0I = 2µ0 Tm

(b) zero
22. (i) a = g because the induced emf set up in the coil does not produce
any current and hence no opposition to the falling bar magnet.
(ii) a < g because of the opposite effect caused by induced current.
23. Current at resonance I = .
Unit III - IV 95

∴ Voltage across inductor VL = I.XL = IωL = (2πv) L.
24. A.C. ammeter works on the principle of heating effect H α I2.

25. Brightness of bulb depends on current. P α I2 and
I= where Z = and
XC =
X C α , when mica sheet is introduced capacitance C increases
,
XC decreases, current increases and therefore brightness increases.
26. Current I = ε/R
In coil P, I1 = E1/R =
Bvl b
In coil Q, I2 = E2/R = I2/I2 = .
R l
27. Electro magnetic energy is conserved.
µE(max) = µB(max)
1/2 = LI2
I = 637 mA
–6
28. 10 F.
40. No current is induced in coil A since angle is 90.
ANSWER FOR NUMERICALS
15. Force experienced by current carrying conductor in magnetic field.
F= = IBL sin θ

Hence, force permit length, f = IB sin 30º
= 8 × 0.15 × 1/2 = 0.6 Nm–1
16. (a) Current sensitivity,
Ratio of current Sensitivity =
= = 5/7
(b) Voltage sensitivity,
Ratio of voltage sensitivity =
= =1
17. (a) For equilibrium, the dipole moment should be parallel or auto parallel
to B. Hence, AB1 and AB2 are not in equilibrium.
(b) (i) for stable equilibrium, the dipole moments should be parallel,
examples : AB5 and AB6 (ii) for unstable equilibrium, the dipole
moment should be anti parallel examples : AB3 and AB4.
(c) Potential energy is minimum when angle between M and B is 0º,
i.e, U = – MB Example : AB6.
18. (a) Total resistance, RG + 3 = 63Ω.
Hence, I = = 0.048A
(b) Resistance of the galvanometer as ammeter is
= 0.02Ω
Total resistance R = 0.02Ω + 3Ω = 3.02Ω
Unit III - IV 97
Hence, I = = 0.99A.
(c) For the ideal ammeter, resistance is zero, the current,
I = 3/3 = 1.00A.
19. From Biot-Savart’s Law, = Id sin θ /r2

dI = ∆x = 1 cm = 10–2 m, I = 10A, r = y = 0.5 m
µ0/4π = 10–7 Tm/A, θ = 90º so sin θ = 1

= 4 × 10–8 T along + z axis
20. Force experienced by wire Fm = BIl (due to map field)

The force due to gravity, Fg = mg

mg = BIl ⇒ B = mg/Il = = 0.657 T
[Earth’s mag. field 4 × 10–5 T is negligible]

25. (i) V0 = 110 volt
(ii) Vav1/2 = = = 70 volt.
26. Induced emf ε = – N = –25 = 0.25 volt.
27. (i) Reactance XL = ωL = 300 × 4 × 10–3 = 1.2 Ω.

(ii) Peak Voltage V0 = i0XL = 12 × 1.2 = 14.4 volt.
28. In ideal transformer Pin = P0
VPIP = VSIS
NS = × 4000 = 400
29.
Induced current I = ε/R
where ε = = – 10t + 4
ε = – 10(15) + 4 = – 146 mV

where φ = 5t2 – 4t + 2 and R = 8Ω
∴ I=– A = – .018A
30. When V and I in phase
XL = XC, v =
C =
= 2.5 × 10–5 = 25 µF.
31. Current in the circuit I =
When Z= XC =
Then total voltage across capacitor and resistor.

VC = iXC’ VR = IR.
(ii) tan φ = [V lags current]
32.
(i) φ = Blb
(ii) ε0 = Bvb
(iii) P0 =
33. (i) Frequency of current oscillations
v=
Unit III - IV 99
(ii) Frequency of electrical energy oscillation vc = 2v
q0
(iii) Maximum current in the circuit I0 =
LC
(iv) Magnetic energy in the inductor when charge on capacitor is 4mC.
UL = U – U C =
Here q0 = 5mC; q = 4mC

34. Current in the circuit :
(i) I = , where Z =
(ii) RMS voltage across L and R

VL = I . XL; VR = IR
(iii) (VL + VR) > V because VL and VR are not in same phase.


Unit V & VI
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES
AND OPTICS
KEY POINTS
1. EM waves are produced by accelerated (only by the change in speed)
charged particles.
2. and vectors oscillate with the frequency of oscillating charged
particles.
3. Propagation of wave along x-direction.
4. Properties of em waves :
(i) Transverse nature
(ii) Can travel though vacuum.
E E
(iii)
0
= = λv = C C → Speed of EM waves.
B0 B
(iv) Speed of em wave C = 3 × 108 m/s in vacuum and

C = (in vaccum)
Unit V - VI 101
(v) In any medium V =
Where µ = µr µ0 ε = εr εo
= n refractive index of medium
Also V =
(vi) A material medium is not required for the propagation of e.m.
waves.
(vii) Wave intensity equals average of Pointing vector I = .
(viii) Average electric and average magnetic energy densities are equal.
UE = and UB =
(ix) The electric vecotr is responsible for optical effects due to electro
magnetic wave. For this reason, electric vector is called light vector.
 In an em spectrum, diffferent waves have different frequency and wavelengths.
 Penetration power of em waves depends on frequency. Higher, the frequency
larger the penetration power.
 Wavelength λ and frequency v are related with each other ν = νλ. Here V is
the wave velocity.
 A wave travelling along + x axis is represented by
Ey = E0 cos(ωt – kx)
Bz = B0 cos(ωt – kx)
ω = = 2πv
= λv = V = C wave speed
k =
v → frequency
= wave number.

Electromagnetic Soectrum
Name Wavelength range Production Uses

Gamma Rays < 10–12 m Gamma rays produced in treatment of cancer
in radio active decay of and to carry out
nucleus nuclear reactions.
x-rays 10–9 m to 10–12 m x-ray tubes or inner used as diagnostic tool
shell electrons in medical to find out
fractures in bones. to
find crack, flaws in
metal part of machine
UV rays 4 × 10–7 to 10–9 m by very hot bodies like in water purifier
sun and by UV lamps in detection of forged
documents, in food
preservation.
–7
Visible light 7 × 10 m to by accelerated tiny to see every thing
4 × 10–7m (electrons) charge around us
particles
IR rays –3
10 m to due to vibration of in green houses to keep
7 × 10–7 m atoms plant warm to reveal
secret writings on
walls in photography
during fog and smoke
–1 –3
Microwaves 10 m to 10 m produced in klystron in RADAR
Valve and magnetron in microwave ovens
Valve
Radio waves > 0.1 m by accelerated charged in radio telecommuni-
particles excited cation system in radio
electrical circuits astrology
excited
Displacement Current—Current produced due to time varying electric field
or electric flux.
ID = , φe is electric flux
Modified Ampere’s Circuital law by Maxwell

→ →  d φe 
∫
B .d l = µ 0  IC + ε 0 dt 
Ic → Conduction current
IC = ID
Unit V - VI 103
OPTICS
RAY OPTICS
GIST
1. REFLECTION BY CONVEX AND CONCAVE MIRRORS
a.
Mirror formula where u is the object distance, v is the
image distance and f is the focal length.

v f −v f
b. Magnification m ==
– = m is –ve for real images
u f f −u
and +ve for virtual images.
c. Focal length of a mirror depends up only on the curvature of the
mirror . It does not depend on the material of the mirror or
on wave length of light.

2.
REFRACTION
d. Ray of light bends when it enters from one medium to the other,
having different optical densities.
When light wave travels from one medium to another, the wave
length and velocity changes but frequency of light wave remains
the same.
e. Sun can be seen before actual sunrise and after actual sun set due
to Atmospheric refraction.
f. An object under water (any medium) appears to be raised due to
refraction when observed obliquely.

n= n ® refractive index
and normal shift in the position (apparent) of object is

x= where t is the actual depth of the medium.
g. Snell’s law states that for a given colour of light, the ratio of sine
of the angle of incidence to sine of angle of refraction is a constant,
when light travels from one medium to another.

n1 sin q1 = n2 sin q2

h. Absolute refractive index is the ratio between the velocities of light
in vacuum to velocity of light in medium. For air regractive index is
1.003 for practical uses taken to be 1
n=
3. T.I.R.
i. When a ray of light travels from denser to rarer medium and if the
angle of incidence is greater than critical angle, the ray of light is
refiected back to the denser medium. This phenomenon is called
total internal refiection. (T.I.R.)
sin C =
Essential conditions for T.I.R.

1. Light should travel from denser to rarer medium.
2. Angle of incidence must be greater than critical angle
( i > iC)
j. Diamond has a high refractive index, resulting with a low critical
angle (C = 24.40). This promotes a multiple total internal reflection
causing its brilliance and luster. Working of an optical fibre and
formation of mirage are the examples of T.I.R.
4. When light falls on a convex refracting surface, the relation among, u,
n n n2 − n1
v and R is given by 2 − 1 = .
v u R
5. Lens maker formula for thin lens formula is given by
For Convex Lens R1 + ve; R2 – ve and Concave lens R1 –ve; R2 + ve.

The way in which a lens behaves as converging or diverging depends
upon the values of n2 and n1.
6. When two lenses are kept in contact the equivalent focal length is given
by
1 1 x
= + – and Power P = P1 + P2
f1 f 2 f1 f 2
Magnification m = ml × m2
7. The lens formula is given by
Unit V - VI 105
Sign convention for mirrors and lenses → Distances in the direction
of incident ray are taken as positive. All the mesurement is done from
pole (P).

8. When ray of light passes through a glass prism it undergoes refraction,
then A + δ = i + e and, the expression of refractive index of glass prism
n=
As the angle of incidence increses, the angle of deviation decreases,

reaches a minimum value and then increases. This minimum value of
angle of deviation is called angle of minimum deviation “δm”.
9.
Where d is minimum, i = e, refracted ray lies parallel to the base. For

a small angled prism d min = (n – 1)A.
10. When white light is passed through a glass prism, it splits up into its
constituent colours (Monochromatic). This phenomenon is called
Dispersion.
11. Scattering of light takes place when size of the particle is very small
as compared to the wavelength of light.
Intensity of scattered light is
The following properties or phenomena can be explained by scattering.
(i) Sky is blue.
(ii) Sun looks reddish at the time of sunrise and sunset.
(iii) Red light used in danger mark.
(iv) Clouds are white.

Compound Microscope :
Objective : The converging lens nearer to the object.

Eyepiece : The converging lens through which the final image is seen.
Both are of short length. Focal length of eyepiece is slightly greater
than that of the objective.
4. Angular Magnification or Magnifying Power (M) :
M = Me × Mo
(a) When final is formed atleast distance of distinct vision.
(b) When final image is formed at infinity M =

–L D
fO fe
(Normal adjustment i.e. image at infinity) Length of tube
L = |vo| + |ue|
5. Formation of Image by Astronomical Telescope : at infinity Normal
Adjustment Position)
Unit V - VI 107
Focal length of the objective is much greater than that of the eyepiece.
A perture of the objective is also large to allow more light to pass through
it.
6. Angular magnification or Magnifying power of a telescope.
(a) When final image is formed at infinity (Normal adjustment)
(fo + fe = L is called the length of the telescope in normal adjust-
ment).
(b) When final image is formed at least distance of distinct vision.
m = and L = fo + | ue |
7. Newtonian Telescope : (Reflecting Type)
8. Cassegrain telescope refer

Limit of resolution and resolving power Compound Microscope
λ
Limit of resolution ∆d =
2µ sin θ
Resolving Power = =
Resolving power depends on (i) wavelength λ, (ii) refractive Index of the
medium between the object and the objective and (iii) half angle of the
cone of light from one of the objects θ.
Telescope : Limit of resolution dθ =
1
Resolving Power ==
dq
D → diameter of objective.
Resolving power depends on (i) wavelength λ, (ii) diameter of the objective
D.
WAVE OPTICS
Wave front :
A wavelet is the point of disturbance due to propagation of light.
A wavefront is the locus of points (wavelets) having the same phase of
oscillations.
A perpendicular to a wavefront in forward direction is called a ray.
Unit V - VI 109
INTERFERENCE OF WAVES
Young’s Double Slit Experiment
The waves from S1 and S2 reach the point P with some phase difference
and hence path difference
∆ = S2P – S1P
S2P2 – S1P2 =
(S2P – S1P) (S2P + S1P) = 2 yd S2 P ≈ S1P ≈ D

∆ (2D) = 2 yd
∆ =

Interference phenomenon
1. Resultant intensity at a point on screen
IR = R (a12 + a22 + 2a1a2 cos f)
IR = I1 + I2 + Where I1 =
I2 =
If I1 = I2 = Io, then IR =
2. Imax = If I1 = I2 = I0, Imax = 4I0
Imin = If I1 = I2 = I0, Imax = 0
3. =
4. =
5. = = , w1 and w2 are widths of two slits
6. Constructive interference
Phase difference, φ = 2nπ Where


Path difference, x = nλ n = 0, 1, 2, 3, .......

Destructive interference 
Phase difference φ = (2n + 1)π 

Path difference x = 

7. Fringe width (dark or bright) β =
Angular width of fringe ∆θ = =
Unit V - VI 111
Distribution of Intensity
Conditions for Sustained Interference :

1.
The two sources must be coherent.
2.
The two interfering wave trains must have the same plane of polarisation.
3.
The two sources must be very close to each other and the pattern must be
observed at a large distance to have sufficient width of the fringe
λD
b = Angnlar width a = l/d
d
4. The sources must be monochromatic. Otherwise, the fringes of different
colours will overlap.
5. The two waves must be having same amplitude for better contrast between
bright and dark fringes.
DIFFRACTION OF LIGHT AT A SINGLE SLIT :

Width of Central Maximum :
y1 =

Since the Central Maximum is spread on either side of O, the width is
Fresnel’s Distance :
y1 =
At Fresnel’s distance, y1 = d and D = DF
So, = d or DF =
POLARISATION OF LIGHT WAVES :

Malus’ Law : When a beam of plane polarised light is incident on an
analyser, the intensity I of light transmitted from the analyser varies directly as the
square of the cosine of the angle θ between the planes of transmission of analyser
and polariser.
Intensity of transmitted light from the analyser is

I = k (a cos θ)2
or I = k a2 cos2 θ
(where I0 = ka2 is the intensity of light transmitted from the polariser)
Unit V - VI 113
Polarisation by Reflection and Brewster’s Law :
θP + r = 90º or r = 90º – θP
aµb =
aµb =
QUESTIONS
VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS (I Mark)

1. Every EM wave has certain frequency. Name two parameters of an em
wave that oscillate with this frequency.
Ans. Electric field vector and Magnetic field vector.
2. What is the phase difference between electric and magnetic field vectors
in an em wave?
Ans.
3. Name em radiations used for detecting fake currency notes.

Ans. U.V. Radiation.
4. Give any two uses of microwaves.
Ans. Radar, Microwave ovens
5. Name the phenomenon which justifies the transverse nature of em waves.
Ans. Polarization.

6. Arrange the following em waves in descending order of wavelengths :
γ ray, microwaves UV radiations.
Ans. Microwave, U V radiation, γ-rays
7. Which component or of an em wave is responsible for visible
effect?
Ans.
8. Write expression for speed of em waves in a medium of electrical
permittivity ∈ and magnetic permeability µ.
Ans. V =
9. Which of the following has longest penetration power?
UV radiation, X-ray, Microwaves.
Ans. X-rays
10. Which of the following has least frequency ?
IR radiations, visible radiation, radio waves.
Ans. Radiowaves.
11. Which physical quantity is the same for microwaves of wavelength 1
mm and UV radiations of 1600 A° in vacuum?
Ans. Speed.
12. Name two physical quantities which are imparted by an em wave to a
surface on which it falls.
Ans. Energy and pressure.
13. Name the physical quantity with unit same as that of
where φe → electric flux.

Ans. Current.
14. What is the source of energy associated with propagating em waves?
Ans. Oscillating/accelerated charge.
15. A plane mirror is turned through 15º. Through what angle will the
reflected ray be turned ?
Ans. 30º
16. Name the device used for producing microwaves.
Ans. Klystron valve and magnetron valve
17. Relative electric permittivity of a medium is 9 and relative permeability
close to unity. What is the speed of em waves in the medium.
Unit V - VI 115
Ans. V = = =
V = =
18. Identify the part of the electromagnetic spectrum to which the following
wavelengths belong :
(i) 10–1 m
(ii) 10–12 m
Ans. Microwave, γ-ray
19. Name the part of the electromagnetic spectrum of wavelength 10–2 m
and mention its one application.
Ans. Microwave → microwave oven.
20. Which of the following act as a source of electromagnetic waves?
(i) A charge moving with a constant velocity.
(ii) A charge moving in a circular orbit with time varyinng speed.
(iii) A charge at rest.
Ans. A charge moving in a circular orbit
21. Mention the pair of space and time varying E and B fields which would
generate a plane em wave travelling in Z-direction.
Ans. Ex and By
22. The charging current for a capacitor is 0.2A. What is the displacement
current?
Ans. Remain same IC = ID
23. Give the ratio of velocities of light waves of wavelengths 4000Aº and
8000Aº in Vacuum.
24. Which physical quantity has the same value for waves belonging to the
different parts of the electromagnetic spectrum?
Ans. Speed
25. Write the value of angle of reflection for a ray of light falling normally
on a mirror.
Ans. Zero.
26. How does the dispersive power of glass prism change when it is dipped
in water?
Ans. Decreases.

27. Light travels from glass to air. Find the angle of incidence for which
the angle of refraction is 90° if refractive index of glass is .
Ans. 45°
28. Name the phenomenon due to which one cannot see through fog.
Ans. Scattering of light.
29. What is the ratio of sin i and sin r in terms of velocities in the given
figure.
Ans. v1/v2
30. What is the shape of fringes in Youngs double slit experiment ?
Ans. Hyperbolic.
31. A equiconcave lens of focal length 15 cm is cut into two equal havles
along dotted lines as shown in figure. What will be new focal length
of each half.
Ans. 30 cm.
32. For the same angle of the incidence the angle of refraction in three
media A, B and C are 15°, 25° and 35° respectively. In which medium
would the velocity of light be minimum?
Ans. A
33. What is the phase difference between two points on a cylindrical wave
front?
Ans. Zero.
34. What is the ‘power’ of plane glass plate ?
Ans. Zero.
35. How does focal length of lens change when red light incident on it is
replaced by violet light?
Ans. Decreases,
Unit V - VI 117
36. Lower half of the concave mirror is painted black. What effect will this
have on the image of an object placed in front of the mirror?
Ans. The intensity of the image will be reduced (in this case half) but no
change in size of the image.
37. An air bubble is formed inside water. Does it act as converging lens
or a diverging lens?
Ans. Diverging lens
38. A water tank is 4 meter deep. A candle flame is kept 6 meter above
the level µ for water is 4/3. Where will the image of the candle be
formed?
Ans. 6 m. below the water level.
39. What is the ratio of contribution made by the electric field and magnetic
field components to the intensity of an EM wave is ?
Ans. 1 : 1.
40. An EM wave of intensity ‘I’ falls on a surface kept in vacuum. What
is the radiation pressure if wave is totally reflected?
Ans. c → Speed of light
41. In a single slit diffraction pattern, how does the angular width of central
maxima change when (i) slit width is decreased (ii) distance between
slit & screen is increased and (iii) light of smaller visible wavelength
is used ? Justify your answer.
Ans. Angular width of central maxima θ = =

(i) If d → decreases Angular width increases.
(ii) Angular width remain same on increasing D
(iii) If λ decreases, angular width decreases.
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS (1 Marks)

1. It the angle between the pass axis of polorizer and analyser is 450,
writhe the ratio of intensilies of orginal light an the transmitted light
after passing trough anlyser [Ans. → 2]
2. Light of wave lenght 600nm is incident normally on a slit of with 3mm.
Calculate the angular width of central maximum on a screen kept 3m
away from the steb. [Ans. 4×10-4 rad]
3. If the polarising angle for air glass interface is 56.3º, lohat is the angle
of refraction in glass? [Ans. 33.7º]

4. How does magnifying power changes with change in length of tube for
a given telescope? [Ans Decreases with increase in length]
5. The magnifying power of an artronomical telescope in normal adjustment
is 100 and distance between objective and eye lens in 101cm. Find the
focal lenght of objective and eye piece.
[Ans fo = 100 cm, fe = 1 cm.]
1.
Give one use of each of the following
(i) UV ray (ii) γ-ray.
2.
Represent EM waves propagating along the x-axis in which electric and
magnetic fields are along y-axis and z-axis respectively.
3.
State the principles of production of EM waves. An EM wave of
wavelength λ goes from vacuum to a medium of refractive index n.
What will be the frequency of wave in the medium?
4.
An EM wave has amplitude of electric field E0 and amplitude of magnetic
field is B0. The electric field at some instant become . What will
be magnetic field at this instant? (Wave is travelling in vacuum).

5.
State two applications of infrared radiations.
6.
State two applications of radio waves.
7.
State two applications of x-rays.
8. Show that the average energy density of the electric field equals
the average energy density of the magnetics fields ?
9.
The line AB in the ray diagram represents a lens. State whether the
lens is convex or concave.
Unit V - VI 119
10. Use mirror equation to deduce that an object placed between the pole
and focus of a concave mirror produces a virtual and enlarged image.
11. Calculate the value of θ, for which light incident normally on face AB
grazes along the face BC.

µglass = 3/2 and µ
water = 4/3
12. Name any two characteristics of light which do not change on polarisation.
13. Complete the path of light with correct value of angle of emergence.
14. Define diffraction. What should be the order of the size of the aperture
to observe diffraction.
15. Show that maximum intensity in interference pattern is four times the
intensity due to each slit if amplitude of light emerging from slits is
same.
16. Two poles-one 4 m high and the other is 4.5 m high are situated at
distance 40 m and 50 m respectively from an eye. Which pole will
appear taller?
17. S1 and S2 are two sources of light separated by a distance d. A detector
can move along S2P perpendicular to S1S2. What should be the minimum
and maximum path difference at the detector?

18. If a jogger runs with constant speed towards a vehicle, how fast does
the image of the jogger appear to move in the rear view mirror when
(i) the vehicle is stationery
(ii) the vehicle is moving with constant speed towards jogger.
Ans. The speed of the image of the jogger appears to increase substantially
though jogger is moving with constant speed.
Similar phenomenon is observed when vehicle is in motion.
19. Define Brewstre’s angle. Show that the Brewster’s angle iB for a given
pair of media is related to critical angle ic through the relation
ic = sin–1(cot iB)
20. If angle between the pass axes of polariser & analyser is 45º. Write
the ratio of the intersities of original light and transmitted light after
passing through the analyser.
21. When does (i) a plane mirror and (ii) a convex mirror produce real
image of objects.
Ans. Plane and convex mirror produce real image when the object is virtual
that is rays convering to a point behind the mirror are reflected to a
point on a screen.
22. A virtual image cannot be caught on a screen. Then how do we see it?
Ans. The image is virtual when reflected or refracted rays divergent, these
are converged on to the retina by convex lens of eye, as the virtual
image serves as the object.
23. Draw a diagram to show the advance sunrise and delayed sunset due
to atmospheric refraction.
24. Define critical angle for total internal reflection. Obtain an expression
for refractive index of the medium in terms of critical angle.
25. The image of a small bulb fixed on the wall of a room is to be obtained
on the opposite wall ‘s’ m away by means of a large convex lens. What
is the maximum possible focal length of the lens required.
Ans. For fixed distance ‘s’ between object and screen, for the lens equation
to give real solution for u = v = 2f, ‘f’ should not be greater than
4f = s.
∴ f = s/4
26. The angle subtended at the eye by an object is equal to the angle subtended
at the eye by the virtual image produced by a magnifying glass. In what
sense then does magnifying glass produce angular magnification?
Ans. The absolute image size is bigger than object size, the magnifier helps in
bringing the object closer to the eye and hence it has larger angular size
than the same object at 25 cm, thus angular magnification is achieved.
Unit V - VI 121
27. Obtain relation between focal length and radius of curvature, of (i)
concave mirror (ii) convex mirror using proper ray diagram.
28. Two independent light sources cannot act as coherent sources. Why?
29. How is a wave front different from a ray? Draw the geometrical shape
of the wavefronts when.
(i) light diverges from a point source,
(ii) light emerges out of convex lens when a point source is placed at
its focus.
30. What two main changes in diffraction pattern of single slit will you
observe when the monochromatic source of light is replaced by a source
of white light.
31. You are provided with four convex lenses of focal length 1cm, 3cm,
10 cm and 100 cm. Which two would you prefer for a microscope and
which two for a telescope.
32. Give reasons for the following
(i) Sun looks reddish at sunset
(ii) clouds are generally white
33. Using Huygens Principle draw ray diagram for the following :
(i) Refraction of a plane wave front incident on a rarer medium
(ii) Refraction of a plane wave front incident on a denser medium.
34. Water (refractive index µ) is poured into a concave mirror of radius of
curvature ‘R’ up to a height h as shown in figure. What should be the
value of x so that the image of object ‘O’ is formed on itself?
35. A point source S is placed midway between two concave mirrors having
equal focal length f as shown in Figure. Find the value of d for which
only one image is formed.

36. A thin double convex lens of focal length f is broken into two equal
halves at the axis. The two halves are combined as shown in figure.
What is the focal length of combination in (ii) and (iii).
37. How much water should be filled in a container 21 cm in height, so

that it appears half filled when viewed from the top of the container.
(aµω = 4/3.)
38. A ray PQ incident on the refracting face BA is refracted in the prism
BAC as shown in figure and emerges from the other refracting face
AC as RS such that AQ = AR. If the angle, of prism A = 60° and µ
of material of prism is then find angle θ.

1. Name EM radiations used
(i) in the treatment of cancer.
(ii) For detecting flow in pipes carrying oil.
(iii) In sterilizing surgical instruments.
2. How would you experimentally show that EM waves are transverse in
nature ?
3. List any three properties of EM waves.
4. Find the wavelength of electromagnetic waves of frequency 5 × 1019
Hz in free space. Give its two applications.
5. Using mirror formula show that virtual image produced by a convex
mirror is always smaller in size and is located between the focus and
the pole.
6. Obtain the formula for combined focal length of two thin lenses in
contact, taking one divergent and the other convergent.
Unit V - VI 123
7. Derive Snell’s law on the basis of Huygen’s wave theory.
8. A microscope is focussed on a dot at the bottom of the beaker. Some
oil is poured into the beaker to a height of ‘b’ cm and it is found that
microscope has to raise through vertical distance of ‘a’ cm to bring the
dot again into focus. Express refractive index of oil is terms of a and
b.
9. Define total internal reflection. State its two conditions. With a ray
diagram show how does optical fibres transmit light.
10. A plane wave front is incident on (i) a prism (ii) A convex lens (iii) a
concave mirror. Draw the emergent wavefront in each case.
11. Explain with reason, how the resolving power of a compound microscope
will change when (i) frequency of the incident light on the objective
lens is increased, (ii) focal length of the objective lens is increased, (iii)
aperture of objective lens is increased.
12. Derive Mirror formula for a concave mirror forming real Image.
13. Two narrow slits are illuminated by a single monochromatic sources.
(a) Draw the intensity pattern and name the phenomenon
(b) One of the slits is now completely covered. Draw the intensity pattern
now obtained.
14. Explain (i) sparkling of diamond (ii) use of optical fibre in communication.
15. Using appropriate ray diagram obtain relation for refractive index of
water in terms of real and apparent depth.
16. Complete the ray diagram in the following figure where, n1 is refractive
index of medium and n2 is refractive index of material of lens.

17. A converging beam of light is intercepted by a slab of thickness t and
refractive index µ, By what distance will the convergence point be
shiffted? Illustrate the answer.
18. In double slit experiment SS2 is greater than SS1 by 0.25λ. Calculate
the path difference between two interfering beam from S1 and S2 for
minima and maxima on the point P as shown in figure.

1.
With the help of ray diagram explain the phenomenon of total internal
reflection. Obtain the relation between critical angle and refractive indices
of two media. Draw ray diagram to show how right angled isosceles
prism can be used to :
(i) Deviate the ray through 180°.
(ii) Deviate the ray through 90°.
(iii) Invert the ray.
2.
Draw a labelled ray diagram of a compound microscope and explain its
working. Derive an expression for its magnifying power if final image
is formed at leat distance of distant vision.
3.
Diagrammatically show the phenomenon of refraction through a prism.
Define angle of deviation in this case. Hence for a small angle of
incidence derive the relation δ = (µ – 1) A.
4.
Explain the following :
(a) Sometimes distant radio stations can be heard while nearby stations
are not heard.
(b) If one of the slits in Youngs Double Slit Experiment is covered, what
change would occur in the intensity of light at the centre of the screen?
Unit V - VI 125
5.
Define diffraction. Deduce an expression for fringe width of the central
maxima of the diffraction pattern, produced by single slit illuminated
with monochromatic light source.
6.
What is polarisation? How can we detect polarised light? State Brewster’s
Law and deduce the expression for polarising angle.
7.
Derive lens maker formula for a thin converging lens.
8.
Derive lens formula = for
(a) a convex lens, (b) a concave lens.

9. Describe an astronomical telescope and derive an expression for its
magnifying power using a labelled ray diagram. When final image is
formed at least distance of distinct vision.
10. Draw a graph to show the angle of deviation with the angle of incidence
i for a monochromatic ray of light passing through a prism of refracting
angle A. Deduce the relation
µ =
11. State the condition under which the phenomenon of diffraction of light
takes place. Also draw the intensity pattern with angular position.
12. How will the interference pattern in Youngs double slit experiment
change, when
(i) distance between the slits S1 and S2 are reduced and
(ii) the entire set up is immersed in water ?
Justify your answer in each case.
Ans. Fringe width β =

1
(i) If d decreases, fringe width β a increases
d
(ii) When apparatus is immersed in water, wavelength reduces to
. Therefore, fringe width βal decreases.

NUMERICALS
1.
The refractive index of medium is 1.5. A beam of light of wavelength
6000 A° enters in the medium from air. Find wavelength and frequency
of light in the medium.
2. An EM wave is travelling in vacuum. Amplitude of the electric field
vector is 5 × 104 V/m. Calculate amplitude of magnetic field vector.
Suppose the electric field amplitude of an em wave is E0 = 120 NC–1
3.
and that its frequency is v = 50.0 MHz.
(a) Determine B0, ω, κ and λ,
(b) Find expressions for E and B.
4.
A radio can tune into any station of frequency band 7.5 MHz to 10
MHz. Find the corresponding wave length range.
5.
The amplitude of the magnetic field vector of an electromagnetic wave
travelling in vacuum is 2.4mT. Frequency of the wave is 16 MHz.
Find :
(i) Amplitude of electric field vector and
(ii) Wavelength of the wave.
6.
An EM wave travelling through a medium has electric field vector.
Ey = 4 × 105 cos (3.14 × 108 t – 1.57 x) N/C. Here x is in m and t
in s. Then find :
(i) Wavelength
(ii) Frequency
(iii) Direction of propagation
(iv) Speed of wave
(v) Refractive index of medium
(vi) Amplitude of magnetic field vector.
7.
An object of length 2.5 cm is placed at a distance of 1.5 f from a
concave mirror where f is the focal length of the mirror. The length of
object is perpendicular to principal axis. Find the size of image. Is the
image erect or inverted? [5 cm, Inverted]
Unit V - VI 127
8.
Find the size of image formed in the situation shown in figure.
[1.2 cm, approx.]

9. A ray of light passes through an equilateral prism in such a manner that
the angle of incidence is equal to angle of emergence and each of these
angles is equal to 3/4 of angle of prism. Find angle of deviation.
[Ans. : 30°]
10. Critical angle for a certain wavelength of light in glass is 30°. Calculate
the polarising angle and the angle of refraction in glass corresponding
to this. [ip = tan–1 2]
11. A light ray passes from air into a liquid as shown in figure. Find
refractive index of liquid. [airµLiquid = ]
12. At what angle with the water surface does fish in figure see the setting
sun ?
[C = Sin–1 (0.7518)]
[At critical angle, fish will see the sun.]

13. In the following diagram, find the focal length of lens L2. [40 cm]

14. Three immiscible liquids of densities d1 > d2 > d3 and refractive indices

µ1 > µ2 > µ3 are put in a beaker. The height of each liquid is .A
dot is made at the bottom of the beaker. For near normal vision, find
the apparent depth of the dot.
Ans. (Hint : the image formed by first medium act as an object for second
medium) Let the apparent depth be O 1 for the object seen from
O1 = image formed by medium 1, O acts as an object for medium

2. It is seen from M3, the apparent depth is O2.
Similarly, the image found by medium 2, O2 act as an object for
medium 3
O2 =
O3 = putting value of O2 and O1
O3 =
15. A point object O is kept at a distance of 30 cm from a convex lens of

power + 4D towards its left. It is observed that when a convex mirror
is kept on right side at 50 cm from the lens, the image of object O
formed by lens-mirror combination coincides with object itself. Calculate
focal length of mirror.
Ans. Image formed by combination coincides with the object itself. It implies
that I is the centre of curvature of convex mirror.
For lens
Unit V - VI 129
v = 150 cm
MI = LI – LM = 150 – 50 = 100 cm
fm = = = 50 cm
16. Using the data given below, state which two of the given lenses will
be preferred to construct a (i) telescope (ii) Microscope. Also indicate
which is to be used as objective and as eyepiece in each case.
Lenses Power (p) Apetune (A)
L1 6 D 1 cm
L2 3 D 8 cm
L3 10 D 1 cm
Ans. For telescope, lens L2 is chosen as objective as it aperture is largest,

L3 is chosen as eyepiece as its focal length is smaller.
For microscope lens L3 is chosen as objective because of its small focal
length and lens L1, serve as eye piece because its focal length is not
larges.
17. Two thin converging lens of focal lengths 15 cm and 30 cm respectively
are held in contact with each other. Calculate power and focal length
of the combination.
= =
F = 10 cm
P = 10D
18. An object is placed in front of a concave mirror of focal length 20 cm.
The image is formed three times the size of the object. Calculate two
possible distances of the object from the mirror.
Ans. m = ± 3
m = = + 3 for virtual image

v = – 3u

=
u =
m = = – 3 for real image

v = 3u
u =
1 MARKS QUESTIONS
1.
Which part of the electromagnetic spectrum is used in RADAR? Give its
frequency range.
2.
How is the equation for Ampere’s circuital law modified in the presence of
displacement current?
3.
How are electromagnetic waves produced by oscillating charges? What is
the source of the energy associated with the em waves?
4.
Name the radiation of the electromagnetic spectrum which is used for the
following:
(a) (i) Radar (ii) Eye surgery
(b) To photograph internal parts of human body
(c) For taking photographs of the sky during night and foggy conditions
Give the frequency range in each case.
5.
Two polaroids A and B are kept in crossed position. How should a third
polaroid C be placed between them so that the intensity of polarised light
transmitted by polaroid B reduces to 1/8th of the intensity of unpolarised
light incident on A. [Hint I = I0cos2θ]
Ans. 45°.
Unit V - VI 131
6.
In young’s double slit experiment using monochromatic light of wavelength
λ, the intensity of light at a point on the screen where path difference is
λ is “K” units. Find the intensity of light at a point where path difference
λ
is .
3
2π λ 2π
Phase iff. = × = = 120°
λ 3 3
φ K
and I = I0 cos2 =
2 4
 Hint I = I1 + I 2 + 2 I1I 2 cosφ
7.
Two nicole polariods are so oriented that the maximum amount of light is
transmitted. To what fraction of its maximum value is the intensity of transmitted
light reduced when the analyser is rotated through (i) 30° (ii) 60°?
Ans. (i) 75% of max. intensity (ii) 25% of max. intensity
8.
In young’s double slit experiment, a light of wavelength 630 nm produces
an interference pattern where bright fringes are separated by 8.1 mm.
Another light produces the interference pattern. Where the bright fringes
are separated by 72 mm. Calculate the wavelength of second light.
 λD 
 Hint β =
d 
Ans. 560 nm
9.
A beam of light consisting of two wavelength 800 nm and 600 nm is used to
obtain the interference pattern in young’s double slit experiment on a screen
placed 1.4 m away. If the separation between two slits in 0.28 mm. Calculate
the least distance from the central bright maximum, where the bright fringes
of two wavelength coincide.
x = nλ1 D = (n + 1) λ 2
D
Ans.
d d
D

∴ n × 800 = (n + 1) λ 2
d

∴ n = 3
D 10−9 × 1.4

∴ x = nλ1 = 3 × 800 × = 12 mm
d 0.28 × 10−3
Numericals
1.
The focal lengths of objective and eye peace of a microscope are 1.25 cm
and 5 cm respectively find the position of the object relative to the objective
in order to obtain an angular magnification of 30 in normal adjustment.
Ans. In normal adjustment
d 25
me = = = 5
fe 5
m = m0 me
m 30
∴
m0 = = =6
me 5
V0
and m0 = =–6
u0

∴ V0 = – 6u0
1 1 1

∴ − =
v0 u0 f0
1 1 1
− =
−6u0 u0 f0
here f0 = 1.25 cm
u0 = – 1.46 cm
2.
An small telescope has an objective lens of focal length 150 cm and an eye
piece of focal length 5 cm. If his telescope is used to view a 100 m high
tower 3 km away find the height of the final image when it find the height
of the final image when it is formed 25 cm away from the eye pieces.
Unit V - VI 133
100 1
Ans. tan α = = radian
3000 30
h
again tan α =
f0
1 h

∴ =
30 150
h = 5 cm

h height of image of tower
 α   25 

∴ me =  1 + f  =  1 + 5  = 6
 e
h’
and me =
h

∴ h′ = 5 × 6 = 30 cm

h′ height of final image.
ANSWER OF 2 MARKS QUESTIONS

1. UV ray – In water purifier.
γ ray – In treatment of cancer
2.
3.
An accelerated charge produces oscillating electric field in space, which
produces an oscillating magnetic field, which in turn, is a source of
oscillating electric field and so on. The oscillating electric & magnetic
fields produces each other & give rise to e.m. waves.
4. In vacuum C =

If electric field become , magnetic field will be .
5. (i) In green houses to keep plants warm.

(ii) In reading secret writings on ancient walls.
6. (i) In radio & tele communication systems.
(ii) In radio astronomy.
7. (i) In medical to diagnose fractures in bones.
(ii) In engineering for detecting cracks, flaws & holes in metal parts
of a machine.
8. µE = & uB =
µE = = As c =
= c=
=
= µB
10. For concave mirror
f < 0 and u < 0
f<u < 0
or
or
Virtual image is formed.
Also or v > | u |
m =
magnified image.
Unit V - VI 135
11. θ = sin–1 (8/9)
12. Speed and frequency
13. sin–1 (3/4)
16. 4 m pole
17. Minimum path difference is zero (when p is at infinity).
Maximum path difference = d.
29. A wavefront is a surface obtained by joining all points vibrating in the
same phase.
A ray is a line drawn perpendicular to the wavefront in the direction
of propagation of light.
(i) Spherical
(ii) Plane
30. (i) In each diffraction order, the diffracted image of the slit gets dispersed
into component colours of white light. As fringe width α λ, ∴ red
fringe with higher wavelength is wider than violet fringe with smaller
wavelength.
(ii) In higher order spectra, the dispersion is more and it cause
overlapping of different colours.
31. f0 = 1 cm and fe = 3 cm for Microscope and
f0 = 100 cm and fe = 1 cm for a Telescope
33. N.C.E.R.T. Fig. 10.5; Fig. 10.4.
34. Distance of object from p should be equal to radius of curvature.
R = µx + h ⇒ x=
35. Distance between mirror will be 2f or 4f.

36. (i) Focal length of combination is infinite,
(ii) f/2
37.

= µ
= ⇒ x = 12 cm
38. This is a case of min. deviation θ = 60°.

ANSWERS OF 3 MARKS QUESTIONS
11. R.P. of a compound Microscope
= =
(i) When frequency v increases, R.P. increases

(ii) R.P. does not change with change in focal length of objective lens.
(iii) When aperture increases, θ increases
∴ R.P. increases.
17. x =
18. Path difference :

(SS2 + S2P) – (SS1 + S1P) = (SS2 – SS1) + (SS2P – S1P)
= (0.25λ + S2P – S1P)
For maxima, path difference = nλ
So, S2P – S1P = nλ – 0.25λ = (n – 0.25)λ
For minima, path difference =
So, S2P – S1P = (2n + 0.5) λ/2.

Unit V - VI 137
Unit VII
DUAL NATURE OF MATTER AND RADIATION
KEY POINTS
 Light
consists of individual photons whose energies are proportional to
their frequencies.
 A photon is a quantum of electromagnetic energy :
Energy of photon
E = hv =
Momentum of a photon
= =
Dynamic mass of photon
= =
Rest mass of a photon is zero.
Photoelectric
 effect : Photon of incident light energy interacts with a
single electron and if energy of photon is equal to or greater than work
function, the electron is emitted.
Max.
 kinetic energy of emitted electron = h(v – v0) Here v0 is the
frequency below which no photoelectron is emitted and is called threshold
frequency.
If
 ‘V’ is the stopping potential of photoclectron emission, then max.
kinetic energy of photo electron EK = qV

Wavelength
 associated with the charge particle accelerated through a
potential of g volt.
h
l =
2mqv
Wavelength
 associated with electron accelerated through a potential
difference
12.27
le = A°
V
Stopping
 potential versus frequency graph
vs
v0 v
v0 → thershold frequency
h
slop of the curve gives
e
φ
The intercept on vs axis gives i.e. Work function
e e
 A moving body behaves in a certain way as though it has a wave nature
having wavelength,
h h
λ = = =
p 2m E k
where EK is kinetic energy of movign particle
 Einestein’s Photoelectric equation
1 2
mvmax = hn – hn0
2
or eV0 = hn – hn0
Unit VII - VIII 139

Unit VIII
ATOMS AND NUCLEI
KEY POINTS
Gieger-Marsden
 α-scattering experiment established the existence of
nucleus in an atom.
Bohr’s atomic model
(i) Electrons revolve round the nucleus in certain fixed orbits called
stationary orbits.
(ii) In stationary orbits, the angular momentum of electron is integral
multiple of h/2π.
(iii) While revolving in stationary orbits, electrons do not radiate energy.
The energy is emitted (or absorbed) when electrons jump from
higher to lower energy orbits, (or lower to higher energy orbits).
The frequency of the emitted radiation is given by hv = Ef – Ei.
An atom can absorb radiations of only those frequencies that it is
capable of emitting.
 As a result of the quantisation condition of angular momentum, the
electron orbits the nucleus in circular paths of specific radii. For a
hydrogen atom it is given by
n 2 h 2 ε0
rn = =
πme2
⇒ rn ∝ n2
The total energy is also quantised : En = = – 13.6eV/n2
The n = 1 state is called the ground state.

In hydrogen atom, the ground state energy is – 13.6 eV.
 de Broglie’s hypothesis that electron have a wavelength λ = h/mv gave
an explanation for the Bohr’s quantised orbits.
 Neutrons and protons are bound in nucleus by short range strong nuclear
force. Nuclear force does not distinguish between nucleons.
 The nuclear mass ‘M’ is always less than the total mass of its constituents.
The difference in mass of a nucleus and its constituents is called the
mass defect.

∆M = [Zmp + (A – Z)mn] – M
and ∆Eb = (∆M)c2
The energy ∆Eb represents the binding energy of the nucleus.
For the mass number ranging from A = 30 to 170 the binding energy
per nucleon is nearly constant at about 8MeV per nucleon.
 Radioactive Decay Law : The number of atoms of a radioactive sample
disintegrating per second at any time is directly proportional to the
number of atoms present at that time. Mathematically :
= – λN or N(t) = N0e–λt
where λ is called decay constant. It is defined as the reciprocal of the

mean time during which the number of atoms of a radioactive substance
1
decreases to of their original number.
e
 Number of radioactive atoms N in a sample at any time t can be
calculated using the formula.
N =
Here No = no. of atoms at time t = 0 and T is the half-life of the

substance.
Half life : The half life of a radio active substances is defined as the
time during which the number of atoms disintegrate to one half of its
initial value.
T1/2 = = ln 2 × mean life
or 0.693/λ =
Here λ = decay constant =

Radius
 r of the nucleus of an atom is proportional to the cube root of
its mass number thereby implying that the nuclear density is the same.
(Almost) for all substances/nuclei.
 α-decay : ZXA → Z–2YA–4 + 2He4 + Q
β-decay : ZXA → Z+1YA + –1e0 + v + Q
γ-decay : When α or β-decay, the nucleus in excited state; the
nucleus goes to lower energy state or ground state by the emission of
γ-ray(s).
Unit VII - VIII 141

QUESTIONS

1. What is the rest mass of photon?
Ans. Zero
2. A good mirror reflects 80% of light incident on it. Which of the following
is correct ?
(a) Energy of each reflected photon decreases by 20%.
(b) Total no. of reflected photons decreases by 20%. Justify your
answer.
Ans. (b) Total no. of reflected photons decreases by 20%.
3. Why in a photocell the cathode is coated with alkali metals ?
Ans. Lower work function, sensitive to visible light.
4. Name the phenomenon which shows quantum nature of electromagnetic
radiation.
Ans. Photoelectric effect.
5. Write Einstein’s photoelectric equations and specify each term.
Ans. = hυ – hυ0
Max. K.E. of Photoelectrons = Energy of incident light – work function.

6. The Stopping potential in an experiment on photo electric effect is
1.5V : What is the maximum K.E. of photoelectrons emitted.
Ans. eV0 = (K.E) max
⇒ (K.E.)max = 1.6 × 10–19 × 1.5
= 2.4 × 10–19J
7. A metal emits photoelectrons when red light falls on it. Will this metal
emit photoelectrons when blue light falls on it? Why?
Ans. Yes, blue light has higher frequency hence possess higher energy.
8. What is the value of impact parameter for a head on collision?
Ans. Zero
9. The photoelectric cut off voltage in a certain photoelectric experiment
is 1.5V. What is the max. kinetic energy of photoelectrons emitted?

Ans. K.E = eV, \ K.E = 1.5 e Joule
= 1.5 × 1.6 × 10–19J
= 2.4 × 10–19J
10. What is the de-Broglie wavelength of a 3 kg object moving with a
speed of 2m/s?
Ans. λ = = = 1.1 × 10–34m.
11. What factors determine the maximum velocity of the photoelectrons

from a surface?
Ans. (a) frequency of incident radiation
(b) work function of surface.
12. How will you justify that the rest mass of photons is zero ?
Ans. m = , rest mass for m0 = photon v = c ⇒ m0 = 0.
13. Work functions of caesium and lead are 2.14 eV and 4.25 eV respectively.
Which of the two has a higher threshold wavelength?
Ans. Work function, φ0 = hv0 = or λ0
Hence caesium has a higher threshold wavelength for photoelectric

emission.
14. What is the de-Broglie wavelength of a neutron at absolute temperature
TK ?
Ans. λ = = = , KB → Boltzmann’s Constant
15. Define atomic mass unit. Write its energy equivalent in MeV.
Ans. 1 a.m.u is of the mass of a carbon isotope
12C 1 u = 931 MeV

6
16. What was the drawback of Rutherford’s model of atom?
Ans. Rutherford’s model of atom failed to explain the stability of atom.
17. What are the number of electrons and neutrons in atom?
Unit VII - VIII 143

Ans. No. of electrons 92
No. of neutrons 236 – 92 = 144.
18. Name the series of hydrogen spectrum which has least wavelength.
Ans. Lyman series
19. Any two protons repel each other, then how is this possible for them
to remain together in a nucleus.
Ans. Nuclear force between two protons is 100 times stronger than the
electrostatic force.
20. Define radioactive decay constant.
Ans. The decay constant of radioactive substance is defined as the reciprocal
of that time in which the number of atoms of substance becomes
times the atoms present initially.

21. You are given reaction : 1H2 + 1H2 → 2He4 + 24 MeV. What type of
nuclear reaction is this?
Ans. Nuclear Fusion.
22. After losing two electrons, to which particle does a helium atom get
transformed into?
Ans. α particle.
23. What is the ratio of velocities of electron in I, II and III Bohr
Orbits ?
Ans. or 6 : 3 : 2
24. Which atomic part was discovered by Rutherford ?

Ans. Nucleus
25. In nuclear reaction find P, Q and hence identify X.
Ans. P = 0, Q = 1
X is 1e0 a positron.
26. Binding energies of deutron and α-particle (2He4) are 1.25 MeV/
nucleon and 7.2 MeV/nucleon respectively. Which nucleus is more
stable?
Ans. Binding energy of 2He4 is more than deutron 1H2. Hence 2He4 is more
stable.

27. α-particles are incident on a thin gold foil. For what angle of deviation
will the number of deflected α-particles be minimum?
Ans. 180°
28. If the amount of a radioactive substance is increased four times then
how many times will the number of atoms disintegrating per unit time
be increased?
Ans. Four times ... R = – λN
29. An electron jumps from fourth to first orbit in an atom. How many
maximum number of spectral lines can be emitted by the atom?
Ans. Possible transitions are
ni = 4 to nf = 3, 2, 1
ni = 3 to nf = 2.1
ni = 2 to nf = 1
Total transitions = 6
For many electron system.

30. Under what conditions of electronic transition will the emitted light be
monochromatic?
Ans. Only fixed two orbits are involved and therefore single energy evolve.
31. Why does only a slow neutron (.03eV energy) cause the fission in the
uranium nucleus and not the fast one?
Ans. Slow neutron stays in the nucleus for required optimum time and disturbs
the configuration of nucleus.
32. Write the relation for distance of closest approach.
Ans. γ0 = .
33. In Bohr’s atomic model, the potential energy is negative and has a
magnitude greater than the kinetic energy, what does this imply?
Ans. The revolving electron is bound to the nucleus.
34. Name the physical quantity whose dimensions are same as Planck’s
constant.
Ans. Angular momentum
35. Define ionisation potential.
Unit VII - VIII 145

Ans. The minimum accelerated potential which would provide an electron
sufficient energy to escape from the outermost orbit.
36. The ionisation potential of hellium atom is 24.6 V. How much energy
will be required to ionise it?
Ans. 24.6 eV
37. What is the energy possessed by an electron whose principal quantum
number is infinite?
Ans. Zero n = ∞
... E = –
eV = 0.
n
38. What is the SI unit of work function?

Ans. Joule
39. Name the spectral series of hydrogen atom which lie in uv region.
Ans. Lyman Series
40. Name two series of hydrogen spectrum lying in the infra red region.
Ans. Paschan & P fund series
41. What is the order of velocity of electron in a hydrogen atom in ground
state.
Ans. 106 ms–1
42. Write a relation for the wavelength in Paschan series lines of hydrogen
spectrum.
Ans. = , n = 4, 5...
43. Arrange radioactive radiation in the increasing order of penetrating

power.
Ans. α, β, γ
44. Write a relation between average life and decay constant.
Ans. τ = = average life
45. Write two units for activity of radioactive element and relate them with
number of disintegration per second.
Ans. 1 Curie (Ci) = 3.7 × 1010 decay/s
1 becquerel (Bq) = 1 decay/s
46. The half life of a radioactive element A is same as the mean life time
of another radioactive element B. Initially, both have same number of
atoms. B decay faster than A. Why?

Ans. TA = τB = 1.44TB
∴ TA > TB
∴ λA < λB
Therefore B decay faster than A.
47. Draw the graph showing the distribution of kinetic energy of electrons
emitted during β decay.
48. Compare radii of two nuclei of mass numbers 1 and 27 respectively.
Ans. = =
R1 : R2 = 1 : 3
49. Which element has highest value of Binding Energy per nucleon.
Ans. 56Fe26
50. Mention the range of mass number for which the Binding energy curve
is almost horizontal.
Ans. For A = 30 to 120 (A is mass number)
51. What is the ratio of nuclear densities of the two nuclei having mass
numbers in the ratio 1 : 4?
Ans. 1 : 1 Because nuclear density is independent of mass number.
52. Draw a graph of number of undecayed nuclei to the time, for a radioactive
nuclei.
Unit VII - VIII 147

53. Write an equation to represent α decay.
Ans.
Atoms and Nuclie

1.
If a nucleus has mass defect 0.2 g. What will be its binding energy.
2.
The Binding energy of helium nucleus is 28.17 max. Find its binding
energy per nucleon.
3.
Binding energy per nucleon for an element is 7.14 Mev. If the binding
energy of the element is 28.6+ MeV. Calculate the no. of nucleons in
the nucleus.
4.
Calculate the mass defect of a helium nucleus. If its actual mass (atomic)
is 4.001624 amu. The mass of one portion and one neutron together is
2.015941 amu.
1.
Illustrate by giving suitable examples, how you can show that
electromagnetic waves carry both energy and momentum.
2.
Define the term “threshold frequency”, in the context of photoelectric
emission.
3.
Define the term “intensity” in photon picture of light.
4.
Define intensity of radiation based on photon picture of light.
5.
Plot a graph showing the variation of photoelectric current versus
intensity of light.
6.
Plot a graph of stopping potential (V0) versus the frequency (v) of incident
radiation in photoelectric emission.
7.
Plot a graph of the de-Broglie wavelength associated with a photon
versus its momentum.
8.
Plot a graph of the de-Broglie wavelength associated with electron as a
function of accelerating potential.
9.
A proton is accelerated through a potential difference V, subjected to a
uniform magnetic field acting normal to the velocity of the proton. If

the potential differences is doubled, how will the radius of the circular
path described by the proton in the magnetic field change?
10.
On the basis of the graphs shown in the figure, answer the following
questions:
Photo electric current
I
Stopping plate potential
(a) Which physical parameter is kept constant for the three curves?
(b) Which is the highest frequency among, v1, v2 and v3?
11.
In the photoelectric emission, when the frequency of incident radiation
is doubled, will the maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons also be
doubled? Justify your answer.
12.
The figure shows the variation of stopping potential V0 with the frequency
v of the incident radiations for two photosensitive metals P and Q. Which
metal has smaller threshold wavelength? Justify your answer.
P Q
V0
v
0.1 1.0 15 –1
(× 10 s )
13.
Plot a graph of de-Broglie wavelength associated with electron as a
function of its kinetic energy.
Q
3I
P
I
Unit VII - VIII 149

1.
Write one similarity and one difference between matter wave and an
electromagnetic wave.
2.
Does a photon have a de-Broglie wavelength? Explain.
3. A photon and an electron have energy 200 eV each. Which one of these
has greater de-Broglie wavelength?
4. The work function of the following metal is given Na = 2.75 eV, K =
2.3 eV, Mo = 4.14 eV, Ni = 5.15 eV which of these metal will not give
a photoelectric emission for radiation of wave length 3300 A° from a
laser source placed at 1m away from the metal. What happens if the
laser is brought nearer and placed 50 cm away.
5. Represent graphically Variation of the de-Broglie wavelength with linear
momentum of a particle.
6. In a photoelectric effect experiment, the graph between the stopping

potential V and frequency of the incident radiation on two different
metals P and Q are shown in Fig. :
(i) Which of the two metals has greater value of work function?
(ii) Find maximum K.E. of electron emitted by light of frequency
v = 8 × 1014 Hz for metal P.
7.
Do all the photons have same dynamic mass? If not, Why?
8.
Why photoelectrons ejected from a metal surface have different kinetic
energies although the frequency of incident photons are same?

9.
Find the ratio of de-Broglie wavelengths associated with two electrons
‘A’ and ‘B’ which are accelerated through 8V and 64 volts respectively.
10. Explain the terms stopping potential and threshold frequency.
11. How does the maximum kinetic energy of emitted electrons vary with
the increase in work function of metals?
12. Define distance of the closest approach. An α-particle of kinetic energy
‘K’ is bombarded on a thin gold foil. The distance of the closest approach
is ‘r’. What will be the distance of closest approach for an α-particle
of double the kinetic energy?
13. An a particle and a proton are accelerated by same potential. Find ratio
fo their de Broglie wavelengths. Ans. [1: 2 2]
14. Which of the following radiations α, β and γ are :
(i) similar to x-rays?
(ii) easily absorbed by matter
(iii) travel with greatest speed?
(iv) similar to the nature of cathode rays?
15. Some scientist have predicted that a global nuclear war on earth would
be followed by ‘Nuclear winter’. What could cause nuclear winter?
16. If the total number of neutrons and protons in a nuclear reaction is
conserved how then is the energy absorbed or evolved in the reaction?
17. In the ground state of hydrogen atom orbital radius is 5.3 × 10–11 m.
The atom is excited such that atomic radius becomes 21.2 × 10–11 m.
What is the principal quantum number of the excited state of atom?
18. Calculate the percentage of any radioactive substance left undecayed
after half of half life.
19. Why is the density of the nucleus more than that of atom?
20. The atom 8O16 has 8 protons, 8 neutrons and 8 electrons while atom
8
4Be has 4 proton, 4 neutrons and 4 electrons, yet the ratio of their
atomic masses is not exactly 2. Why?
21. What is the effect on neutron to proton ratio in a nucleus when β–
particle is emitted ? Explain your answer with the help of a suitable
nuclear reaction.
22. Why must heavy stable nucleus contain more neutrons than protons?
Unit VII - VIII 151

23. Show that the decay rate R of a sample of radio nuclide at some instant
is related to the number of radio active nuclei N at the same instant by
the expression R = – Nλ.
24. What is a nuclear fusion reaction? Why is nuclear fusion difficult to
carry out for peaceful purpose?
25. Write two characteristic features of nuclear forces which distinguish
them from coulomb force.
26. Half life of certain radioactive nuclei is 3 days and its activity is 8
times the ‘safe limit’. After how much time will the activity of the
radioactive sample reach the ‘safe limit’?
27. Derive mvr = using de-Broglie equation.

28. Draw graph of number of scattered particles to scattering angle in
Ratherford’s experiment.
29. If the energy of a photon is 25 eV and work function of the material
is 7eV, find the value of slopping potential.
30. What is the shortest wavelength present in the (i) Paschen series (ii)
Balmer series of spectral lines?
Ans. (i) 820nm, (ii) 365 nm
31. The radius of the inner most electron orbit of a hydrogen atom 0.53 Å.
What are the radii of the n = 2 and n = 3 orbits. [Hint: r = n2r0)
32. The ground state energy of hydrogen atom is –13.6 eV. What are the
kinetic and potential energies of the electron in this state?
[Hint : K.E = – (T.E), P.E. = 2T.E]
33. Why is the wave nature of matter not more apparent to our daily
observations ?
34. From the relation R = R0 A1/3 where R0 is a constant and A is the
mass number of a nucleus, show that nuclear matter density is nearly
constant.
Ans. Nuclear matter density =
= =
= = 2.3 × 1017 kg / m3
= Constant

35. Find the energy equivalent of one atomic mass unit in joules and then
in MeV.
Ans. E = ∆mc2 ∆m = 1.6605 × 10–27 kg
= 1.6605 × 10–27 × (3 × 108)2
= 1.4924 × 10–4J
= 0.9315 × 109 eV
= 931.5 MeV
36. Write four properties of nuclear force.
1. Explain the working of a photocell? Give its two uses.
2. Find the de-Broglie wavelength associated with an electron accelerated
through a potential difference V.
3. What is Einstein’s explanation of photo electric effect? Explain the laws
of photo electric emission on the basis of quantum nature of light.
4. Light of intensity I and frequency v is incident on a photosensitive
surface and causes photoelectric emission. Justify with the help of graph,
the effect on photoelectric current when
(i) the intensity of light is gradually increased
(ii) the frequency of incident radiation is increased
(iii) the anode potential is increased
In each case, all other factors remain the same.
5. Write Einstein’s photoelectric equation. State Clearly the three salient
features observed in photoelectric effect which can be explained on the
basis of the above equation.
6. Explain the effect of increase of (i) frequency (ii) intensity of the incident
radiation on photo electrons emitted by a metal.
7. X-rays of wave length λ fall on a photo sensitive surface emitting
electrons. Assuming that the work function of the surface can be neglected,
prove that the de-Broglie wavelength of electrons emitted will be .
hc P 2 2mnc h hλ
Ans. E = = ∴ P= , λe = =
λ 2m λ P 2mc
Unit VII - VIII 153

8. A particle of mass M at rest decays into two particles of masses m1
and m2 having velocities V1 and V2 respectively. Find the ratio of de-
Broglie wavelengths of the two particles.
Ans. 1 : 1
9. Give one example of a nuclear reaction. Also define the Q-value of the
reaction. What does Q > 0 signify?
10. Explain how radio-active nucleus can emit β-particles even though nuclei
do not contain these particles. Hence explain why the mass number of
radioactive nuclide does not change during β-decay.
11. Define the term half life period and decay constant. Derive the relation
between these terms.
12. State the law of radioactive decay. Deduce the relation N = N0e–λt,
where symbols have their usual meaning.
13. Give the properties of α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays.
14. With the help of one example, explain how the neutron to proton ratio
changes during alpha decay of a nucleus.
15. Distinguish between nuclear fusion and fission. Give an example of
each.
16. A radioactive nucleus A undergoes a series of decays according to
following scheme

The mass number and atomic number of A4 are 172 and 69 respectively.
What are these numbers for A ?
Ans. Mass no. of A = 180, Atomic no. of A = 72
17. Obtain a relation for total energy of the electron in terms of orbital
radius. Show that total energy is negative of K.E. and half of potential
energy.
E =
18. Draw energy level diagram for hydrogen atom and show the various
line spectra originating due to transition between energy levels.
19. The total energy of an electron in the first excited state of the hydrogen
atom is about – 3.4 eV. What is

(a) the kinetic energy,
(b) the potential energy of the electron?
(c) Which of the answers above would change if the choice of the
zero of potential energy in changed to (i) + 0.5 eV (ii) – 0.5 eV.
Ans. (a) When P.E. is chosen to be zero at infinity E = – 3.4 eV, using
E = – K.E., the K.E. = + 3.4 eV.
(b) Since P.E. = – 2E, PE = – 6.8 eV.
(c) If the zero of P.E. is chosen differently, K.E. does not change. The
P.E. and T.E. of the state, however would alter if a different zero
of the P.E. is chosen.
(i) When P.E. at ∞ is + 0.5 eV, P.E. of first excited state will be
– 3.4 – 0.5 = – 3.9 eV.
(ii) When P.E. at ∞ is + 0.5 eV, P.E. of first excited state will be
– 3.4 – (– 0.5) = – 2.9 eV.
20. What is beta decay? Write an equation to represent β– and β+ decay.
Explain the energy distribution curve is β decay.
21. Using energy level diagram show emission of γ rays by nucleus
and subsequent β decay to obtain .
LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS (5 Marks)

1.
State Bohr’s postulates. Using these postulates, derive an expression
for total energy of an electron in the nth orbit of an atom. What does
negative of this energy signify?
2.
Define binding energy of a nucleus. Draw a curve between mass number
and average binding energy per nucleon. On the basis of this curve,
explain fusion and fission reactions.
3.
State the law of radioactive disintegration. Hence define disintegration
constant and half life period. Establish relation between them.
4.
What is meant by nuclear fission and fusion. Draw Binding Energy Vs
Mass Number curve and explain four important features of this curve.
5.
Briefly explain Rutherford’s experiment for scattering of α particle with
the help of a diagram. Write the conclusion made and draw the model
suggested.
Unit VII - VIII 155

NUMERICALS
Ultraviolet light of wavelength 350 nm and intensity 1 W/m2 is directed
1.
at a potassium surface having work function 2.2eV.
(i) Find the maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectron.
(ii) If 0.5 percent of the incident photons produce photoelectric effect,
how many photoelectrons per second are emitted from the potassium
surface that has an area 1cm2.
Nhv
EKmax = 1.3 eV; n = or r = = nhv
t
A metal surface illuminated by 8.5 × 1014 Hz light emits electrons
2.
whose maximum energy is 0.52 eV the same surface is illuminated by
12.0 × 1014 Hz light emits elections whose maximum energy is 1.97eV.
From these data find work function of the surface and value of Planck’s
constant. [Work Function = 3eV]
3.
An electron and photon each have a wavelength of 0.2 nm. Calculate
their momentum and energy.
(i) 3.3 × 10–24 kgm/s
(ii) 6.2 keV for photon
(iii) 38eV for electron
4.
What is the (i) Speed (ii) Momentum (ii) de-Broglie wavelength of an
electron having kinetic energy of 120eV?
Ans. (a) 6.5 × 106 m/s; (b) 5.92 × 10–24 kg m/s; (c) 0.112 nm.
5. If the frequency of incident light in photoelectric experiment is doubled
then does the stopping potential become double or more than double,
justify? (More than double)
Long Answer Question :
6. (A) Why wave theory of light could not explain the photoelectric effect?
State two reasons. Draw graph between
(i) frequency v vs stopping potential V0.
(ii) Intensity vs photoelectric current.
(iii) anode potential vs photoelectric current.

6.(B) A proton is accelerated through a potential difference V. Find the
percentage increase or decrease in its de-Broglie wavelength if potential
difference is increased by 21%.
(9.1%)
7. For what kinetic energy of a neutron will the associated de-Broglie
wavelength be 5.6 × 10–10m?
Ans. =

⇒ K.E. =
= 3.35 × 10–21J
8.
A nucleus of mass M initially at rest splits into two fragments of masses
and . Find the ratio of de-Broglie wavelength of the fragments.
Ans. Following the law of conservation of momentum,

= 0
or =

λ= ⇒ = 1
9.
An electron and a proton are possessing same amount of K.E., which
of the two have greater de-Broglie, wavelength? Justify your answer.
Ans. Ee =
and Ep =

⇒ meve = and mpvp =
Unit VII - VIII 157

But, Ee = Ep ⇒ =
∴ λe > λp.
10. The electron in a given Bohr orbit has a total energy of –1.51 eV.
Calculate the wavelength of radiation emitted, when this electon makes
a transition to the ground state.
Ans. 1028 A°
11. Calculate the radius of the third Bohr orbit of hydrogen atom and energy
of electron in third Bohr orbit of hydrogen atom.
Ans. (–1.51 eV)
12. Calculate the longest and shortest wavelength in the Balmer series of
Hydrogen atom. Rydberg constant = 1.0987 × 107 m–1.
Ans. λl = 6553 A°, λs = 3640Aº
13. What will be the distance of closest approach of a 5 MeV a-particle as
it approaches a gold nucleus? (given Atomic no. of gold = 79)
Ans. 4.55 × 10–14m
14. A 12.5 MeV alpha – particle approaching a gold nucleus is deflected
180°. What is the closest distance to which it approaches the nucleus?
Ans. 1.82 × 10–14m
15. Determine the speed of the electron in n = 3 orbit of hydrogen atom.
Ans. 7.29 × 105ms–1
16. There are radioactive nuclei in a given radio active element.
If half life is 20 seconds, how many nuclei will remain after 10 seconds?
Ans. 4 × 106
17. The half life of a radioactive substance is 5 hours. In how much time
will 15/16 of the material decay?
Ans. 20 hours
18. At a given instant, there are 25% undecayed radioactive nuclei in a
sample. After 10 seconds, the number of undecayed nuclei reduces
12.5%. Calculate the mean life of nuclei.
Ans. 14.43

19. Binding energy of 2He4 and 3Li7 nuclei are 27.37 MeV and 39.4 MeV
respectively. Which of the two nuclei is more stable? Why?
Ans. 2He4 because its BE/nucleon is greater.
20. Find the binding energy and binding energy per nucleon of nucleus 83B209.
Given : mass of proton = 1.0078254 u. mass of neutron = 1.008665 u.
Mass of 209
83Bi = 208.980388u.
Ans. 1639.38 MeV and 7.84 MeV/Nucleon
21. Is the fission of iron (26Fe56) into (13Al28) as given below possible?
56 28 28
26Fe → 13Al + 13Al + Q
Given mass of 26 Fe56 = 55.934940 and 13Al
28 = 27.98191 U
Ans. Since Q value comes out negative, so this fission is not possible
22. Find the maximum energy that β-particle may have in the following
decay :
19 19 0
8O → 9F + –1e +
Given m (8O19) = 19.003576 a.m.u.
m (9F19) = 18.998403 a.m.u.
m (–e0) = 0.000549 a.m.u.
Ans. 4.3049 MeV
23. The value of wavelength in the lyman series is given as
913.4ni2
λ = Å
ni2 – 1
Calculate the wavelength corresponding to transition from energy level
2, 3 and 4. Does wavelength decreases or increase.
Ans. λ21 = = 1218 Å

λ31 = = 1028 Å

λ41 = = 974.3 Å
λ41 < λ31 < λ21
Unit VII - VIII 159

24. The half life of undergoing α decay is 4.5 × 109 years what is
the activity of 1g. sample of .
Ans. T1/2 = 4.5 × 109 y
= 4.5 × 109 × 3.16 × 107s
= 1.42 × 1017 s
1g of contains = atom
= 25.3 × 1020 atoms

0.693

∴ decay rate = R = λN = ×N
T
= 1.23 × 104 bq.

Answer to 2 Marks Question
1. Similarity : Both follow wave equation (partial differential equation)
dissimilarity : Matter waves
(a) cannot be radiated in empty space.
(b) are associated with the particles, not emitted by it
2. Yes, λ =
hc
3. λ = for photon P = and l = for electron P = 2M E
E
λphoton = 2.4 × 10–8m, λelectron = 3.6 × 10–10m

4. λ = 3300Aº, E = = ≈ 3.8 eV
Work function of Mo & Ni > 3.8 eV hence no photoelectron emission

from Mo and Ni.
5. λ =
⇒ λ α

6. Q
hv0
K.E.max ≈ 1.3 eV As = −2V
e
7. E = mc2, hv = mc2, m = , no, it depends upon frequency.
8. KE = hv – hv0. The electrons in the atom of metal occupy different

energy levels, thus have different minimum energy required to be ‘ejected’
from the atom. So the e– with higher energy will have higher kinetic
energy.
1 λ1 2 2
9. Decreases, =
λ ∴=
V λ2 1
11. KEmax = hv – w0 ⇒ KEmax decreases with increase in w0.
12. Distance of closest approach is defined as the minimum distance between
the charged particle and the nucleus at which initial kinetic energy of
the particle is equal to electrostatic potential energy.
for α particle, =
r ∝

\ r will be halved.
14. (i) Similar to x-rays — γ-rays.
(ii) α-particle.
(iii) γ-rays.
(iv) β-particle.
Unit VII - VIII 161

15. Nuclear radioactive waste will hang like a cloud in the earth atmosphere
and will absorb sun radiations.
16. The total binding energy of nuclei on two sides need not be equal. The
difference in energy appears as the energy released or absorbed.
17. n = 2 as rn α n2
18. From relation = when t = T/2
12
 
=  
 
or = = = 70.9 %
19. Because radius of atom is very large than radius of nucleus.

20. Due to mass defect or different binding energies.
21. Decreases as number of neutrons decreases and number of protons
increases. N → P+–1e0
22. To counter repulsive coulomb forces, strong nuclear force required
between neutron-neutron, neutron-proton and proton-proton.
23. N = N0e–λt differentiating both sides we get = – λN0e–λt = –λN i.e.,
decay rate
R = – = λN
24. For fusion, temperature required is from 106 to 107 K. So, to carry out
fusion for peaceful purposes we need some system which can create
and bear such a high temperature.
25. Nuclear forces are short range forces (within the nucleus) and do not
obey inverse square law while coulomb forces are long range (infinite)
and obey inverse square law.

26. =
or =
or 3 =

⇒ t = 9 days.
28.
29. V0 = (E – φ0)/e = = 18V.


Unit VII - VIII 163

Electronic Devices
Unit IX
ELECTRONIC DEVICES
KEY POINTS
ELECTRONIC DEVICES
1. Solids are classified on the basis of
(i) Electrical conductivity Resistivity Conductivity
Metals ρ(Ωm) σ(Sm–1)
10–2 – 10–8 102 – 108
Semi-conductors 10–5 – 106 10–6 – 105
Insulators 1011 – 1019 10–19 – 10–11
(ii) Energy Bands (a) Metals →

Fig. (a)

(b) Insulators →
Fig (b)
(c) Semiconductors →
Fig (c)
2. Types of Semi-conductors
2 Types of semi-conductors
|
| |
Elemental Compound
Si, Ge |
| |
Inorganic Organic, Anthracene
CdS, GaAS, Doped Pthalocyamines etc.
CdSe, InP etc.
3. In intrinsic semiconductors (Pure Si, Ge) carrier (electrons and holes) are
generated by breaking of bonds within the semiconductor itself. In extrinsic
semiconductors carriers (e and h) are increased in numbers by ‘doping’.
4. An intrinsic semiconductor at 0 K temperature behaves as an insulator.
5. Pentavalent (donor) atom (As, Sb, P etc) when doped to Si or Ge give
n-type and trivalent (accestor) atom (In, Ga, Ag, etc) doped with Si or
Ge give p-type semiconductor. In n-type semiconductor electrons are the
majority charge carriers & in p-type holes are the majority charge carriers.
Unit IX - X 165
6. Net charge in p-type or n-type semiconductor remains zero.
7. Diffusion and drift are the two processes that occur during formation of p-n
junction.
8. Diffusion current is due to concentration gradient and drift current is due to
electric field.
9. In depletion region movement of electrons and holes depleted it of its free
charges.
10. p-n Junction is the most important semiconductor device because of its
different behaviours in forward biasing (as conductor for V > Vb) and
reverse biasing (as insulator for V < VB) a p-n junction can be used as
Rectifier, LED, photodiode, solar cell etc.
Differences between FB and RB junction diodes :
Reverse Bias
Forward Bias

Depletion layer is decreased Depletion layer is increased
Lower resistance Higher resistance
R → 0 ideal diode R → ∞ ideal diods

Current due to majority Current due to minority charge carrier.
charge carrier.
11. In half wave rectifier frequency output pulse is same as that of input and in
full wave rectifier frequency of output is double of input.
Rectifier p-n junction diode

Half Wave Rectifier Full Wave Rectifier
A vin D1
A +
S –
S vi v0 + + Vout→
B –
B
D2
12. When a zener diode is reverse biased, voltage across it remains steady for
a range of currents above zener breakdown. Because of this property, the
diode is used as a voltage regulator.
QUESTIONS
VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS

1. Name the process involved in the formation of p-n junction diode.
[Drift and Diffusion]
2. Name three processes involved in the formation of solar cell.
[generation, separation and collection]
3. Distinguish between intrisic and extrinsic semiconductors on the basis of
energy band diagrams.
4. How does energy gap in intrinsic semiconductor vary when it is doped with
a(i) pentavalent impurity (ii) trivalent impurity?
5. Which type of extrinsic semiconductor has more mobility and why?
Unit IX - X 167
6. Name the factors which determines (i) frequency and (ii) intensity of light
emitted by LED. [(i) Bandgap (ii) doping]
7. How does the width of depletion region of a p-n junction diode change with
decrease in reverse bias?
8. What is the direction of diffusion current in a function diode? [p-n]
9. Zener diode has higher dopant density as compared to ordinary p-n function
diode. How does it effect (i) width of deflection layer and (ii) function field.
[(i) ↓ (ii) ↑ as Eβ = ]
10. How does the height of potential barrier vary with increase in temp. [ ↑ ]
11. Write the relation between number density of holes and number density of
free electrons in an intrinsic semiconductor.
Ans. ne = nh
12. Write the value of resistance offered by an ideal diode when (i) forward
based (ii) reverse biased.
Ans. (i) Zero (ii) infinite
13. Write any one use of (i) photodiode (ii) LED.
Ans. (i) Use of Photodiode (a) In detection of optical signal
(b) In demodulation of optical signal
(c) In light operated switches
(d) In electronic counters
(ii) Use of LED (a) Infrared LEDs are used in burglar
alarm
(b) In optical communication
(c) LED’s are used as indicator lamps in radio
receivers
(d) In remote controls
14. A semiconductor is damaged when strong current passes through it.
Why ?
Ans. Because bonds break up, crystal lattice breakdown takes place and crystal
lattice becomes useless.

15. Draw I–V characteristic of a solar cell.
Ans.
16. What is the direction of diffusion current in a junction diode ?

Ans. The direction of diffusion current is from P to N in a semiconductor junction
diode.
17. Draw a circuit diagram showing the biasing of a photodiode.
18. Name the semiconductor device that can be used to regulate an unregulated
dc power supply.
Ans. Zener diode
19. Name the p-n junction diode which emits spontaneous radiation when
forward biased.
Ans. Light emitting diode (LED)
20. Name the material used to make a light emitting diode.
Ans. GaAs and GaP
21. A semiconductor device is connected in a series circuit with a battery and
a resistance. A current is found to pass through the circuit. When polarity
of the battery is reversed, the current drops to almost zero. Name the
semiconductor device.
Ans. P–N junction
(Junction Diode)
22. In the following diagram write which of the diode is forward biased and
which is reverse biased ?
23. How does the energy gap in semiconductor vary, when doped, with a
pentavalent impurity ?
Ans. The energy gap decreases.
Unit IX - X 169
19. What is the order of energy gap in a conductor, semiconductor and insulator.
Ans. Conductor–no energy gap
Semiconductor < 3 eV
Insulator > 3 eV
20. The ratio of the number of free electrons to holes ne/nh for two different
materials A and B are 1 and < 1 respectively. Name the type of semiconductor
to which A and B belong.
Ans. ∴ Intrinsic semiconductor
∴ p type extrinsic semiconductor

1. If the frequency of the input signal is f. What will be the frequency of the
pulsating output signal in case of :
(i) half wave rectifier ? (ii) full wave rectifier ?
2. Find the equivalent resistance of the network shown in figure between point
A and B when the p-n junction diode is ideal and :
(i) A is at higher potential (ii) B is at higher potential
3. Potential barrier of p-n. junction cannot be measured by connecting a

sensitive voltmeter across its terminals. Why ?
4. Diode is a non linear device. Explain it with the help of a graph.
5. A n-type semiconductor has a large number of free electrons but still it is
electrically neutral. Explain.
6. The diagram shows a piece of pure semiconductor S in series with a
variable resistor R and a source of constant voltage V. Would you increase
or decrease the value of R to keep the reading of ammeter A constant, when
semiconductor S is heated ? Give reason.

7. In the given circuit, D is an ideal diode. What is the voltage across R ?
When the applied voltage V makes the diode.
(a) Forward bias ?
(b) Reverse bias ?
8. What are the characteristics to be taken care of while doping a semiconductor ?

Ans. (a) The size of the dopent atom should be such that it do not distort the
pure semiconductor labtice.
(b) It can easily contribute a charge carrier on forming covalent bond with
pere Si or Ge.
9. Which special type of diode can act as a voltage regulator ? Give the symbol
of this diode and draw the general shape of its V-I characteristics.
10. Show the donor energy level in energy band diagram of n-type semiconductor.
11. Show the acceptor energy level in energy band diagram of p-type
semiconductor.
12. What is the value of knee voltage in
(a) Ge junction diode.
(b) Si junction diode.
13. Describe the working principle of a solar cell. Mention three basic processes
involved in the generation of emf.
14. Two semiconductor materials X and Y shown in the given figure, are made
by doping germanium crystal with indium and arsenic respectively. The two
Unit IX - X 171
are joined at lattice level and connected to a battery as shown.
(i) Will the junction be forward biased or reversed biased ?

(ii) Sketch a V-I graph for this arrangement.
15. Following voltage waveform is fed into half wave rectifier that uses a silicon
diode with a threshold voltage of 0.7 V. Draw the output voltage waveform.
2v
–2v

1. What is depletion region in p-n junction diode. Explain its formation with
the help of a suitable diagram.
2. What is rectification ? With the help of labelled circuit diagram explain half
wave rectification using a junction diode.
3. With the help of a circuit diagram explain the V–I graph of a p-n junction
in forward and reverse biasing.
4. What is p-n junction ? How is p-n junction made ? How is potential barrier
developed in a p-n junction.
5. Give three differences between forward bias and reverse bias.
6. Show the biasing of a photodiode with the help of a circuit diagram. Draw
graphs to show variations in reverse bias currents for different illumination
intensities.
7. Write three differences between n-type semiconductor and p-type
semiconductor.

3. What is p-n junction diode ? Define the term dynamic resistance for the
junction. With the help of labelled diagram, explain the working of p-n
junction as a full wave rectifier.
NUMERICALS
1. In a p-n junction, width of depletion region is 300 nm and electric field of
7 × 105 V/m exists in it.
(i) Find the height of potential barrier.
(ii) What should be the minimum kinetic energy of a conduction electron
which can diffuse from the n-side to the p-side ?
2. An LED is constructed from a p-n junction of a certain semiconducting
material whose energy gap is 1.9eV. What is the wavelength of light emitted
by this LED ? [Ans. l = 6.54 × 10–7 m]
3. Determine the current I for the network. (Barrier voltage for Si diode is 0.7
volt).
4. Determine V0 and Id for the network.
5. A p-n junction is fabricated from a semiconductor with a band gap of

2.8 eV. Can it detect a wavelength of 600 nm ? Justify your answer.
Ans. Eneryg of photon of wavelength 600 n m = 2.07 eV .......... working condition
of photodiode hv £ Eg but Eg > hv so photodio can not detecthe given
wavelength
6. Determine V0, Id1 and Id2 for the given network. Where D1 and D2 are made
of silicon.
Unit IX - X 173
Ans. V0 = Vsi = 0.7V
10 − 0.7
I1 =
.33 × 103
= 28.18 mA
28.18
\ Id = Id =
1 2 2
= 14.09 mA
7. Pure Si at 300 K has equal electron (ne) and hole (nh) concentration of
1.5 × 1016/m3. Doping by indium increases nh to 4.5 × 1022/m3. Calculate
ne in the doped silicon. [Ans. : 5 × 109 m–3]
8. The solar radiation spectrum shows that maximum solar intensity is near
to energy hν = 1.5 eV. Answer the following :
(i) Why are Si and GaAs are preferred materials for solar cells.
(ii) Why Cd S or CdSe (Eg ~ 2.4 eV) are not preferred.
(iii) Why we do not use materials like PbS (Eg ~ 0.4 eV).
Ans. (i) For photo-excitation, hν > Eg. Si has Eg. ~ 1.1 eV and for GaAs,
Eg. ~ 1.53 eV.
GaAs is better than Si because of its relatively higher absorption
coefficient.
(ii) If we choose CdS or CdSe, we can use only the high energy component
of the solar energy for photo-conversion and a significant part of energy
will be of no use.
(iii) The condition hν > Eg. is satisfied, but if we use Pbs, most of solar
radiation will be absorbed on the top-layer of solar cell and will not
reach in or near depletion region.

1. Frequency of output in half wave rectifier is f and in full have rectifier is
2f.
2. Equivalent resistance is
(i) 10Ω, As diode is forward biased
(ii) 20Ω, diode is reverse biased
3. Because there is no free charge carrier in depletion region.
6. On heating S, resistance of semiconductors S is decreased so to compensate

the value of resistance in the circuit R is increased.
9. In this case diode is sensitive and it is easier to observe fractional change

in current with change in intensity.
16. (a) V (b) Zero

21. Zener diode
I (mA)
VZ
I (µA)
(i) Reverse Bias (ii) V-I characterstic
26. Ge ~ 0.3 V
Si ~ 0.7 V
29. (i) Reverse bias
(ii)
Unit IX - X 175
31. Output waveform is :
NUMERICALS
1. (i) V = Ed = 7 × 105 × 300 × 10–9 = 0.21 V
(ii) Kinetic energy = eV = 0.21 eV
4.
5. V0 = E – Vsi – VGe = 12 – 0.7 – 1.1 = 12 – 1.8 = 10.2 V
Id = V0 = 12 – 0.7 – 0.3 = 11 V
11
Id = = 1.96 mA
5.6 × 103


CBSE
Examination
Paper Delhi–2014
Time allowed : 3 hours· Maximum marks : 70

General Instructions:
(i) All questions are compulsory.
(ii) Question numbers I to S are very short answer questions and carry I mark each.
(iii) Question numbers 9 to 18 are short answer questions and carry 2 marks each.
(iv) Question numbers 19 to 27 are also sliort answer questions and carry 3 marks each.
(v) Question numbers 28 to 30 are long answer questions and carry 5 marks each.
(v) Use log tables, if necessary. Use of calculators is not allowed.
S
E
T
-
1
1 Define the term ‘Mobility’ of charge carries in a conductor. Write its SI unit.
2. “For any charge configuration, equipotential surface through a point is normal to
the electric field.” Justify.
3. Two spherical bobs, one metallic and the other of glass, of the same size are
allowed to fall freely from the same height above the ground. Which of the
two would reach earlier and why
4. Show variation of resistivity of copper as a function of temperature in a graph.
5. A convex lens is placed in contact with a plane mirror. A point object at a distance
of 20 cm on the axis of this combination has its image coinciding with itself. What
is the focal length of the lens?

6. Write the expression, in a vector form, for the Lorentz magnetic force F due to a
 
charge moving with velocity V in a magnetic field B . What is the direction of the
magnetic force?
7. Out of the two magnetic materials, ‘A’ has relative permeability slightly greater
than unity while ‘B’ has less than unity. Identify the nature of the materials ‘A’
and ‘B’. Will their susceptibilities be positive or negative’.’
Sample Papers 177

 
8. Given a uniform electric field E = 5 × 103 i N/C, find the flux of this field
through a square of 10 cm on a side whose plane is parallel to the y-z plane.
What would be the flux through the same square if the plane makes a 30°
angle with the x-axis?
9. For a single slit of width “a”, the first minimum of the interference pattern of a

monochromatic light of wavelength occurs at an angle of . At the same angle of
a

, we get a maximum for two narrow slits separated by a distance “a”. Explain.
a
10. State Kirchhoff’s rules. Explain briefly how these rules are justified.
11. A capacitor ‘C’, a variable resistor ‘R’ and a bulb ‘B’ are connected in series to
the ac mains in circuits as shown. The bulb glows with some brightness. How
will the glow of the bulb change if (i) a dielectric slab is introduced between
the plates of the capacitor, keeping resistance R to be the same: (ii) the resistor
R is increased keeping the same capacitance?
B
C R
Mains
12. State the underlying principle of a cyclotron. Write briefly how this machine is
used to accelerate charged particles to high energies.
13. An electric dipole of length 4 cm, when placed with its axis making an angle of
60° with a uniform electric field, experiences a torque of 4 3 Nm. Calculate the
potential energy of the dipole, if it has charge ±8 nC.
14. A proton and a deuteron are accelerated through the same accelerating potential.
Which one of the two has
(i) greater value of de-Broglie wavelength associated with it, and
(ii) less momentum?
Give reasons to justify your answer.
178 Physics Class-XII

15. (i) Monochromatic light of frequency 6.0 × 1014 Hz is produced by a laser. The
power emitted is 2.0 × 10–3 W. Estimate the number of photons emitted per
second on an average by the source.
(ii) Draw a plot showing the variation of photoelectric current versus the intensity
of incident radiation on a photosensitive surface.
16. A 12.5 eV electron beam is used to bombard gaseous hydrogen at room
temperature. Upto which energy level the hydrogen atoms would be excited?
Calculate the wavelengths of the first member of Lyman and first member of
Baimer series.
17. A potentiometer wire of length 1 m has a resistance of 10 W. It is connected to a
6 V battery in series with a resistance of 5. Determine the emf of the primary ceil
which gives a balance point at 40 cm.
18. (a) Draw a labelled ray diagram showing the formation of a final image by a
compound microscope at least distance of distinct vision.
(b) The total magnification produced by a compound microscope is 20. The
magnification produced by the eye piece is 5. The microscope is focussed
on a certain object. The distance between the objective and eyepiece is
observed to be 14 cm. If least distance of distinct vision is 20 cm, calculate
the focal length of the objective and the eye piece.
19. (a) A mobile phone lies along the principal axis of a concave mirror. Show, with
the help of a suitable diagram, the formation of its image. Explain why
magnification is not uniform.
(b) Suppose the lower half of the concave mirror’s reflecting surface is covered
with an opaque material. What effect this will have on the image of the object?
Explain.
20. (a) Obtain the expression for the energy stored per unit volume in a charged
parallel plate capacitor.
(b) The electric field inside a parallel plate capacitor is E. Find the amount of
work done in moving a charge q over a closed rectangular loop abcda.
Sample Papers 179

+ +
a b
d c
21. (a) Derive the expression for the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor having
plate area A and plate separation d.
(b) Two charged spherical conductors of radii R{ and R2 when connected by a
conducting wire acquire charges q and c/2 respectively. Find the ratio of their
surface charge densities in terms of their radii.
22. (a)Stale Ampere’s circuital law, expressing it in the integral form.
(b) Two long coaxial insulated solenoids, St and S2 of equal lengths are wound
one over the other as shown in the figure. A steady current “I” flow through
the inner solenoid S1 to the other end B. which is connected to the outer
solenoid S2 through which the same current “I” flows in the opposite
direction so as to come out at end A. If n1 and n2 are the number of turns
per unit length, find the magnitude and direction of the net magnetic field
at a point (i) inside on the axis and (ii) outside the combined system.
r2
l B
r1 S1
I
n1 turns S2
n1 turns
23. Answer the following:
(a) Name the em waves which are suitable for radar systems used in aircraft
navigation. Write the range of frequency of these waves.

(b) If the earth did not have atmosphere, would its average surface temperature
be higher or lower than what it is now? Explain.
(c) An em wave exerts pressure on the surface on which it is incident. Justify.
24. (a)Deduce the expression, N = N0e–t, for the law of radioactive decay.
(b) (i) Write symbolically the process expressing the + decay of 2211Na. Also
write the basic nuclear process underlying this decay.
(ii) Is the nucleus formed in the decay of the nucleus of 2211Na, an isotope or
isobar?
25. (a)(i) ‘Two independent monochromatic sources of light cannot produce a
sustained interference pattern’. Give reason.
(ii) Light waves each of amplitude “a” and frequency “”, emanating from
two coherent light sources superpose at a point. If the displacements
due to these waves is given by y1 = a cos (t + ) and y2 = a cos (t
+ ) where  is the phase difference between the two, obtain the
expression for the resultant intensity at the point.
(b) In Young’s double slit experiment, using monochromatic light of wavelength
, the intensity of light at a point on the screen where path difference is , is K
units. Find out the intensity of light at a point where path difference is /3.
OR
(a) How does one demonstrate, using a suitable diagram, that unpolarised light
when passed through a polaroid gets polarised?
(b) A beam of unpolarised light is incident on a glass-air interface. Show, using a
suitable ray diagram, that light reflected from the interface is totally polarised,
when  = tan iB, where , is the refractive index of glass with respect to air
and iB is the Brewster’s angle.
26. (a) Describe a simple experiment (or activity) to show that the polarity of emf
induced in a coil is always such that it tends to produce a current which
opposes the change of magnetic flux that produce it.
(b) The current flowing through an inductor of self inductance L is continuously
increasing. Plot a graph showing the variation of
(i) Magnetic flux versus the current
(ii) Induced emf versus dI/dt
(iii) Magnetic potential energy stored versus the current.
OR
Sample Papers 181

(a) Draw a schematic sketch of an ac generator describing its basic elements.
State briefly its working principle. Show a plot of variation of
(i) Magnetic flux and
(ii) Alternating emf versus time generated by a loop of wire rotating in a
magnetic field.
(b) Why is choke coil needed in the use of fluorescent tubes with ac mains?
27. (a) State briefly the processes involved in the formation of p-n junction explaining
clearly how the depletion region is formed.
(b) Using the necessary circuit diagrams, show how the V-I characteristics of a
p-n junction are obtained in
(i) Forward biasing
(ii) Reverse biasing
How are these characteristics made use of in rectification?
Set-II (Questions Uncommon to Set-I)

1. Define the term ‘electrical conductivity’ of a metallic wire. Write its S.I. unit.
3. Show variation of resistivity of Si with temperature in a graph.
10. An electric dipole of length 2 cm, when placed with its axis making an angle of
60° with a uniform electric field, experiences a torque of 8 3 Nm. Calculate the
potential energy of the dipole, if it has a charge of ±4nC.
15. A proton and an alpha particle are accelerated through the same potential. Which
one of the two has (i) greater value of de-Broglie wavelength associated with it
and (ii) less kinetic energy? Give reasons to justify your answer.
 
16. Given a uniform electric field E = 2 × 103 i N/C, find the flux of this field
through a square of side 20cm, whose plane is parallel to the y-z plane. What
would be the flux through the same square, if the plane makes an angle of 30°
with the x-axis?
20. A 12.9 eV beam of electrons is used to bombard gaseous hydrogen at room
Calculate the wavelength of the first member of Paschen series and first member
of Balmer series.

22. Answer the following:
(a) Name the em waves which are used for the treatment of certain forms of
cancer. Write their frequency range.
(b) Thin ozone layer on top of stratosphere is crucial for human survival. Why?
(c) Why is the amount of the momentum transferred by the em waves incident on
the surface so small?
24. A potentiometer wire of length 1.0 m has a resistance of 15. It is connected to a
5 battery in series with a resistance of 5. Determine the emf of the primary cell
SET-III (Questions Uncommon to set-I and II)

1. Define the term ‘drift velocity’ of charge carriers in a conductor and write its
relationship with the current flowing through it.
4. Plot a graph showing variation of current versus voltage for the material GaAs.
9. An electric dipole of length 1 cm, which placed with its axis making an angle of
60° with uniform electric field, experiences a torque of 6 3 Nm. Calculate the
potential energy of the dipole if it has charge ± 2nC.
12. A deuteron and an alpha particle are accelerated with the same accelerating potential.
Which one of the two has
(a) greater value of de-Broglie wavelength, associated with it and
(b) less kinetic energy’.’ Explain.
20. A 12.3 eV electron beam is used to bombard gaseous hydrogen at room
Calculate the wavelengths of the second member of Lyman series and second
member of Balmer series.
24. Answer the following questions:
(a) Name the em waves which are produced during radioactive decay of a nucleus.
Write their frequency range.
(b) Welders wear special glass goggles while working. Why? Explain.
(c) Why are infrared waves often called as heat waves? Give their one application.
25. A potentiometer wire of length 1 m has a resistance of 5. It is connected to a 8 V
battery in series with a resistance of 15. Determine the emf of the primary cell
Sample Papers 183

Solutions
SET-I
1. Mobility is defined as the magnitude of the drift velocity per unit electric field.
| vd | a eE  e
=    
E E m E m
where  is the average collision time for electrons.
The SI unit of mobility is m2/Vs or m2V–1S–1
2. The work done in moving a charge from one point to another on an equipotential
surface is zero. If electric field is not-normal to the equipotential surface, it
would have non-zero component along the surface. In that case work would be
done in moving a charge on an equipotential surface.
3. Glass would reach earlier. This is because there is no effect of electromagnetic
induction in glass, due to presence of Earth’s magnetic field, unlike in the case
of metallic ball.
Resistivity  (10  m)
0.4
–8
I 0.2
4.
0 50 100 150
Temperature T(K)
5. The focal length of the lens = 20 cm

Explanation:
As the image of this combination coincides with the object itself, the rays from
the object, after refraction from the lens should fall normally on the plane
Point
P P
Object

mirror, so that they retrace their path. So the rays from the point object after
refraction from the lens must form parallel beam. For clarity, mirror has been
placed at a small distance from the lens.
  
6. Lorentz force, F = q (v  B )

Obviously, the 
force on charged particle is perpendicular to both velocity v and
magnetic field B .
7. A  Paramagnetic ( r > 1)
B  Diamagnetic ( r > 1)
Susceptibility for A  Positive
Susceptibility for B  Negative
 
8. Here, E = 5 × 103 i N/C, i.e. field is along positive direction of x-axis.
Surface area, A = 10 cm × 10 cm
= 0.10 m × 0.10 m
= 10–2 m2
(i) When plane parallel to y – z plane, the normal to plane is along x axis. Hence
 = 0°
 = EA cos
 = 5 × 103 × 10–2 cos 0°
= 50NC–1 m2
(ii) When the plane makes a 30° angle with the x-axis, the normal to its plane
makes 60° angle with x-axis. Hence
0 = 60°
 = EA cos 
= 5 × 103 × 10–2 cos 60°
= 25 NC–1 m2
9. Case I: The overlapping of the contributions of the wavelets from two halves of
a single slit produces a minimum because corresponding wavelets from two halves
have a path difference of  / 2 .
Case II: The overlapping of the wavefronts from the two slits produces first
maximum because these wavefronts have the path difference, of 
P is NAND gate and Q is OR gate.
Sample Papers 185
10. Junction rule: In an electric circuit, the algebraic sum of currents at any junction is
zero.
At any junction, the sum of the currents entering the junction is equal to the sum
of currents leaving the junction.
 = O
Justification: This rule is based on the law of conservation of charge.
Loop rule: The algebraic sum of charges in potential around any closed loop
involving resistors and cells in the loop is zero.
V = O
Justification: This rule is based on the law of conservation of energy.
11. (i) The reactance of the capacitor will decrease, this results in increase of the
current in the circuit. So, the bulb will glow brighter.
(ii) Increased resistance will decrease the current in the circuit, which will decrease
glow of the bulb.
12. A cyclotron makes use of the principle that the energy of the charged particles or
ions can be made to increase in presence of crossed electric and magnetic fields.
The magnetic field acts on the charged particle and makes them move in a circular
path inside the dee. Every time the particle moves from one dee to another it is
acted upon by the alternating electric field, and is accelerated by this field, which
increases the energy of the particle.
13. Torque,  = pE sin 
4 3 = pE sin 60°
3
4 3 = pE ×  pE = 8
2
Now, potential energy, U = –pE cos 
= – 8 cos 60°
1
= –8 × = –4J
2
h
14. (i) de Broglie wavelength.  =
2mqV
Here V same for proton and deutron.

As mass of proton < mass of deutron and qp = qd
Therefore, p > d for same accelerating potential.
h
(ii) We know that momentum =

Therefore, p > d
So, momentum of proton will be less than that of deutron.
15. (i) Power = nhv
where n = number of photons per second
2.0 × 10–3 = n × 6.6 × 10–34 × 6 × 1014
2.0  10 –3
n =
6.6  10 –34  6  1014
2.0  10 –3
=
39.6  10 –20
= 5 × 10 photons per second
(ii)
Photo electric current
Intensity of light
16. Here, E= 12.5 eV
13.6
Energy of an electron in the nth orbit of hydrogen atom is En = – eV
n2
For ground state n = 1,
13.6
E1 = – eV = –13.6 eV
12
Sample Papers 187

For first excited state n = 2,
13.6
E2 = – eV = –3.4 eV
22
For second excited state n = 3,
13.6
E3 = – eV = –1.51 eV
32
Energy required to excite hydrogen atoms from ground state to the second excited
state
= Efinal – Einitial
= –151 –(–13.6) = 12.09 eV
Thus hydrogen atoms would be excited upto third energy level (n = 3).
For Lyman series,
1  1 2
= R 2 – 2 
  n f ni 
1 1 1
= 1.097 × 107  2 – 2 
 1 2
1 3
= 1.097 × 107 ×
 4
1
= 0.82275 × 107 m–1

 = 122 × 10–9 m = 122nm
For Balmer series
1  1 1
= 1.097 × 107  2 – 2 
 2 3 
1 5
= 1.097 × 107 ×
 36
1
= 0.15236 × 107

 = 656.3 nm
17. Here, l = 1 m. R1 =10, V = 6V, R2 = 5
Current flowing in potentiometer wire,
V 6 6
I =    0.4A
R1  R 2 10  5 15
Potential drop across the potentiometer wire
V = IR = 0.4 × 10 = 4V
V' 4
Potential gradient, K =   4V / m
1 1
Emf of the primary cell = KI
= 4 × 0.4 = 1.6 V
18. (a)
(b) Here, m = –20, me = 5, ve = – 20 cm
ve
For eyepiece, me =
ue
–20 –20
 5=  =  –4cm
ue 5
Sample Papers 189
Using lens formula,
1 1 1
– =
ve ue fe
1 1 1
–  =
20 4 fe
–1  5 1
= f  fe = 5 cm
20 e
Now, total magnification

m = me × m0
–20 = 5 × m0
v0
m0 = 1 –
f0
10
–4 = 1 –
f0
10
–5 =  f0 = 2 cm.
f0
19. (a)
The position of the image of different parts of the mobile phone depends on their
position with respect to the mirror. The image of the part which is on the plane

perpendicular to principal axis will be on the same plane. It will of the same size,
i.e., BC = BC. The images of the other parts of the phone are getting magnified
in accordance with their object distance from the mirror.
(b) Taking the laws of reflection to be true for all points of the remaining
(uncovered) part of the mirror, the image will be that of the whole object. As
the area of the reflecting surface has been reduced, the intensity of the image
will be low (in this case halt).
20. (a) When a capacitor is charged by a battery, work is done by the charging
battery at the expense of its chemical energy. This work is stored in the
capacitor in the form of electrostatic potential energy.
Consider a capacitor of capacitance C. Initial charge on capacitor is zero.
Initial potential difference between capacitor plates = zero. Let a charge Q be
given to it in small steps. When charge is given to capacitor, the potential
difference between its plates increases. Let at any instant when charge on
q
capacitor be q, the potential difference between its plates V = .
C
Now work done in giving an additional infinitesimal charge dq to capacitor
q
dW = V dq = dq.
C
The total work done in giving charge from 0 to Q will be equal to the sum
of all such infinitesimal works, which may be obtained by integration.
Therefore total work
Q Q q
W = 0
V dq  
0 C
dq
If V is the final potential difference between capacitor plates, then Q = CV
(CV ) 2 1 1
W =  CV 2  QV
2C 2 2
This work is stored as electrostatic potential energy of capacitor i.e.,
Sample Papers 191

Electrostatic potential energy,
Q2 1 1
U =  CV 2  QV
2C 2 2
If V is the findal potential difference between capacitor plates, then
Q = CV
Energy density: Consider a parallel plate capacitor consisting of plates, each
of area A, separated by a distance d. If space between the plates is filled with
a medium of dielectric constant K, then
K ε0 A
Capacitance of capacitor, C =
d
If  is the surface charge density of plates, then electric field strength between
the plates

E = K   = K 0 E
0
Charge on each plate of capacitor Q = A = K 0 E A
Q ( K  0 EA) 1
 Energy stored by capacitor, U =   K  0 E 2 Ad
2C 2( K  0 A l d ) 2
But Ad = volume of space between capacitor plates
1
Energy stored, U = K  0 E 2 Ad
2
U 1
Electrostatic Energy stored per unit volume, ue =  K 0 E 2
Ad 2
This is expression for electrostatic energy density in medium of dielectric
constant K.
1
In air or free space (K = 1), therefore energy density, ue = K 0 E 2
2

(b) Work done in moving a charge q from a to b = 0
Work done in moving a charge q from c to d = 0
This is because the electric field is perpendicular to the displacement.
Now, work done from b to c = – work done from d to a
Therefore, total work done in moving a charge q over a closed loop = 0.
OR
Surface
charge density I
1
+ +
E
d
2
Surface
charge density-
In the region between the plates the net electric field is equal to the sum of the
electric fields due to the two charged plates. Thus, the net electric field is
given by
  
E =  
2 0 2 0  0
The electric field is constant in the region between the plates. Therefore, the
potential difference between the plates will be
d
V =
0
Sample Papers 193

Now, capacitance,
Q 0  A
C = = 0
d d
Q
Surface charge density  = , where A is the area of cross-section of the
V
plates.
(b) When two charged spherical conductors are connected by a conducting wire,
they acquire the same potential.
kq1 kq
= 1
R1 d
q1 q2 q1 R1
Or   
R1 R2 q2 R2
Hence, the ratio of surface charge densities
1 q1 / 4R12 q1R 2 2
= 
2 q2 / 4R 2 2 q2 R12
R1 R 2 2 R2
= R  2  R
2 R1 1
21. (a) The line integral of magnetic field (B) around any closed path in vacuum is u
0 times the net current (I) threading the area enclosed by the curve.
(b) Magnetic field, B = 0nl
(i) Magnitude of net magnetic field inside the combined system on the axis,
B = B1 – B2
= 0n1 I – 0n2 I
= 0 (n1 – n2) I
(ii) Outside the combined system, net magnetic field is zero.
22. (a) Microwaves
Frequency range : 1010 Hz to 1012 Hz
(b) Average surface temperature will be lower. This is because there will be no
green house effect in absence of atmosphere.

(c) An electromagnetic wave exerts pressure on the surface on which it is incident
because these waves carry both energy and momentum.
23. (a) Radioactive decay Law: The rate of decay of radioactive nuclei is directly
proportional to the number of undecayed nuclei at that time.
Derivation of Formula
Suppose initially the number of atoms in radioactive element is No and N
the number of atoms after time t.
After time t, let dN be the number of atoms which disintegrate in a short interval
dN
dt, then rate of disintegration will be , this is also called the activity of the
dt
substance/element.
According to Rutherford-Soddy law
dN
, N
dt
dN
or , = –N ...(i)
dt
where  is a constant, called decay constant or disintegration constant of the
element. Its unit is s–1. Negative sign shows that the rate of disintegration decreases
with increase of time. For a given element/substance  is a constant and is different
for different elements. Equation (i) may be rewritten as
dN
= –dt
N
Integrating loge, N = – t + C ...(ii)
where C is a constant of integration.
At t = 0, N = N0
 loge N0 = 0 + C ** C = loge N0
 Equation (ii) gives loge N = – t + loge N0
or loge N – loge N0 = – t
Sample Papers 195

N0
No. of undecayed nuclei

N
O
t t+ t Time t
According to this equation, the number of undecayed atoms/nuclei of a given

radioactive element decreases exponentially with time (i.e., more rapidly at first
and slowly afterwards).
N0
M ark of N = in terms of T1/2 is shown in fig.
16
22 22
(b) (i) Na  Ne + e+ + v
11 10
Basic nuclear process:
P  n + e+ + v
(ii) Isobar
24. (a) (i) The light waves, originating from two independent monochromatic sources,
will not have a constant phase difference. Therefore, these sources will not be
coherent and therefore would not produce a sustained interference pattern.
(ii) The resultant displacement will be given by
y = y1 + y2
= a cos t + a cos(t + )
= a [cos t + a cos(t + )]
= 2a cos( / 12) cos(t + 12)
The amplitude of the resultant displacement is 2a cos( / 12)
The intensity of light is directly proportional to the square of amplitude of the
wave. The resultant, intensity will be given by
I
I = 4a2 or a2 =
4
(b) A path difference of A, corresponds to a phase difference of 2

I
 Intensity, I = 4a2 or a2 =
4
 2
A path difference of . corresponds to a phase difference of .
3 3
I 2 2
 Intensity = 4  .cos
4 3
OR
(a) A polaroid consists of long chain molecules aligned in a particular direction.
The electric vectors along the direction of the aligned molecules get absorbed.
So, when an unpolarised light falls on a polaroid, it lets only those of its
electric vectors that are oscillating along a direction perpendicular to its aligned
molecules to pass through it. The incident light thus gets linearly polarised.
Unpolarised light polaroid Plane polarised light

Whenever unpolarised light is incident on the boundary between two
transparent media, the reflected light gets partially or completely polarised.
When reflected light is perpendicular to the refracted light, the reflected light
is a completely polarised light.
(b) Condition : The reflected ray is totally plane polarised, when reflected and
refracted rays are perpendicular to each other.
BOC = 90°
Sample Papers 197

If ip is angle of incidence, r’ is angle of reflection and r the angle of refraction,
then according to law of reflection
ip = r’
and form fig, r’ + 90° + r = 180°
 ip + r = 90° ...(i)
 r = (90° – ip) ...(ii)
From Snell’s law, refractive index of second medium realstive to first medium
(air) say.
sin i p sin i p sin i p

n = sin r  sin(90 – i )  cos i
p p
 n = tan ip
 Aagle of incidence, ip = tan–1 (n).
25. (a) When the North pole of a bar magnet moves towards the closed coil, the
magnetic flux through the coil increases. This produces an induced emf which
produces (or tend to produce if the coil is open) an induced current in the
anti-clockwise sense. The anti-clockwise sense corresponds to the

generation of North pole which opposes the motion of the approaching N pole
of the magnet. The face of the coil, facing the approaching magnet, then has
the same polarity as that of the approaching pole of the magnet. The induced
current, therefore, is seen to oppose the change of magnetic flux that produces
it. When a North pole of a magnet is moved away from the coil, the current (I)
flows in the clock-wise sense which corresponds to the generation of South
pole. The induced South pole opposes the motion of the receding North’pole.
(b) (i) Magnetic flux versus the current
Magnetic Flux
Current
(ii) Induced emf versus dllcli
dI dI
dt dt
Induced Induced
emf or emf
When current is increasing

at constant rate
Sample Papers 199

OR
(a) Working: When the armature coil
is rotated in the strong magnetic
field, the magnetic flux linked
with the coil changes and the
current is induced in the coil, its
direction being given by
Fleming’s right hand rule.
Considering the armature to be
in vertical position and as it
rotates in anticlockwise
direction, the wire ab moves
upward and cd downward, so
that the direction of induced
current is shown in fig. In the
external circuit, the current flows along B1RLB2. The direction of current
remains unchanged during the first half turn of armature. During the second
half revolution, the wire ab moves downward and cd upward, so the direction
of current is reversed and in external circuit it flows along B2RLB1. Thus the
direction of induced emf and current changes in the external circuit after each
half revolution.
Expression for Induced emf: If N is the number of turnskin coil, f the
frequency of rotation, A area of coil and B the magnetic induction, then induced
emf
d d
e =–  {NBA (cos 2 f t)}
dt dt
= 2 NBA f sin 2f t
Obviously, the emf produced is alternating and hence the current is also
alternating.
Current produced by an ac generator cannot be measured by moving coil
ammeter; because the average value of ac over full cycle is zero.
The source of energy generation is the mechanical energy of rotation of
armature coil.

(i) Plot of variation of magnetic flux with time,
(ii) Plot of variation of alternating emf with time.

e = NAB sin m ea = sin t
(b) Choke coil reduces the voltage across the fluorescent tube without wastage of
power.
26. (a)
Electron drift Electron diffusion
p n
Depletion
Hole diffusion Hole drift
Sample Papers 201

Two processes occur during the formation of a p-n junction are diffusion and
drift. Due to the concentration gradient across p and n-sides of the junction,
holes diffuse from p-side to n-side (p  n) and electrons diffuse from n-side to
p-side (n  p). This movement of charge carriers leaves behind ionised
acceptors (negative charge  - immobile) on the p-side and donors (positive
charge immobile) on the n-side of the junction. This space charge region on
either side of the junction together is known as depletion region.
(b) The circuit arrangement for studying the V–l characteristics of a diode are shown
in Fig. (a) and (b). For different values of voltages the value of current is
noted. A graph between V and is obtained as in Figure (c).
From the V-l characteristic of a junction diode it is clear that it allows current to
pass only when it is forward biased. So if an alternating voltage is applied
across a diode the current flows only in that part of the cycle when the diode is
forward biased. This property is used to rectify alternating voltages.
SET-II (Questions Uncommon to Set-I)

1. The reciprocal of the resistivity of a material is called its conductivity and is denoted
by  .

1
Conductivity =
Resistivity
The Si unit of conductivity is ohm–1 m–1 or S m–1.
Am 2
2. Modulation index =  = 0.4
Ac 5
T
Resistivity of Si decreases with increasing temperatures.
10. Torque,  = pE sin 
3
8 3 = pE ×
2
pE = 16
1
Potentioa energy, u = – pE cos  = –16   –8 J
2
h h
15. (i) de Broglie wavelength  = p
2mqV
h
For same V,  
mq
p m q 4m p 2e
   m q  m . e  8  2 2
p p p
Clearly, p > . Hence, proton has a greater de-Broglie wavelength.

(ii) Kinetic energy, K = qV
For same V, K  q
Kp qp e 1
  
K q 2e 2
Clearly, p > .
Hence, proton has less kinetic energy.
Sample Papers 203

 
16. Here, E = 2 × 103 i N/C
i.e., field is along positive direction of x-axis.
Surface area, A = 20 cm × 20 cm
= 0.20 m × 0.20 m = 4 × 10–2 m
(i) When plane parallel to y – z plane, the normal to plane is along x-axis.
Hence  = 0°.
 = EA cos q
= 2 × 103 × 4 × 10–2 cos  = 80NC–1 m2
(ii) When the plane makes a 30° angle with the x-axis, the normal to its plane
makes 60° angle with x-axis.
Hence,  = 60°
 = EA cos 
= 2 × 103 × 4 × 10–2 cos 60° = 40 NC–1 m2.
13.6
20. Energy of an electron, En = 2 eV
n
13.6
For n = 1, E1 = 2 = –13.6eV
I
13.6
For n = 2, E2 = 2 = –3.4eV
2
13.6
For n = 3, E3 = 2 = –1.51eV
3
13.6
For n = 4, E4 = 2 = –0.85eV
4
Energy required to excite hydrogen atoms from ground state to excited state = Ef – Ei
= –0.85 – (–13.6) = 12.75 eV
Thus, hydrogen atom would be excited upto level n – 4.
For Paschen series
1  1 1 
= R 2 – 2 
 n f n i 
1 1 1
–
= 1.097 × 107  32 42 

1 1 1 
= 1.097 × 107  – 
  9 16 
1 7
= 1.097 × 107 ×
 144
36
 =  6.56  10 –7 m = 656 nm
5.485  107
For Balmar Series
1 1 1
= R 2 – 2 
 2 3 
1 1 1

= 1.097 × 107 ×  4 – 9 
1 5
= 1.097 × 107 ×
 36
36
 =  6.56  10 – 7m = 656 nm
5.485  107
(a) X rays of  rays
Range: 1018 Hz to 1022 Hz.
(b) Ozone layer absorbs the ultraviolet radiations from the sun and prevents it from
reaching the earth’s surface,
(c) Momentum transferred, u
u
p =
c
Where u = energy transferred
c = speed of light
Due to the large value of speed of light (c), the amount of momentum transferred
by the em waves incident on the surface is small.
V
24. Current I =
R1  R2
5
=  0.05A
15  5
V = IR= 0.25 × 15 = 3.75 V
Potential gradient,
V 3.75
k = =  3.75 V/m
t 1.0
 Unknown emf of the cell = KI
= 3.75 × 0.6 = 2.25 V.
Sample Papers 205

SET–111 (Questions Uncommon to Set-1 and II)
1. Drift velocity is defined as the average velocity acquired by the free electrons in a
conductor under the influence of an electric field applied across the conductor. It
is denoted by vd.
Am
2. Modulation index =
Ac
1.5
=  0.5
3.0
4. There is more than one value of V for the same current 1. A material exhibiting
such behaviour is GaAs.
Non-Linear Negative
Current/(mA)
region resistance
region
9. Torpue,  = pE sin q
6 3 = pE sin 60°
3
6 3 = pE ×
2
pE = 12
Potential energy, U = –pE cos q
= –12 cos 60°
1
= –12 × =–6J
2
12. (a) de Broglie wavelength

h h
 = p
2mqV
1
For same V, l = 
mq
d mq 2md  2qd 2

   
 md qd md qd 1
 > K
(b) Kinetic energy, K = qV
So, q > Kd
For same V, we have K > Kd
20. The energy of electron in the nth orbit of hydrogen atom is
13.6
En = – eV
n2
when the incident beam of energy 12.3 eV is absorbed by hydrogen atom. Let the
electron jump from n = 1 to n = n level.
E = En – E 1
13.6  13.6 
12.3 = – –– 
n 2  12 
 1
 12.3 = 13.6 1– 2 
 n 
12.3 1
 = 1– 2
13.6 n
1
 0.9 = 1 –
n2
 n 2 = 10  n =3
That is the hydrogen aton would be excited upto second excited state.
Sample Papers 207

For Lyman Series
1  1 1 
= R  2 – 2
  n f ni 
1 1 1 
–
 = 1.097 × 107 1 9 

1 8
 = 1.097 × 107 ×
 9
9
  =  1.025  10 –7  102.5nm
8  1.097  10 7
For Balmer Series
1 1 1 
= 1.097 × 107  – 
  4 16 
1 3
 = 1.097 × 107 ×
 16
 l = 4.86 × 10–7 m  l = 486 nm
24. (a) em waves : -rays (gamma rays)
Range : 1019 Hz to 1023 Hz
(b) This is because the special glass goggles protect the eyes from large amount
of UV radiations produced by welding arcs.
(c) Infrared waves are called heat waves because water molecules present in the
materials readily absorb the infra red rays get heated up.
Application: They are used in green bouses to warm the plants.
25. Current flowing in the potentiometer
V
I =
R1  R2
8 8
= A= A = 0.4 A
5  15 20

V = IR
= 0.4 × 5 = 2 V
Potential gradient
V
K =
t
2
=  2 Vm –1
1
 Unknown emf of the cell = kl’
= 2 × 0.6 V = 1.2 V
Sample Papers 209

CBSE Examination Paper,
Delhi Region-2015 (code no. 55/1/1/D)
Time allowed : 3 hours Maxmum marks : 70
(i) All questions are compulsory. There are 26 questions in all.

(ii) This question paper has five sections : Section A, Section B, Section, C, Section D
and Section E.
(iii) Section A contains five questions of one mark each, Section B contains five questions
of two marks questions of four marks and Section E contains choice has been
provided in one question of two marks, one question of three marks and all the
three questions of five marks weightage. You have to attempt only one of the
choices in such questions.
(iv) Use log tables, if necessary. Use of calculators is not allowed.
c = 3 × 108 m/s h = 6.63 × 10–34 Js
e = 1.6 × 10 –19
C 0 = 4 × 10–7 T m A–1
1
0 = 8.854 × 10–12 C2N–1 m–2 = 9 × 109 N m2 C–2
4 0
me = 9.1 × 10–31 kg Mas of neutron = 1.675 × 10–27 kg
Mass of proton = 1.673 × 10–27 kgAvogadro’s number = 6.023 × 1023 per garn
mole
Boltzmann constant = 1.38 × 10–23 LK–1
SECTION-A
1. Define capacitor reactance. Write its S.I. units.?
2. What is the electric flux through a cube of side 1 cm which encloses an electric
dipole?
3. A concave lens of refractive index 1.5 is immersed in a medium of refractive
index 1.65. What is the nature of the lens?

4. Graph showing the variation of current versus voltage for a material GaAs is shown
the figure. Identify the region of
(i) negative resistance C D
Current I
(ii) where Ohm’s law is obeyed.
E
B
A
SECTION-B
5. A proton and an a-particle have the same de-Broglie wavelength. Determine the
ratio of (i) their accelerating potentials (ii) their speeds.
6. Show that the radius of the orbit in hydrogen atom varies as n2, where n is the
principal quantum number of the atom.
7. Use the mirror equation to Show that an object placed between f and 2f of a
concave mirror pro image beyond 2f.
OR
Find an expression for intensity of transmitted light when a polaroid sheet is
rotated between I polaroids. In which position of the polaroid sheet will the
transmitted intensity be maximum?
8. Use Kirchhoff s rules to obtain conditions for the balance condition in a Wheatstone
bridge.
SECTION-C
9. Name the parts of the electromagnetic spectrum which is
(a) suitable for radar systems used in aircraft navigation.
(b) used to treat muscular strain.
(c) used as a diagnostic tool in medicine.
Write in brief, how these waves can be produced.
10. (i) A giant refracting telescope has an objective lens of focal length 15 m. If an
eye piece of f 1.0 cm is used, what is the angular magnification of the telescope?
(ii) If this telescope is used to view the moon, what is the diameter of the image
of the moon for objective lens? The diameter of the moon is 3.48 × 106 m
and the radius of lunar orbit is 3.8.
Sample Papers 211
11. Write Einstein’s photoelectric equation and mention which important features in
photoelectric el explained with the help of .this equation. The maximum kinetic
energy of the photoelectrons gets doubled when the wavelength of light the surface
changes from 1 to 2. Derive the expressions for the threshold wavelength 0 and
wo for the metal surface.
12. In the study of Geiger-Marsdon experiment on scattering of a-particles by a thin
foil of ... trajectory of -particles in the coulomb field of target nucleus. Explain
briefly how one gets the … on the size of the nucleus from this study.
From the relation R = R0 A1/3, where R0 is constant and A is the mass number of
the nucleus, nuclear matter density is independent of A.
OR
Distinguish between nuclear fission and fusion. Show how in both these
processes energy is …… Calculate the energy release in MeV in the deuterium-
tritium fusion reaction:
2 3 3
H + H 
 He + n
1 1 1
Using the data.
2  3 
m  1 H  2.014102 u m  H  3.016049 u
  1 
3 
m  He  4.002603 u mn = 1.008665 u
1 
1u = 931.5 Me V/c2
13. A cell of emf ‘E’ and internal resistance ‘r’ is connected across a variable load
resistor R. Draw the terminal voltage V versus (i) R and (ii) the current l.
It is found that when R = 4, the current is 1 A and when R is increased to 9,
the current reduct Find the values of the emf E and internal resistance r.
14. Two capacitors of unknown capacitances C1 and C2 are connected first in series
and then in parall battery of 100 V. If the energy stored in the two combinations
is 0.045 J and 0.25 J respectively, the value of C1 and C2. Also calculate the
charge on each capacitor in parallel combination.
15. State the principle of working of a galvanometer.
A galvanometer of resistance G is converted into a voltmeter to measure upto V
volts by connecting resistance R1 in series with the coil. If a resistance R2 is

connected in series with it, then it can measure V/2 volts. Find the resistance, in
terms of R1 and R2, required to be connected to convert it into a volt meter that
can read upto 2 V. Also find the resistance G of the galvanometer in terms of R1
and R2.
16. With what considerations in view, a photodiode is fabricated? State its working
with the help of a suitable diagram.
Even though the current in the forward bias is known to the more than in the
reverse bias. yet the photodiode ^works in reverse bias What is the reason?
17. Answer the following questions:
(a) In a double slit experiment using light of wavelength 600 nm. the angular
width ot the fringe formed on a distant screen is 0.1°. Find the spacing
between the two slits.
(b) Light of wavelength 5000 A propagating in air gets partly reflected from
the surface of water. How will the wavelengths and frequencies of the
reflected and refracted light be affected?
18. An inductor L of inductance XL is connected in series with a bulb B and an ac
source.
How would brightness of the bulb change when (i) number of turn in the inductor
is reduced. (ii) an iron rod is inserted in the inductor and (iii) a capacitor of reactance
XC = XL is inserted in series in the circuit Justify your answer in each case
SECTION-E
19. (a) State Ampere”s circuital law. Use this law to obtain the expression for the
magnetic field inside an air cored toroid of average radius ‘r’,. having ‘n’
turns per unit length and carrying a steady current I.
(b) An observer to the left of a solenoid of N turns each of cross section area ‘A’
observes that a steady current I in it flows in the clockwise direction Depict
the magnetic field lines due to the solenoid specifying its polarity and show
mat it acts as a bar magnet of magnetic moment m = NIA
A
N
OR
Sample Papers 213

(a) Define mutual inductance and write its S.I. units.
(b) Derive an expression for the mutual inductance of two long co-axial solenoids
of same length wound one over the other.
(c) In an experiment, two coils c1 and c2 are placed close to each other. Find out,
the oxpression for the emt induced in the coil c1 due to a change in the current
through the coil c2.
20. (a) Using Huygens’s construction oi secondary wavelets explain how a diffraction
pattern is obtained on a screen due to a narrow slit on which a monochromatic
beam of light is incident normally.
(b) Show that the angular width of the first diffraction fringe is half that of the
central fringe.
 1 
(c) Explain why the maxima at  =  n   become weaker and weaker
2 a
with increasing n.
OR
(a) A point object ‘O’ is kept in a medium of refractive index n1 in front of a
convex spherical surface of radius of curvature R which separates the second
medium of refractive index n2 from the front as shown in the figure.
Draw the ray diagram showing the image formation and deduce the
relationship between the object distance and the image distance in terms of n1,
n2 and R.
n1 n2
O u R
(b) When the image formed above acts as a virtual object for a concave spherical
surface seperating medium n2 from n1 (n2 > n1), draw this ray diagram and
write the similar (similar to (a)) formula and obtain the expression for the lens
maker’s formula.

21. (a) An electric dipole of dipole moment p consists of point charges +q and
–q separated by a distance 2a apart. Deduce the expression for the electric

field E due to the dipole at a distance x from the center of dipole on its axial line


in terms of the dipole moment p . Hence show that in the limit a  0

 2p
E .
(4 0 x 3 )

(b) Given the electric field in the region E = 2xi, find the net electric flux through
the cube and enclosed by it.
y
a
z
OR
(a) Explain, using suitable diagrams, the difference in the behaviour of a (i)
conductor and (ii) dielectric the presence of external electric field. Define
the term polarization of a dielectric and write its expression with susceptibility.
(b) A thin metallic spherical shell of radius
R carries a charge Q on its surface. A
Q
point charge is placed at its centre C Q
2
and an other charge +2Q is placed outside
the shell at a distance x from the centre x
Q/2 2Q
as shown in the figure. Find (i) the force
on the charge at the centre of shell and
at the point A, (ii) the electric flux
through the shell.
Sample Papers 215

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n
s
SECTION–A
1. The imaginary/virtual resistance offered by a capacitor to the flow of an alternating
1
current is called capacitor reactance, XC = . Its SI unit is ohm.
C
2. Net electric flux is zero.
Reason : (i) Independent to the shape and size.
(ii) Net charge of the electric dipole is zero.
3. Concave lens, in medium of high refractive index, behaves as a convex lens (or a
converging lens).
1  g   1 1 
Reason : = –1  – – 
fm   m   R R 
1
Since m > mg    ve value
fm
So, fm > 0. Hence acts a convex lens.

4. Side bands (Lower side band and upper side band) are produced due to
superposition of low frequency modulating signals on high frequency carrier
waves.
Reason: The frequency of lower side band is c – m and of upper side band
is c – m.
V
5. (i) In region DE, material offers negative resistance, because slop < 0.
I
(ii) The region BC approximately passes through the origin, (or current also
increases with the increase of voltage). Hence, it follows Ohm’s law and
V
in this region > 0.
I

SECTION—B
h h
6. de Broglie wavelength  = p 
2mqV
Where, m = mass of charge particle, q = charge of particle, V = potential difference
h2
(i) 2 =
2mqV
h2
V =
2mq 2
Vp 2m q 2  4m2q 8
   
V 2m p q p 2mq 1
 Vp : V = 8 : 1
h h h
(ii)  = , p  ,  
mu m pu p mV
p = 
h h
=
m pu p m u
up m 4
=   4 :1
u mp 1
7. Hydrogen atom
Let r be the radius of the orbit of a hydrogen atom. Forces acting on electron are
centrifugal force and electrostatic attraction (Fe)
At equilibrium. Fc = Fe
mv 2 1 e2
=
r 4r  0 r 2
Sample Papers 217

According to Bohr’s postulate
nh nh
mvr =  u=
2 2mr
2
 nh  1 1 e2 mn 2 h 2 1 e2
m . =  =
 2mr  r 4 0 r 2 4 2 m 2 r 2 r 4 0 r 2
m2h20
r=   r  n2
me 2
1 1 1
8. Mirror formula,  
v u f
2f < u f object between f and 2f
1 1 1 –1 –1 –1
     
2f u f 2f u f
1 1 1 1  1 1 1
–  – 0  f – u  v
f 2f f u  
1 1 1 1 1
–   0.   0
f 2f v 2f v
Also u < 0  image is real.

u > 2f, image of formed beyond 2f.
OR
Let P1 and P2 be the crossed polaroids, and no light transmitted through polaroid
P 2.
Let I0 be the intensity of the polarised light through polaroid P1.
If another polaroid P3 is inserted between P1 and P2 and polaroid P3, is at an
angle  with the poloroid.
Then intensity of light through polaroid P3 is
I3 = I0 cos2 
If this light I3 again passes through the polaroid P2 then

I 2 = I3 cos2 (90 – )
From equation (1) and (2), we get
I 2 = I0 cos2  (90 – )
I0
= (2sin θ cos ) 2
4
I0 2
= sin (20)
4
For maximum value of I2.

Sin 20 = ± 1
 2 = 90°
 = 45°
It is possible only when polaroid P3 is placed at angle 45° from each polaroid P1 (or
P2).
9. Condition of balance of a Wheatstone bridge: The
circuit diagram of Wheatstone bridge is shown in
fig. P, Q, R and 5 are four resistance forming a
closed bridge, called Wheatstone bridge. A battery
is connected across A and C, while a
galvanometer is connected between B and D. At
balance, there is no current in galvanometer.
Derivation of Formula: Lei the current given by
battery in the balanced position be I. This current
on reaching point A is divided into two parts I1
and I2. As there is no current in galvanometer in
balanced state, current in resistances P and Q is
I2 and in resistances R and S it is I1.
Applying Kirchhoff s I law at point A
I – I1 – I2 = 0 or I = I1 + I2 ...(i)
Applying Kirchhoff’s II law to closed mesh ABDA
– I2P + I2R = 0 or I1P = I2 R ...(ii)
Sample Papers 219

Applying Kirchhoff’s II law to mesh BCDB
–I1P + I2R = 0 or I1Q = I2S ...(iii)
Dividing equation (ii) by (iii), we get
I1P I 2 R P R
 or  ...(iv)
I1Q I 2 S Q S
This is tne condition of balance of Wheatstone bridge.
SECTION–C
10. (a) Microwave, (b) Infrared, (c) X-rays
Microwave are produced by special vacuum tubes, like klystorms, magnetrons and
gunn diodes.
Infrared are produced by the vibrating molecules and atoms in hot bodies.
X-rays are produced by the bombardment of high energy electrons on a metal
target of high atomic weight (like tungston).
11. (i) Given f0 = 15 m, fe = 1.0 cm = 1.0 × 10–2 m
Angular magnification of telescope.
f0
m =
fe
15
=  –1500
1.0  10 –2
Negative sign shows that the final image is inverted.

(ii) Let D be diameter of moon, d diameter of image of moon formed by objective
and r the distance of moon from objective lens, then from Fig.
D d
=
r f0
D 3.48  106
 d = . f0   15m  0.137cm  13.7
r 3.8  108
12. Elnstein’s photoelectric equation:
Where v = incident frequency; v0 = threshold frequency, V0 = stopping potential
(i) Incident energy of photon is used in to (a) to liberate electron from the metal
surface (b) rest of the energy appears as maximum energy electron.
(ii) Only one electron can absorb energy of one photon. Hence increasing intensity
increases the numbers of electrons hence current.
(iii) If incident energy is less than work function, no emission of electron will take
place.
(iv) Increasing v (incident frequency) will increase maximum kinetic energy of
electrons but number of electrons emitted will remain same.
For wavelength
hc
= 0 + K
1
= 0 + ev0 ...(i) where K = ev0
Form wavelength 2
hc
= 0 + 2ev0 ...(ii) (because KE is doubled)
1
Form equartion (i) and (ii), we get
hc  hc 
= f0 + 2   –  0 
2 1
2hc
= 0 + – 2 0
1
Sample Papers 221

2hc hc
 0 = –
1  2
For thershold wavelength 0, kinetic energy, K = 0
hc
and work function 0 =
0
hc 2hc hc
 = –
0 1  0
1 2 1
 = –
0 1  2
1 2
  0 = 2 – 
2 1
hc(2 2 – 1 )
Work function, 0 =
1 2
13.
(i) For large impact parameter, almost all
alpha particles go nearly undeviated
and have small deflection. This shows
that the mass of the atom is
concentrated in a small volume in the
form of nucleus and gives an idea of
size of nucleus.
(ii) An alpha particle having small impact parameter suffers large scattering and in
case of head-on-collision, the alpha particle rebounds back.
The radius (size) R of nucleus is related to its mass number (A) as
R =R0A1/3
If m is the average mass of a nucleon, then mass of nucleus = mA, where A is
mass number
4 3 4 4
Volume of nucleus = R   ( R0 A1/ 3 )  R 30 A
3 3 3
mass mA m 3m
  
Density of nucleus N = volume 4 4 3 4R 30
R 30 A R0
3 3
Clearly nuclear density N is independent of mass number A.
OR
Nuclear fission Nuclear fustion
(i) Heavy nucleus splits into two (i) Tow lighter nuclei combine to form
smaller nuclei. a heavy nucleus.
(ii) It takes place at ordinary (ii) It requires extremely high

temperature. temperature of the order of 107 K.
In both the process, mass of nucleus participating in the reaction is greater than
mass of the product nuclei. This difference in mass (m) is converted into energy
and released.
Mass defect = m
Energy released = m × 931 MeV
2 3 4
H + H 
 He + n
1 1 3
m = (+2.014102 + 3.016049 – 4.002603 – 1.008665) u
= 0.018883 u
Energy released = m × 931.5 MeV = 0.018883 × 931 MeV
= 17.59 MeV
14.
Sample Papers 223

R1 = 4 R2 = 9
I 1 = I A, I 2 = 0.5 A
E = IR + It I 2 = 0.5 A
E = I(R + r)
Substituting the values
E = I (4 + r)
E = (9 + r)
4 + r = (9 + r)  8r + 2r = 9 + r
r = 1
Substituting in (i), E = 1(4 + 1) = 5V  r = 1 E = 5V
1
15. Energy stored in a capacitor, E = CV 2
2
1
In parallel, 0.25 = (C1  C2 )(100) 2
2
1  C1C2 
In series, 0.045 = (100) 2
2  C1  C2 
From (i) C1 + C2 = 0.25 × 2 × 10–4

C1 + C2 = 5 × 10–5
C1C2
From (ii) = 0.045 × 2 × 10–4
C1  C2
C1C2
= 0.09 × 10–4 = 9 × 10–6
C1  C2
2  0.045  5  10 –5
Form (iii) C1C 2 = 4
 4.5  10 –10
10
C1 – C2 = (C1  C2 ) 2 – 4C1C2
C1 – C2 = 2.64 × 10–5

Solving (ii) and (iv) C1 = 38.2 F
C2 = 11.8 F
In parallel Q1 = C1 V = 38.2 × 10–6 × 100 = 38.2 × 10–4C
Q2 = C2 V = 11.8 × 10–6 × 100 = 11.2 × 10–4C
16. When current flows through a coil kept in uniform radial magnetic field, it
experiences a torque which tends to rotate the coil and produces an angular
deflection. The deflection of the coil is directly proportional to the current.
NAB
Q = ,I
K
Let Ig be the current through galvanometer at full deflection
To measure V volts, V = Ig (G + R1) ...(i)
V V
volts, = Ig (G + R2) ...(ii)
2 2
2 V volts, 2 V = Ig (G + R3) ...(iii)
To measure for conversion of range dividing (i) by (ii),
G  R1
2 =
G  R2
G = R1 – 2R2
Putting the value of G in (i), we have
V
Ig =
R1 – 2 R2  R1
V
Ig =
2 R2 – 2 R2
Substituting the value of G and Ig in equation (iii), we have
V
2V = ( R1 – 2 R2  R2 )
2 R1 – 2 R2
4R1 – 4R2 = R1 – 2R2 + R)
R3 = 2R1 – 2R2
Sample Papers 225

17. A photodiode (for special purpose) is fabricated with a transparent window to allow
light to fall on the junction of the diode.
When the junction of photodiode is reverse bias it is illuminated with light of energy
hv > Eg of the semiconductor, the electron-hole pairs are generated due to absorption
of photon.
Due to electric field of the function, electron are
collected in n side and holes are collected on p-side
and produces an emf. When an external load is
connected, an electric current flows in the external
circuit. The magnitude of the electric current depends
on the intensity of incident light.
Reason of Reverse Biasing :
If there is no illumination, majority electrons are more than minority holes in n
region of the diode. On illumination the junction, some electrons-hole pairs are
generated. Let the excess electrons and holes generated are Dn and Dp respectively
So. at a particular illumination,
n = n + n
and p = p + p
Since, n = p and n > p
n P
Hence, = 
n P
It means the minority carriers dominated reverse bias current is more easily
measurable, than change in the forward bias current. Hence, photodiodes are
preferably used in the reverse bias light intensity.
 
21. (a)  = 600 nm, 0 = 0.1° = 0.1 × 
180 180
d =?
Angular width of fringes

0 = , where d = separation between two slits
d
600  10 –9  1800
  =

= 3.43 × 10–4 m = 0.34 m
(b)  = 5000 A = 5000 × 10–10 m = 5 × 10–7 m
Reflected ray : No change in wavelength and frequency.
Refracted ray : Frequency remains same, wavelength decreases

Wavelength  = 
22. Brightness of the bulb depends on square of the Ims (i.e., I2rms)
Impedance of the circuit, Z = R 2  ( L ) 2
V
And Current in circuit, I =
Z
(i) XL = L, If number of turns in the inductor, coil is reduced, then impedance
of the combination will decrease. It results in increase in current. Hence,
brightness of the bulb increases.
(ii) When iron (being a ferromagnetic substance) rod is inserted in the coil, its
inductance increases appears across the inductor, leaving less voltage across
the bulb. Hence, brightness of the bulb decreases.
(iii) On inserting a capacitor, the impedance of the circuit becomes
Z = R 2  ( X L – X C )2 , i.e., Z < Z
(a) If XL = XC then Z = R. It results in increase in current resulting in increase
in brightness of the bulb.
Sample Papers 227

SECTION–E
(a) Ampere’s circuital law: The line integral of magnetic field around any
closed path in vacuum/air is equal 0 times the total current enclosed by
that path. I
  dl
 = B.dl = 0 I
Consider an air cored toroid of average radius ‘r’

having ‘n’ turns per unit length and carrying a steady
current I.
Consider an ampere loop of radius r as shown. Apply Ampere’s circital

law.
 
 B.dl = 0 2r n I
Where 2r . n is the number of times the current is threading.

B . 2r = 0 2r n I

B = m0 nI
For observer, current is flowing in clockwise direction hence we will see

magnetic field lines towards south pole.
The solenoid can be regarded as a combination of circular loops placed side
by side, each behaving like a magnet of magnetic moment IA, where / is the
current and A area of the loop. These magnets neutralise each other except at
the ends where south and north poles appear. Magnetic moment of bar magnet
= NIA
OR
(a) When current flowing in one of two nearby coils is changed, the magnetic
linked with the coil changes; due to which an emf is induced in it (other

coil). This phenomenon of electromagnetic induction is called mutual
induction. The coil, in which current is changed is called the the coil in
which current is changed is called the primary coil and the coil in which
emf is induced is called the secondary coil.
The SI unit of mutual inductance is henry.
(b) Suppose there are two coils C1 and C2. The current I1 is flowing in primary
coil C1 due to which effective magnetic flux 2 is linked with secondary
coil C2. By experiments
2  1 or 2 = MI1
where M is a constant, and is called the coefficient of mutual induction or
mutual inductance From (i)
2
M =
I1
If I1 = 1 ampere, M = 2
i.e., the mutual inductance between two coils is numerically equal to
the effective flux linkage with secondary coil, when current flowing in
primary coil is 1 ampere.
Mutual Inductance of Two Co-axial Solenoids:
Consider two long co-axial solenoid each of length l with number of turns
N1 and N2 wound one on other. Number of turns per unit length in outer
(primary) solenoid, n = If I1 is the current in primary solenoid, the magnetic
field produced within this solenoid.
 0 N1I1
B1 = ...(i)
l
The flux linked with each turn of inner solenoid coil is 2 = B1A2, where A2
is the cross-sectional area inner solenoid. The total flux linkage with inner
coil of N2-turns.
 N N   NN
2 = N22 = N2B1A2 = N2  1 1 2  A2  0 1 2 A2 I1
 l  t
 2  0 N1 N 2 A2
By definition Mutual Inductance, M21 = 
I1 l
If n1 is number of turns per unit length of outer solenoid and r2 is radius of
inner solenoid then M21 = 0 n1 N2 r22.
Sample Papers 229

(c) When the current in coil C2 changes, the flux
linked with C1 changes. This change in flux
linked with C1 induces emf in C1.
Flux linked with C1 = flux of C2
25. (a) When a plane wavefront from a distance
source illuminates a slit, each point within the
slit becomes a source of secondary spherical
wavelets. These spherical wavelets go on
increasing in size, and superpose on each
other, in the region between slit and screen.
(i) If all path differences are zero, then all
the parts of the slit contribute in phase.
This gives maximum intensity at point P.
(ii) If all path differences are non-zero,
these secondary wavelets may either superpose in phase or out of
phase, resulting in either occurrence of intensity of light or in zero
occurrence.
These variation in the light intensity on the screen is termed as diffraction
of light.
(b) The angular width of central maxima is the angular separation between
the first minima on the two sides of the central maximum.
Position of first minima sin  = n

  
d
2
Similarly 2 = 
d
Angular width of first diffraction fringe

 =
d
Angular width of central maxima
 –
to
d d

2
 =
d
Hence angular width of the first diffraction fringe is half of the central
fringe.
(c) The path difference between the extreme rays can be given as
BC = BP1 – AP1 = a sin 
where ‘a’ is the size of the slit.
If the slit is divided into three equal parts, first two-third of the slit which

have a path difference of will contribute no intensity at the point.
2
However, the remaining one-third of the slit contributes to the intensity at
the point between two minima. Hence, the intensity of light will be much
weaker than the central maxima.
 1
So, path difference a sin  =  n   
2
where n = 2, 3, 4, etc.
Since waelenth of light  is in the range 700 nm to 400 nm.
 1
So, a,  =  n   
2
 1 
  =  n  
2 a
OR
(a)
Sample Papers 231

(i) all angles are small hence, sin   tan 
(ii) Curature of the surface is small hence PN is negligible.
Consider OMC and MCI
i =+ ...(i)
 =r+ ...(ii)
Using Snell’s law n1 sin i = n2 sin r
n1 sin i = n2 r
n1 ( + ) = n2 ( – )
n1 (tan  + tan ) = n2 (tan  – tan )
 MN MN   MN MN 
n1    n2  –
 NO NC  =  NC NI 
NO = PO = – u
NC = PC = + R
NI = PI = + v
 1 1  1 1
n1    = n2  – 
 –n R  R v
n2 n1 n –n
– = 2 1
v u R
(b)

(a)
Conductor Dielecrtric
1. No electric field lines inside 1. Alignment of atoms takes place

conductor. due to electric finld.
2. Electric field insides conductor is 2. This results in a small electric field

zero. inside dielect opposite direction.
E
Net field inside the dielectric is
K
Polarization of a dielectric : The induced dipole moment developed per

unit volume in an ... called polarization (P).
P = E
c  sueceptibility ; e  relative permeability ; E  electric field
(b)
Q
(i) Force on at C = 0 because there is no electric field inside the shell.
2
Force on 2Q charge.
Charge can be considered to be at C for a conducting sphere.
3Q
K 2Q 2 
2  3KQ along CA
FA = 2 2
x x
Sample Papers 233

q Q
(ii)  = 
 0 2 0
Q
2 0 is the flux coming out of the shell.
n2 n1 n1 – n2
  ...(i)
–v v ' R'
Adding (iii) and (iv)
n1 n2 n2 n1 1 1
   =  n2 – n1   – 
–u v – v v ' R R'
1 1  n2 – n1   1 1 
 =  – 
–u v  n1   R R ' 
1  n2 – n1   1 1 
=  – 
f  n1   R R ' 
26. (a)
B A
P EA
+q EB
x
2a
 kq
| EA | = (a – a ) 2
 kq
| EA | = (a  a ) 2
   kq kq
| Enet | = | E A | – | EB | ( x – a ) 2 – ( x  a ) 2

 K 2 px
Enet = ( x 2 – a 2 ) 2
If x >> a (x2 – a2) = x4

 
 k 2 px 1 2p
Enet = 
4 8 0 3
(b) E = 2x i
Flux through surface (1),
 
1 = E. A
= 2 × 0 × i . a2 i = 0
Flux throgh surface (2)
 1 = 2ai . a2 i
= 2a3
Net flux through the cube
 net= 2 – 1 = 2a3 outward
Hence charge enclosed = 20 a3
Sample Papers 235

CBSE Examination Paper - 2016
Delhi (Code No. 55/1/1/D)
Thied : 3 hours Maxmum marks: 70

Instructions: Same as CBSE Sample Question Paper–2016
SECTION-A
1. ‘A point charge +Q is placed at point O as shown in the figure. Is the potential
difference VA – VB positive.
+Q
O A B
2. How does the electric flux due to a point charge enclosed by a spherical Gaussian
surface get affected when its radius is increased?
3. Write the underlying principle of a moving coil galvanometer.
4. Define ‘quality factor’ of resonance in series LCR circuit. What is its SI unit?
SECTION-B
1
5. Plot a graph showing variation of de-Broglie wavelength  versus , where V
V
is accelerating potential for two particles A and B carrying same charge but of
masses m1, m2 (m1 > m2). Which one of the two represents a particle of smaller
mass and why?
8. A nucleus with mass number A = 240 and BE/A = 7.6 MeV breaks into two
fragments each of A = 120 with BE/A = 8.5 McV. Calculate the released energy.
OR
Calculate the energy in fusion reaction:
2 2 2 3
H + H  He + n, where BE of H = 2.23 Me and of He = 7.73 MeV.
1 1 1 2

9. Two cells of emfs l .5 V and 2.0 V having internal resistances 0.2  and 0.3 
respectively are connected in parallel. Calculate the emf and internal resistance
of the equivalent cell.
10. State Brewster’s law.
The value of Brewster angle for a transparent medium is different for light of
different colours. Give reason.
SECTION-C
11. A charge is distributed uniformly over a ring of radius ‘a’. Obtain an expression
for the electric intensity E at a point on the axis of the ring. Hence show that
for points at large distances from the ring, it behaves like a point charge.
12. Write three characteristic features in photoelectric effect which cannot be
explained on the basis of wave theory of light, but can be explained only using
Einstein’s equation.
13. (i) Write the expression for the magnetic force acting on a, charged particle
moving with velocity v in the presence of magnetic field B.
(ii) A neutron, an electron an alpha particle moving equal velocities, inter in
magnetic field. Going into the plan of the paper as shown. Trace their path
in the field in magnetic
X X X X X X

X X X X X X
n
X X X X X X
e
X X X X X X
14. (i) Define mutual inductance.
(ii) A pair of adjacent coils has a mutual inductance of 1.5 H. If the current in one
coil charges from to 20 A in 0.5 s, what is the change of flux linkage with
other coil?
Sample Papers 237

15. Two parallel plate capacitors X and Y have the same area of plates and same
seperation and air between the plates while Y contains a dielectric medium of
r = 4. X Y
+ –
15 V
(i) Calculate capacitance of capacitor if equivalent of the combind system.

(ii) Calculate the potential difference between the plates of X and Y.
(iii) Estimate the ratio of electrostatic energy stored in X and Y.
16. Two long straight carry steady current I1 and I2 separated by distance a are
flowing in the same direction, show how the magnetic field set up in one
produces force on the other. Obtain the expression for this force. Hence define
one ampere.
17. How are em waves produced by oscillating charges?
Draw a sketch of linearly polarized em propagating in the Z-direction. Indicating
Oscillating electric and magnetic fields.
OR
Write Maxwell’s generalization of Ampere’s Circuital Law. Show that in the
process the current produced within the plates of the capacitor is
dE
i = 0
dt
where E is the electric. flux produced during charging of the capacitor plates.
20. (a) Calculate the distance of an object of height h from a concave mirror of
radius 20 cm to obtain a real image of magnification 2. Find the location
of image also.
(b) Using mirror formula, explain why does a convex mirror always produce a
virtual image.
21. (a) State Bohr’s quantization condition for defining stationary orbits. How does
it explain the stationary orbits?

(b) Find the relation between the three wavelengths 1, 2and 3 from the energy
level diagram shown below.
22. Draw a schematic ray diagram of reflecting telescope showing how rays coming
from a distant object are recived at the eye-piece. Write in two important advantages
over refracting telescope.
SECTION–E
23. (a) An ac source of voltage V = V0 sin t is connected to a series combination of L,
C and R. Use the phasor diagram to obtain expressions for impedance of the
circuit and phase with the voltage. What is circuit in this condition called?
(b) In a series LR circuit XL = R and power factor of the circuit is P1. When capacitor
with capacitance C such that XL = XC is put in series, the power factor becomes
P1
P2. Calculate
P2
OR
(i) Write the function of a transformer. State its principle of working with the help
of diagram. Mention various energy losses in this device.
(ii) The primary coil of an ideal step up transformer her 100 turns and transformation
ratio is also 100. The input voltage and power are respectively 220 V and 1100
W. Calculate
(a) Number of turns in secondary
(b) Voltage in primary
(c) Voltage across secondary
(d) Current in secondary
(e) Power in secondary
24. (i) In Young’s double slit experiment, deduce the condition for (a) constructive,
and (b) destructive interference at a point on the screen. Draw a graph showing
variation of intensity in the interference pattern against position ‘x’ on the
screen.
Sample Papers 239

(ii) Compare the interference pattern observed in Young’s double slit experiment
with single slit diffraction pattern, pointing out three distinguishing features.
OR
(i) Plot a graph to show variation of the angle of deviation as a function of angel of
incidence for light passing through a prism. Derive an expression for refractive
index of the prism in terms of angle of minimum deviation and angle of prism.
(ii) What is dispersion of light? What is its cause?
(iii) A ray of light incident normally on one face of a right isosceles prism is totally
reflected as shown in figure. What must be minimum value of refractive index
of glass? Give relevant calculation
26. (i) Define the term drift velocity

(ii) On the basis of electron drift, derive an expression for resistivity of a conductor
in ten density of free electrons and relaxation time. On what factors does
resistivity of a conduc
(iii) Why alloys like constantun and manganin are used for making standard
resistors?
OR
(i) State the principle of working of a potentiometer.
(ii) In the following potentiometer circuit AB is a uniform wire of length 1 in and
resistance R the potential gradient along the wire and balance length AO (= l).

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n
s
1. Let the distance of point A and B from charge Q be rA and rB respectively.
Q Q
VA = and VB 
4 0 rA 4 0rB
Q  1 1 
 VA – VB = –
4 0 rA  rA rB 
Also rA < rB
1 1 1 1
   – 0
rA rB rA rB
1 1
 r – r has positive avlue
A B
Also Q is positive.
2. As per Gauss’s theorem,
q
Electric  = where q is the charge enclosed by a closed surface through
0
which flux is  Electric flux does not depend on the radius, hence it remains
unaffected.
3. A current carrying coil, in the presence of a magnetic field, experiences a
torque, which produces proportionate deflection.
i.e., Deflection,    (Torque)
4. Microwaves are considered suitable for radar systems used in aircraft navigation
due to their short wavelength or resonant curve.
5. The quality factor (Q) of series LCR circuit is defined as the ratio of the resonant
to frequency band width of the resonant curve.
r L
Q = = r
 2 – 1 R
Clearly, smaller the value of R, larger is the quality factor and sharper the
resonance. Thus quality factor determines the nature of sharpness of resonance.
In has no units.
Sample Papers 241

h  h 1 1
7. As, l= or  =  . 
2mqV  2q m  V
m2
 h 1
 .
or 1 2q m m1
V
As the charge on two particles is same, we get 
1
 Slope  =
m
1/ V
Hence, particle with lower mass (m2) will have greater slope.
8. Binding energy of nucleus with mass number 240,
BE1 = 240 × 7.6 =1824 Me V
Binding energy of two fragments
BE2 = 2 × 120 × 85 = 2040 MeV
 Energy released = BE2 – BE1
= (2040 – 1824) MeV = 216 MeV
OR
Initial binding energy
BE1 = (2.23 + 2.23) = 4.46 MeV
Final binding energy
BE2 = 7.73 MeV
Energy released = (7.73 – 4.46) MeV= 3.27 MeV
9. E1 = 1.5 V, r2 = 0.2
E2 = 2.0 V, r2 =0.3
emf of equivalent cell’
E1 E2

r1 r2 E1r2  E2r1
E = 1 1 
 r1  r2
r1 r2

 1.5  0.3  2  0.2  0.45  0.40
=    V  1.7V
0.2  0.3 0.5
Internal resistance of equivalent cell
1 1 1 r1r2
= r  r  r r
r 1 2 1 2
 0.2  0.3  0.06

=       0.12
0.2  0.3 0.5
10. Brewster’s Law: When unpolarised light is incident on the surface separating two
media at polarising angle, the reflected light gets completely polarised only when
the reflected light and the refracted light are perpendicular to each other.
Now, refractive index of denser (second) medium with respect to rarer (first) medium
is given by
 = tan ip where ip = polarising angle.
Since refractive index is different for different colour (wavelengths), Brewter’s
angle is different for different colours.
11. Consider a point P on the axis of uniformly charged ring at a distance x from
its centre O. Point P is at distance r = R 2  x 2 from each element dl of ring.
If q is total charge on ring, then,
q
charge per metre length,  = .
2R
The ring may be supposed to be formed of a large number of ring elements.
Consider an element of length dl situated at A.
The charge on element, dq =  dt
The electric field at P due to this element
1 dp 1 dl 
dE 1 =  ,along PC
4 0 r 2
4 0 r 2
The electric field strength due to opposite symmetrical element of length dl at B is
 1 dp 1 dl 

 ,along PD
dE 2 = 4 r 2 4 r 2
0 0
Sample Papers 243

 
If we resolve dE and dE 2 along the axis and perpendicular to axis, we note that
the components perpendicular to axis are oppositely directed and so get cancelled,
while those along the axis are added up. Hence, due to symmetry of the ring, the
electric field strength is directed along the axis.
The electric field strength due to charge element of length dl, situated at A, along
the axis will be
1 dl dl 

dE = dE1 cos  = , 2 ,along PD
4 0 r 2
r
x
But, cos  =
r
1 dlx 1 x
 dE =  dt
4 0 r 3
4 0 r 3
The resultant electric field along the axis will be obtained by adding fields due to
all elements of the ring, i.e.,
1 x 1 x
E =  4 0 r 3
dl
4 0 r 3 
dt
But,  dl = whole length of ring =2 R and r = (R2 + x2)1/2
1 qx
E = 2R
4 0 ( R  x 2 )3/ 2
2
 q 
q  x
As,  = , E = 1 2R 
2R
2 R 2 0 ( R 2  x 2 )3/ 2
1 qx
or, E = 2 ( R 2  x 2 )3/ 2 ,along the axis
0
1 q
At large distances i.e., x >> R, E =
4 0 x 2
i.e., the electric field due to a point charge at a distance x.
For points on the axis at distances much larger than the radius of ring, the ring
behaves like a point charge.
12. The three characteristic features which cannot be explained by wave theory
are:
(i) Kinetic energy of emitted electrons is found to be independent of the
intensity of incident light.
(ii) There is no emission of electrons if frequency of incident light is below a
certain frequency (threshold frequency).
(iii) Photoelectric effect is an instantaneous process.
The direction of force experienced by the particles will be according to Reming’s
left hand rule
14. (i) Mutual inductance of two coils is the magnetic flux linked with the
secondary coil when a unit current flows through the primary coil,
2
i.e., 2 = MI1 or M=
I1
(ii) Change of flux for small change in current
d = Mdl = 1.5 (20 – 0) weber = 30 weber
4 0 A 4 0 A
15. (i) Cx = C  4C then Cy = C  4C
d d
For series combination of Cx and Cy
1 1 1
= C C
C x y
1 1 1 5
 =    C = 5F
4 C 4C 4C
 Cx = 5F and Cy = 4 × 5 = 20F
Sample Papers 245

(ii) Total charge Q = CV = 4F × 15 V = 60C
Q 60C
Vx =   12 V
Cx 5F
Q 60C
Vx =  3V
Cx 5F
Ux (Q 2 / 2Cx ) C x 4C 4
(iii)   
U y = (Q 2 / 2C y ) C y C 1
 Ux : Uy = 4 : 1
16. Refer to NCERT Book.
17. (a) An oscillating charge produces an oscillating electric field in space, which
produces an oscillating magnetic field. The oscillating electric and
magnetic fields regenerate each other, and this results in the production
of em waves in space.
(b) Electric field is along j-axis and magnetic field is along y-axis.
Ampere’s circuital law is given by

 
 B.dl = 0Ie
For a circuit containing capacitor, during its charging or discharging the current
within the plates of the capacitor varies, producing displacement current ld.
Hence, Ampere’s circuital law is generalised by Maxwell, given as
 
 B.dl = 0Ic + 0Ie
The electric flux (F) between the plates of capacitor changes with time, producing
d E
current within the plates which is proportional to . Thus we get
dt
Ic = 0 d  E
dt
20. (a) R = – 20 cm and M = –2
R
Focal length f =  –10 cm
2
v
Magnification M = – = –2 (given)
u
 u = 2u
Using mirror formula
1 1 1 1 1 1
     –
u u f 2u u 10
3 1
    = –15 cm
2u 10
 v = 2 × (–15) = – 30 cm
1 1 1
(b)  
v u f
Using sign convention for convex mirror we get
f > 0, u < 0
 Form the formula:
1 1 1
 =
v u f
As f is positive and u is negative v is always positive, hence image is always
virtual.
21. (a) Only those orbits are stable for which the angular momentum of revolving
 h
electron is an integral multiple of   where h is the planck’s constant.
2
Thus the angular momentum (L) of the orbiting electron is quantised. That is L =
nh
2
According to dc Broglie hypothesis
h
Linear momentum =

Sample Papers 247

and for circular orbit
L = rnp, where rn is the radius of quantised
orbits
h
= rn

nh
Also, L =
2
rn h nh
 = or 2r = n
 2
Hence, circumference of permitted orbits are integral multiples of the wavelength
hc
(b) EC – EB =  ...(1)
1
hc
EB – EA = ...(2)
2
hc
EC – EA = ...(3)
3
Adding (1) and (2), we have
hc hc
EC – EA =  ...(4)
1  2
From (3) and (4), we have
hc hc hc 1 1 1
=    
3 1  2  3 1  2
1 2
 3 
1   2
22. Advantages:
(i) No chromatic aberration.
(ii) Easy mechanical support (hight mechanical support is required, because mirror

weights much less than a lens of equivalent optical quality.)
(iii) Large gathering power.
(iv) Large magnifying power.
(v) Large resolving power.
(iv) Spherical aberration is also removed by using parabolic mirror.
24. (a) Phase difference () in series LCR circuit is given by
VC – VL im ( X C – X L )
tan  = 
VR im R
(XC – X L )
=
R
When current and voltage are in phase
 = 0  XC – XL = 0  XC =XL
This condition is called resonance and the circuit is called resonant circuit.
(b) Case I: XL = R
 Z = 2
R2  X L  R2  R2  2R
R R 1
Power factor, P1 = cos  cos  =  
Z 2R 2
Case II:
 Z = R 2  ( X L – X C )2  R 2  R
R R
Power factor, P2 =  1
Z R
P1 1
 = 
P2 2
(i) A transformer converts low voltage ac into high voltage ac and vice versa
Refer NCERT Book.
For energy Losses, Refer NCERT Book.
(ii) NP = 100, Transformer ration K = 100
(a) Number of turns in secondary coil
Sample Papers 249

NS = Np × K = 100 × 100 = 10000
(b) Input power (PP) = Input voltage (VP) × Current in primary (IP)
1100 = 220 × IP  IP = 5 A
VS N S Output Voltage
(c)  
VP N P Input Voltage
5
 VS = I  VP  K  VP
S
= 220 × 100 = 22000 V

Input Current I N
(d)  P  S
Output Current I S N P
5
 = 100 or IS = 0.05 A
IS
(e) For an ideal transformer,
Power in secondary = Power in primary
 Ps =1100W
25. Refer to NCERT Book.
OR
(i) Refer to NCERT Book.
(ii) The phenomenon of splitting of white light into its constituent colours is called
dispersion of light. Refractive index of the material is different for different
colours. According to the equation, different colours deviate through different
angles.
(iii) The critical angle depends on refractive index  as
1
sin ic =

For total internal reflection,
i = ic (critcal angle)
 i = i  i  45°
1
 sin ic  sin 45°  sin ic 
2
1
  2    2
sin ic
Hence, the minimum value of refractive index must be 2.
25. (i) The average velocity acquired by the free electrons of a conductor in a direction
opposite to the externally applied electric field is called drift velocity.
–eE 
Drift Velocity. vd =
m
Where, e = charge on electron
E = external electric field
 = relaxation time
m = mass of electron
(ii) Refer to NCERT Book.
Resistivity of the material of a conductor depends upon the relaxation lime,
i.e., temperature and the number density of electrons.
(iii) This is because constantan and manganin show very weak dependence of
resistivity on temperature.
OR
(i) When a constant current flows through a conductor of uniform area of
cross-section, the potential drop across any length of the wire is directly
proportional to the length, i.e., V  l
(ii) Current flowing in the potentiometer wire
E 2.0 2
I =   A
Rtotal 15  10 25
2 20
 Potential difference across the wire =  10   0.8 A
25 25
VAB 0.8
 Potential gradient k =  = 0.8 V/m
I AB 1.0
Now, current flowing in the circuit containing experimental cell,
1.5
= 1 A
1.2  0.3
Potential difference across length AO – 0.3 × 1 = 0.3 V
0.3 0.3
Length AO = m  100 cm = 37.5 cm
0.8 0
Sample Papers 251
C
B
S
E
B
O
A
R
D
E
X
A
M
I
N
A
T
I
O
N
P
A
P
E
R
D
E
L
H
I
-
2
0
1
7
(
S
O
L
V
E
D
)
Time: 3 Hours Maximum Marks: 70
(ii) This questions paper has five sections: Section A Section B, Section C,
Section D and Section E.
(iii) Section A contains five questions of one mark each, Section B contains
five questions of two marks each, Section C contains twelve questions of
three marks each, Section D contains one value based question of four
marks and Section E contains three questions of five marks each.
(iv) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided
in one questions of two marks, one question of three marks and all the
three question of five marks weightage. You have to attempt only one of
the choices in such questions.
(v) You may use the following values of physical constants wherever necessary.
c = 3 × 108 m/s
h = 6.63 × 10–34 Js
e = 1.6 × 10–19 C
m0 = 4p × 10–7 T m A–1
e0 = 8.854 × 10–12 C2 N–1 m–2
1
= 9 × 109 N m2 C–2
4 0
Mass of electron = 9.1 × 10–13 kg
Mass of neutron = 1.675 × 10–27 kg
Mass of proton = 1.673 × 10–27 kg
Avogadro’s number = 6.023 × 1023 kg
Boltzmann constant = 1.38 × 10–23 J K–1

SECTION A
Q1. Does the charge given to a metallic sphere depend on whether it is hollow or solid?
Give reason for your answer.
Ans. No,
Because the charge resides only on the surface of the conductor.
Q2. A long straight current carrying wire passes normally through the centre of circular
loop. If the current through the wire increases, will there be an induced emf in the
loop? Justify.
Ans. No,
As the magnetic field due to current carrying wire will be in the plane of the circular
loop, so magnetic flux will remain zero.
Alternatively
[Magnetic flux does not change with the change of current]
Q3. At a place, the horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field is B and angle of dip
is 60°. What is the value of horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic field at
equator?
Ans. BH = BE cos 
B = BE cos 60°  BE = 2B
At equator  = 0°
 BH = 2B cos 0° = 2B
[Alternatively, Award full one mark, if student doesn’t take the value (= 2B) of BE,
while finding the value of horizontal component at equator, and just writes and
formula only.]
Q4. Name the junction diode whose I-V characteristics are drawn below.
Ans. Solar cell

Q5. How is the speed of em-waves in vacuum determined by the electric and magnetic
fields?
Sample Papers 253

Ans. Speed of em waves is determined by the ratio of the peak values of electric and
magnetic field vectors.
Eo
[Alternatively, Give full credit, if student writes directly c = ]
Bo
SECTION B
Q6. How does Ampere-Maxwell law explain the flow of current through a capacitor
when it is being charged by a battery? Write the expression for the displacement
current in terms of the rate of change of electric flux.
Ans. Explanation of flow of current through capacitor

Expression for displacement current 1
During charging, electric flux between the plates of capacitor keeps on

changing; this results in the production of a displacement current between the
plates.
d E  dE 
Id =  0  / I d   o A 
dt dt
Q7. Define the distance of closest approach. An a-particle of kinetic energy ‘K’ is
bombarded on a thin gold foil. The distance of the closest approach is ‘r’.
What will be the distance of closest approach for an a-particle of double the
kinetic energy?
OR
Write two important limitations of Rutherford nuclear model of the atom.
Ans. Definition of distance of closest approach 1

Finding of distance of closest approach when
Kinetic energy is doubled 1
It is the distance of charged particle from the centre of the nucleus, at which the
whole of the initial kinetic energy of the (far off) charged particle gets converted
into the electric potential energy of the system. Distance of closest approach (rc)
is given by

1 2 Ze 2
rc = .
4 0 K
r
‘K’ is doubled,  r becomes
2
r
[Alternatively: If a candidate writes directly without mentioning formula, award
2
the mark for this part.]
OR
Two important limitation of Rutherford nuclear model
1. According to Rutherford model, electron orbiting around the nucleus,
continuously radiates energy due to the acceleration; hence the atom will
not remain stable.
2. As electron spirals inwards; its angular velocity and frequency change
continuously; therefore it will emit a continuous spectrum.
Q8. Find out the wavelength of the electron orbiting in the ground state of hydrogen
atom.
Ans. Calculation of wavelength of electron in ground state
Radius of ground state of hydrogen atom = 0.53 Å = 0.53 × 10 –10 m
According to be Broglie relation 2nr = n
For ground state n = 1
2 × 3.14 × 0.53 × 10–10 = 1 × 
  = 3.32 × 10–10m
= 3.32 Å
Alternatively
Velocity of electron, in the ground state, of hydrogen atom = 2.18 × 10–6m/s
Hence momentum of revolving electron
p = mv
= 9.1 × 10–31 × 2.18 × 10–6 kgm/s
h 6.63  10 –24
 =  m
p 9.1  10 –31  2.18  106
= 3.32 A
Sample Papers 255

Note: Also accept the following answer:
Let n be the wavelength of the electron in the nth orbit, we then have
2nr = n
For ground state n = 1
2nr0 = 
(r = r0 is the radius of the ground state)
[Alternatively]
h
n =
mvn
and vn = v0 (velocity of electron in ground state)
h
 = mv
0
Q9. Define the magnifying power of a compound microscope when the final image is
formed at infinity. Why must both the objective and the eyepiece of a compound
microscope has short focal lengths? Explain.
Ans. Definition of magnifying power

Reason for short focal lengths of objective and eyepiece
Magnifying power is defined as the angle subtended at the eye by the image to the
angle subtended (at the unaided eye) by the object.
(Alternatively: Also accept this definition in the form of formula)
L D
m = m0 × me = 
f0 fe
To increase the magnifying power both the objective and eyepiece must have
 L D
short focal lengths  as m   
 f0 fe 

SECTION C
Q11. (i) Find the value of the phase difference between the current and the voltage in
the series LCR circuit shown below, which one leads in phase: current or
voltage?
(ii) Without making any other change, find the value of the additional capacitor
C1, to be connected in parallel with the capacitor C, in order to make the
power factor of the circuit unity.
Ans. (i) Calculation of phase difference between current and voltage Name of quantity
which leads
(ii) Calculation of value of ‘C, is to be connected in parallel
(i) XL = L = (1000 × 100 × 10–3)  = 100

1  1 
Xc =  –6 
  500
C  1000  2  10 
Phase angle
XL  XC
tan  =
R
100 – 500
tan  =  –1
400

 = –
4
As Xc > XL, (/phase angle is negative), hence current leads voltage
Sample Papers 257

(ii) To make power factor unity
XC = XL
1
= 100 C = 10F
C
C = C + C1 10 = 2 + C1
C1 = 8 F
Q12. Write the two processes that take place in the formation of a p-n junction. Explain
with the help of a diagram, the formation of depletion region and barrier potential
in a p-n junction.
Ans. Names of the two processes

Diagram
Explanation of formation of depletion region and Barrier Potential
Diffusion
Drift
Due to the diffusion of electrons and holes across the junction a region of (immobile)
positive charge is created on the n-side and a region of (immobile) negative charge
is created on the p-side; near the junction; this is called depletion region.
Barrier potential is formed due to loss of electrons from n-region and gain of
electrons by p-region. Its polarity is such that it opposes the movement of charge
carriers across the junction.

Q13. (i) Obtain the expression for the cyclotron frequency.
(ii) A deuteron and a proton are accelerated by the cyclotron. Can both be
accelerated with the same oscillator frequency? Give reason to justify your
answer.
Ans. (i) Derivation of the expression for cyclotron frequency

(ii) Reason/justification for the correct answer
mv 2
(i) = qvB
r
mv
r = qB
1 v
Frequency of revolution (v) = 
Time Period 2r
qB
v =
2 m
(ii) No
The mass of the two particles, i.e deuteron and proton, is different.
Since (cyclotron) frequency depends inversely on the mass, they cannot be
accelerated by the same oscillator frequency.
Q14. (i)How does one explain the emission of electrons from a photosensitive surface
with the help of Einstein’s photoelectric equation?
(ii) The work function of the following metalsis given: Na = 2.75 eV, K = 2.3 eV,
Mo = 4.17 eV and Ni = 5.15 eV. Which of these metals will not cause
photoelectric emission for radiation of wavelength 3300 Å from a laser
source placed 1 m away from these metals? What hap-pens if the laser
source is brought nearer and placed 50 cm away?
Ans. (i) Explanation of emission of electrons from the photosensitive surface

(ii) Identification of metals/s which does/do not cause photoelectric effect
Photoelectric emission
Effect produced
Sample Papers 259

(i) Einstein’s Photoelectric equation is
hv = 0 + Kmax
When a photon of energy ‘hv’ is incident on the metal, some part of this energy
is utilized as work function to eject the electron and remaining energy appears
as the kinetic energy of the emitted electron.
hv 6.63  10 –34  3  108

(ii) E =  eV
 3.3  10 –7  1.6  10 –19
= 3.77 eV
The work function of Mo and Ni is more than the energy of the incident photons;
so photo-electric emission will not take place from these metals. Kinetic energy
of photo electrons will not change, only photoelectric current will change.
Q15. A resistance of R draws current from a potentiometer. The potentiometer wire,
AB, has total resistance of R0. A voltage V is supplied to the potentiometer.
Derive an expression for the voltage across R when the sliding contact is in the
middle of potentiometer wire.
Ans. Derivation of expression of voltage across resistance R
Resistance between points A & C

1 1 1
= 
R1 R  0
R
 
2
Effective resistance between points A & B.
 R0 
R
 2   R0
R2 = R0  2
 R+ 
2
Current drawn from the voltage source,
V
1 =
 R 
R 0
 2   R0
 R0  2
 R+ 
2
Let current through R be I1
R 
I 0 
 2
I = R
R+ 0
2
Voltage across R
V1 = I1R
IR 0 RR 0 V
= .R = .
 R   R   RR 0  R 0
2  R+ 0  2 R  0  
 2  2   2R+R 0  2
2RV
=
R 0 + 4R
Sample Papers 261

Q17. (i) Find equivalent capacitance between A and B in the combination given below.
Each capacitor is of 2F capacitance.
(ii) If a dc source of 7 V is connected across AB, how much charge is drawn from
the source and what is the energy stored in the network?
Ans. (i) Calculation of equivalent capacitance.
(ii) Calculation of charge and energy stored
(i) Capacitors C2, C3, and C4 are in parallel

 C 235 = C2 + C3 + C4
 C 234 = 6F
Capacitors C1, C234 and C5 are in series
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
=     
Ceq C1 C234 C5 2 6 2
= 7/6 F
C equialent = 6/7 F
(ii) Charge drawn from the source
Q = Ceq V,
6
=  7C  6C
7
Q 2 6  6  10 –12  7
Energy stored U =  J
2C 2  6  10 –6
= 6/7 F
Q18. (i) Derive the expression for electric field at a point on the equatorial line of an
electric dipole.
(ii) Depict the orientation of the dipole in (i) stable, (ii) unstable
equilibrium in a uniform elec-tric field.
Ans. (i) Derivation of expression of electric field on the equatorial
line of the dipole
(ii) Depiction of orientation for stable and unstable equilibrium

Both are equal and their directions are as shown in the figure. Hence net
electric field
q

E+q = 4 r 2  a 2
0 
q

E–q = 4 r 2  a 2
0 
Let the point ‘P’ be at a distance ‘r’ from the mid point of the dipole.
 
E = [–(E+q + E–q)cos q] p
2qa p
= – 3

4 0 r  a2

2 2
(ii) Stable equilibrium,  = 0°
Q19. (i) A radioactive nucleus ‘A’ undergoes a series of decays as given below.
   
A   A1   A 2   A 3   A4
The mass number and atomic number of \ are 176 and 71 respectively.
Determine the mass and atomic numbers of A4 and A,
(ii) Write the basic nuclear processes underlying + and – decays.
Ans. (i) Determining the mass and atomic number of A4 and A

(ii) Basic nuclear processes of + and – decays
(i) A4: Mass Number: 172

Atomic Number: 69
(ii) A: Mass Number: 180
Atomic Number: 72
Sample Papers 263

[Alternatively: Give full credit if student considers * decays and find atomic
and mass numbers accordingly]
180  176 –
 176  172  172
A   A1   A 2   A3   A4
74 72 71 69 69
Gives the values quoted above.

If the student takes + decay
180  176 –
 176  172  172
A   A1   A 2   A3   A4
74 72 71 69 69
This would give the answer: (A4: 172,69);(A: 180,74)
Basic nuclear process for + decay p  n + –1 e + v

0
For – decay n  p + –1 e + v
0
[Note: Give full credit of this part, if student writes the processes as conversion of
proton into neutron for + decay and neutron into proton for – decay.]
Q20. (i) A ray of light incident on face AB of an equilateral glass prism, shows minimum
deviation of 30°. Calculate the speed of light through the prism.
A
B C
(ii) Find the angle of incidence at face AB so that the emergent ray grazes along
the face AC.
Ans. (i) Calculation of speed of light

(ii) Calculation of angle of incidence at face AB
 A  δm   60  30 
sin  sin 
 2   2

 =   2
 A  60 
sin   sin 
 2  2 
c 3  108
Also =  v  m/s
v 2
= 2.122 × 108 m/s
(ii)
At face AC, let the angle of incidence be r2, For grazing ray, e = 90°
1  1 
  =  r2  sin –1   45
sin r2  2 
Let angle of refraction at face AB be r1, Now r1 + r2 = A

 R1 = A – r2 = 60° – 45° = 15°
Let angle of incidence at this face be i
sin i
 =
sin r1
sin i
 2 = sin15
 i = sin–1  2.sin15 
Q22. Describe the working principle of a moving coil galvanometer. Why is it necessary
to use (i) a radial magnetic field and (ii) a cylindrical soft iron core in a
galvanometer? Write the expression for current sensitivity of the galvanometer.
Can a galvanometer as such be used for measuring the current ? Explain.
OR
(a) Define the term ‘self-inductance’ and write its S.I. unit.
Sample Papers 265

(b) Obtain the expression for the mutual inductance of two long co-axial solenoids
S1 and S2 wound one over the other, each of length L and radii n1 and r2 and
n1 and n2 number of turns per unit length, when a current I is set up in the outer
solenoid S2.
Ans. Working and Principle of moving coil galvanometer

Necessity of (i) radial magnetic field
(ii) cylindrical soft iron core
Expression for current sensitivity
Explanation of use of Galvanometer to measure current
When a coil, carrying current, and free to rotate about a fixed axis, is placed in a
uniform magnetic field, it experiences a torque (Which is balanced by a restoring
torque of suspension).
(i) To have deflection proportional to current / to maximize the deflecting torque
acting on the current carrying coil.
(ii) To make magnetic field radial/to increase the strength of magnetic field.
Expression for current sensitivity
 NAB
Is = or
I K
where  is the deflection of the coil
No
The galvanometer, can only detect current but cannot measure them as it is not
calibrated. The galvanometer coil is likely to be damaged by currents in the (mA/
A) range]
OR
(a) Definition of self inductance and its SI unit

(b) Derivation of expression for mutual inductance
Self inductance of a coil equals, the magnitude of the magnetic flux, linked with it,
when a unit current flows through it.
Alternatively
Self inductance, of a coil, equals the magnitude of the emf induced in it, when the
current in the coil, is changing at a unit rate.

SI unit: henry / (weber/ampere) / (ohm second.)
When current I2 is passed through coil S2, it in turn sets up a magnetic flux through
S1: = 1 = (n1l) (r12) (B2)
 1 = (n1I) (r12) (0n2I2)
  = 0n1n2I2r12lI2
But   = M12I2
 M12 = 0n1n2r12l
[Note: If the student derives the correct expression, without giving the diagram of
two coaxial coils, full credit can be given]
SECTION E
Q24. (a) Draw a labelled diagram of AC generator. Derive the expression for the
instantaneous value of the emf induced in the coil.
(b) A circular coil of cross-sectional area 200 cm2 and 20 turns is rotated
about the vertical diameter with angular speed of 50 rad s–1 in a uniform
magnetic field of magnitude 3.0 × 10–2T. Calculate the maximum value
of the current in the coil.
OR
(a) Draw a labelled diagram of a step-up transformer. Obtain the ratio of secondary
to primary voltage in terms of number of turns and currents in the two coils
(b) A power transmission line feeds input power at 2200 V to a step-down
transformer with its primary windings having 3000 turns. Find the number
of turns in the secondary to get the power output at 220 V.
Sample Papers 267

Ans. (a) Labelled diagram of AC generator
Expression for instantaneous value of induced emf.
(b) Calculation of maximum value of current
Alternatively
[Deduct 1 mark, If diagram is not labelled]

2
When the coil is rotated with constant angular speed  the angle  between the
magnetic field and area vector of the coil, at instant, t is given by  = t.
Therefore, magnetic fiux, (B), at this instant, is
 B = BA cos t
d B
 Induced emf e = –N
dt
e = NBA  sin  t = e0 sin t
where e 0 = NBA 
(b) Maximum value of emf
e 0 = NBA v
= 20 × 200 × 10–4 × 3 × 10–2 × 50V
= 600 mV
e0 600
Maximum induced current i0 =  MA
R R

[Note 1 : It the student calculates the value of the maximum induced emf and says
thet “since R is not given the value of maximum induced current cannot be
calculated” the 1
2
mark, for the last part, of the question, can be given.]
[Note 2 : The direction of magnetic field has not been given. If the student takes
this direction along the axis of rotation and hence obtains the value of induced
emf and, therefore, maximum current, as zero, award full marks for this part.]
OR
(a) Labelled diagram of a step up transformer
Deriveation of ratio of secondary and primary voltage
(b) Calculation of number of turns in the secondary
(a)
[Note: Deduct 1
2
mark, if labelling is not done]
(a) When AC voltage is applied to primary coil the resulting current produces an
alternating magnetic flux, which links the secondary coil.
The induced emf, in the secondary coil, having N( rums, is
d
ep = – N s
dt
This flux, also induced an emf, called back emf, in the primary coil.
d
ep = – N p
dt
Sample Papers 269

But e p = VP
and e s = Vs
Vs Ns
 Vp = Np
For an ideal transformer

Ip V p = i s v s
Q25. (a) Distinguish between unpolarized light and linearly polarized light. How does
one get linearly polarised light with the help of a polaroid?
(b) A narrow beam of unpolarised light of intensity I0 is incident on a polaroid P1.
The light transmitted by it is then incident on a second polaroid P2 with its pass
axis making angle of 60° relative to the pass axis of P1, Find the intensity of the
light transmitted by P2.
OR
(a) Explain two features to distinguish between the interference pattern in Young’s
double slit experiment with the diffraction pattern obtained due to a single slit.
(b) A monochromatic light of wavelength 500 nm is incident normally on a single
slit of width 0.2 mm to produce a diffraction pattern. Find the angular width of
the central maximum obtained on the screen.
Estimate the number of fringes obtained in Young’s double slit experiment with
fringe width 0.5 mm, which can be accommodated within the region of total
angular spread of the central maximum due to single slit.
Ans (a) Distinction between unpolarised and linearly polarized light 2

Obtaining linearly polarized Light 1
(b) Calculation of intensity of light 2
(a) In an unpolarised light, the oscillations, of the electric field, arc in random

directions, in planes perpendicular to the direction of propagation. For a polarized
light, the oscillations are aligned along one particular direction.
1
Alternatively
Polarized light can be distinguished, from unpolarised light when it is allowed to
pass through a Polaroid. Polaroid light does can show change in its intensity
remains same in case of unpolarised light. 1
When unpolarised light wave is incident on a polaroid, then the electric
vectors along the direction of its aligned molecules, get absorbed; the
electric vector, oscillating along a direction perpendicular to the aligned
molecules, pass through. This light is called linearly polarized light.
1
(b) According to Malus’ Law:
I = I0 cos2
 I0 
I =   cos2 , where I0 is the intensity of unpolarized light.
2
 = 60° (given)
2
I0 I0  1  I0
I = cos 60     
2
2 2  2  8
OR
(a) Explanation of two features (distinguishing between interference pattern and

diffraction pattern.) 2
(b) Calculation of angular width of central maxima 2
Estimation of number of fringes 1
Interference Pattern Diffraction pattern
1. All fringes are of equal width. 1. Width of central maxima is twice the
width of higher order bands.
2. Intensity of all bright bands is 2. Intensity goes on decreasing for higher

equal. order of diffraction bands.
[Note: Also accept any other two correct distinguishing features.]
Sample Papers 271

(b) Angular width of central maximum
2
 =
a
2  500  10 –9
= radin
0.2  10 –3
= 5 × 10–3 radin
D
 =
d
Linear width of central maxima in the diffraction partem 2XD
2 D
 =
a
Let ‘n’ be the number of interference fringes which can be accommodated
in the central maxima
 n× =
[Award the last .5 mark if the student writes the answer as 2 (taking d = a),
or just attempts to do these calculation.] ·
Q26. (i) Derive an expression for drift velocity of electrons in a conductor. Hence
deduce Ohm’s law.
(ii) A wire whose cross-sectional area is increasing linearly from its one end
to the other, is connected across a battery of V volts. Which of the following
quantities remain constant in the wire?
(a) drift speed (b) current density
(c) electric current (d) electric field
OR
(i) State the two Kirchhoff’s laws. Explain briefly how these rules are justified.
(ii) The current is drawn from a cell of emf E and internal resistance r connected
to the network of resistors each of
resistance r as shown in the figure. Obtain
the expression for (i) the current draw from
the cell and (ii) the power consumed in the
network.

Ans. (i) Derivation of the expression for drift velocity
Deduction of Ohm’s law
(ii) Name of quantity and justification
Let an electric field E be applied the conductor. Acceleration of each electron

is
eE
a =
m
Velocity gained by the electron eE
eE
y = t
m
Let the conductor contain n electrons per unit volume. The average value
of time ‘t’ between their successive collision, is the relaxation time ‘Z’.
eE
Hence average drift velocity vd = – Z
m
The amount of charge, crossing area A, in time A?, is
= ne Avd t = IZ
Substituting the value of vd’ we get

 eE 
IZ = neA  
m
But I = JA, where J is the current density
 ne2  
 = 
 m 
This is Ohm’s law
[Note: Credit should be given if the student derives the alternative form of
v
Ohm’s law by substituting E = ]
l
(ii) Electric current well remain constant in the wire.
All other quantities, depend on the cross sectional area of the wire.
Sample Papers 273

OR
(i) Statement of Kirchhoff’s laws 1+1
Justification
(ii) Calculation of (i) current drawn and; (ii) Power consumed
(i) Junction Rule: At any Junction, the sum of currents, entering the junction, is
equal to the sum of currents leaving the junction.
Loop Rule: The Algebraic sum, of changes in potential, around any closed
loop involving resistors and cells, in the loop is zero. 1
 ( V) = 0
Justification: The first law is in accord with the law of conservation of
charge.
The Seconds law is in accord with the law of conservation of energy.
(ii) Equivalent resistance of the loop
R = r/3
Hence current drawn from the cell
E 3E
I = 
r/3 + r 4r
Power consumed
P = I2 (r/3)
9E 2 3E
= 
r/3 + r 4r
Power consumed
P = I2 (r/3)
9E 2 3E 2
=  4 r / 3 
16r 2 4r
[Note: Award the last 1½ marks for this part, if the calculations, for these
parts, are done by using (any other) value of equivalent resistance obtained
by the student.] 5

CBSE (DELHI) – 2018
Time – 3 hrs: MM. – 70
(ii) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C,
Section D and Section E.
(iii) Section A contains five questions of one mark each, Section B contains
five questions of two marks each, Section C contains one ualue based
question of four marks and Section E contains three questions of five marks
each.
(iv) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided
in one question of two marks, one question of three marks and all the three
question of five marks weightage. You have to attempt only one of the
choices in such questions.
(v) You may use the following ualues of physical constants wherever necessary:
c = 3 × 108 m/s
h = 6.63 × 10–34 Js
e = 1.6 × 10–19 C
m0 = 4 × 10–7 T mA–1
0 = 8.854 × 10–12 C2 N–1 m–2
1
= 9 × 109 N m2 C–2
4 0
Mass of electron (m0) = 9.1 × 10–31 kg
Mass of neutron = 1.673 × 10–27 kg
Mass of proton = 1.673 × 10–27 kg
Avogadro’s number = 6.023 × 1023 kg
Boltzmann constant = 1.38 × 10–23 JK–1
Sample Papers 275

SECTION-A
1. A proton and an electron travelling along parallel paths enter a region of uniform
magnetic field, acting perpendicular to their paths. Which of them will move
in a circular path with higher frequency ?
2. Name the electromagnetic radiations used for (a) water purification, and (b)
eye surgery.
3. Draw graphs showing variation of photoelectric current with applied voltage
for two incident radiations of equal frequency and different intensities. Mark
the graph for the radiation of higher intensity.
4. Four nuclei of an element undergo fusion to form a heavier nucleus, with release
of energy. Which of the two — the parent or the daughter nucleus — would
have higher binding energy per nucleon?
SECTION B
6. Two electric bulbs P and Q have their resistances in the ratio of 1 : 2. They are
connected in series across a battery. Find the ratio of the power dissipation in
these bulbs.
7. A 10 V cell of negligible internal resistance is connected in parallel across a
battery of emf 200 V and internal resistance 38 Q. as shown in the figure. Find
the value of current in the circuit.
In a potentiometer arrangement for determining the emf of a cell, the balance

point of the cell in open circuit is 350 cm. When a resistance of 9 Q is used in
the external circuit of the cell, the balance point shifts to 300 cm. Determine
the internal resistance of the cell.

8. (a) Why are infra-red waves often called heat waves ? Explain.
(b) What do you understand by the statement, “Electromagnetic waves transport
momentum”?
9. If light of wavelength 412-5 nm is incident on each of the metals given below,
which ones will show photoelectric emission and why ?
Metal Work Function (eV)
Na 1-.92
K 2.15
Ca 3.20
Mo 4.17
10. A carrier wave of peak voltage 15 V is used to transmit a message signal. Find
the peak voltage of the modulating signal in order to have a modulation index
of 60%.
11. Four point charges Q, q, Q and q are placed at the corners of a square side ‘a’
as shown in the figure.
Find the
(a) resultant electric force on a charge Q, and
(b) potential energy of this system.
OR
(a) Three point charges q, – 4q and 2q are placed at the vertices of an equilateral
triangle ABC of side ‘l’ as shown in the figure. Obtain the expression for
the magnitude of the resultant electric force acting on the charge q.
Sample Papers 277

(b) Find out the amount of the work done to separate the charges at infinite distance.
12. (a) Define the term ‘conductivity’ of a metallic wire. Write its SI unit.
(b) Using the concept of free electrons in a conductor, derive the expression for
the conductivity of a wire in terms of number density and relaxation time.
Hence obtain the relation between current density and the applied electric field
E.
13. A bar magnet of magnetic moment 6 J/T is aligned at 60° with a uniform external
magnetic field of 0.44 T. Calculate (a) the work done in turning the magnet to align
its magnetic moment (i) normal to the magnetic field, (ii) opposite to the magnetic
field, and (b) the torque on the magnet in the final orientation in case (ii).
14. (a) An iron ring of relative permeability has windings of insulated copper wire of n
turns per metre. When the current in the windings is I, find the expression for
the magnetic field in the ring.
(b) The susceptibility of a magnetic material is 0.9853. Identify the type of magnetic
material. Draw the modification of the field pattern on keeping a piece of this
material in a uniform magnetic field.
15. (a) Show using a proper diagram how unpolarised light can be linearly polarised by
reflection from a transparent glass surface.
(b) The figure shows a ray of light falling normally on the face AB of an equilateral
3 4
glass prism having refractive index placed in water of refractive index
2 3
Will this ray suffer total internal reflection on striking the face AC ? Justify
your answer.

16. (a) If one of two identical slits producing interference in Young’s experiment is
covered with glass, so that the light intensity passing through it is reduced to
50%, find the ratio of the maximum and minimum intensity of the fringe in the
interference pattern.
(b) What kind of fringes do you expect to observe if white light is used instead of
monochromatic light ?
17. A symmetric biconvex lens of radius of curvature R and made of glass of refractive
index 15, is placed on a layer of liquid placed on top of a plane mirror as shown
in the figure. An optical needle with its tip on the principal axis of the lens is
moved along the axis until its real, inverted image coincides with the needle itself.
The distance of the needle from the lens is measured to be x. On removing the
liquid layer and repeating the experiment, the distance is found to be y. Obtain the
expression for the refractive index of the liquid in terms of x and y.
Sample Papers 279

18. (a) State Bohr’s postulate to define stable orbits in hydrogen atom. How does de
Broglie’s hypothesis explain the stability of these orbits ?
(b) A hydrogen atom initially in the ground state absorbs a photon which excites it
to the n = 4 level. Estimate the frequency of the photon.
19. (a) Explain the processes of nuclear fission and nuclear fusion by using the plot of
binding energy per nucleon (BE/A) versus the mass number A.
(b) A radioactive isotope has a half-life of 10 years. How long will it take for the
activity to reduce to 3-125% ?
20. (a) A student wants to use two p-n junction diodes to convert alternating current
into direct current. Draw the labelled circuit diagram she would use and explain
how it works.

SECTION-E
24. (a) Define electric flux. Is it a scalar or a vector q

quantity ? d/2
A point charge q is at a distance of d/2
directly above the centre of a square of O
side d, as shown in the figure. Use Gauss’
law to obtain the expression for the electric
flux through the square.
(b) If the point charge is now moved to a d
distance’d’ from the centre of the square and the side of the square is doubled,
explain how the electric flux will be affected.
OR

(a) Use Gauss’ law to derive the expression for the electric field ( E ) due to a
straight uniformly charged infinite line of charge density  C/m.
(b) Draw a graph to show the variation of E with perpendicular distance r from the
line of charge.
(c) Find the work done in bringing a charge q from perpendicular distance r from
the line of charge.
A device X is connected acrons an ac source of voltage V = V0 sin t. The current
 
through X is given as I = I0 sin  t +  .
2
(a) Identify the device X and write the expression for its reactance.
(b) Draw graphs showing variation of variation of voltage and current with time
over one cycle of ac, for X.
(c) How does the reactance of the device X vary with frequency of the ac? Show
this variation graphically.
(d) Draw the phasor diagram for the device X.
26. (a) Draw a ray diagram to show image formation when the concave mirror produces
a real, inverted and magnified image of the object.
(b) Obtain the mirror formula and write the expression for the linear magnification.
(c) Explain two advantages of a reflecting telescope over a refracting telescope.
OR
Sample Papers 281

(a) Define a wavefront. Using Huygens’ principle, verify the laws of reflection at
a plane surface.
(b) In a single slit diffraction experiment, the width of the slit is made double the
original width. How does this affect the size and intensity of the central diffraction
band ? Explain.
(c) When a tiny circular obstacle is placed in the path of light from a distant source,
a bright spot is seen at the centre of the obstacle. Explain why.

CBSE (DELHT)–2018
PHYSICS MARKING SCHEME
Q.NO. Expected Answer/Value Points Marks Total Marks
1. Electron
(No explanation need to be given. If a student
only writes the formula for y of charged particle
q
(or vc  ) award ½ mark) 1 1
m
2. (a) Ultra violet rays ½
(b) Ultra violet rays / Laser ½ 1
3.
(The graph l2 corresponds to radiation of

higher intensity ½
[Note: Deduct this ½ mark if the student does not
show the two graphs starting form the same point.]
(Also accept if the student just puts some indicative
marks, or words, (like cross, higher intensity) 1
-on the graph itself.
4. Daughter nucleus 1 1
Sample Papers 283

(SECTION - B)
6. Formula
Staling that currents are equal
Ratio of powers
Power = I2R
(The current, in the two bulbs, is the same as
they are connected in series.
P1 I 2 R1 R1
 
P2 I 2 R2 R2
1
=
2
7. Writing the equation 1 mark
Finding the current 1 mark
By Kirchoff s law, we have, for the loop ABCD,

+200 – 38i – 1(0) = 0
190
 i= A = 5A 1
38
Alternatively:
Finding the Net emf 1 mark

V
Stating that I = ½ mark
R
Calculating I ½ mark

The two cells being in ‘opposition’,
 net mf = (200 – 10)V = 190 V
V
Now I = 1
R
[Note: Some students may use the formulae
 1  2
= r  r  r , and
1 2
(r1r2 )
r = (r1  r2 )
For two cells connected in parallel
They may then say that r = 0;
 is indeterminate and hence
I is also indeterminate
Award full marks (2) to students giving
this line of reasoning.
OR
Stating the formula
Calculating r
(a) Reason for calling IF rays as heat rays 1 mark
(b) Explanation for transport of momentum 1 mark
(a) Infrared rays are readily absorbed by the (water)
molecules in most of the substances and hence
increases their thermal motion. (If the student
just writes that “infrared ray produce heating
effects”, award ½ mark only)
(b) Electromagnetic waves can set (and sustain)
charges in motion. Hence, they are said to
transport momentum.
(Also accept the following: Electromagnetic
waves are known to exert ‘radiation pressure’.
This pressure is due to the force associated with
rate of change of momentum. Hence, EM
waves transport momentum)
Sample Papers 285

9. Calculating the energy of the
incident photon 1 mark
Identifying the metals ½ mark
Reason ½ mark
The energy of a photon of incident radiation is

given by
hc
E=

6.63  10 –34  3  108

 E= eV
(412.5  10 –9 )  (1.6  10 –19 )
 3.01eV
Hence, only Na and K will show photoelectric
emission
[Note: Award this ½ mark even if the student
writes the name of only one of these metals]
Reason: The energy of the incident photon is
more than the work function of only these
two metals.

Section C
11. Finding the resultant force on a

charge Q 2 marks
Potential Energy of the system1 mark
a) Let us find the force on the charge Q at the point

C Force due to the other charge Q
1 Q2 1  Q2 
F1 =  (along AC)
4 0 ( a 2) 2 4 0  2a 2 
Force due to the charge q (at B), F2
1 qQ
= 4 a 2 along BC
0
Force due to the charge q (at D), F3
1 qQ
= along DC
4 0 a 2
Resultant of these two equal forces
1 qQ( 2)
= F23  (along AC)
4 0 a 2
Net force on charge Q ( at point C)
1 Q Q 
F = F1  F23  2 
 2q 
4 0 a  2 
This force is directed along AC
( For the charge Q, at the point A, the force will
have the same magnitude but will be directed
along CA)
[Note : Don’t deduct marks if the student does not
write the direction of the net force, F]
Sample Papers 287

(b) Potential energy of the system
1  qQ q2 Q2 
 4  
4 0  a a 2 a 2 
1  q2 Q2 
 4 qQ  
4 0  2

2
OR
(a) Finding the magnitude of the resultant
force on charge q 2 marks
(b) Finding the work done 1 mark
(a) Force on charge q due to the charge-4q
1  4q 2 
F1  , along AB
4 0  l 2 
Force on the charge q, due to the charge 2q
1  4q 2 
F2 =  , along CA
4 0  l 2 
The forces F1 and F2 are inclined to each

other at an angle of 120°
Hence, resultant electric force on charge q 
F2
2
F = F1  F 2 2  2 F1 F2 cos  A
120°
2
= F1  F 2 2  2 F1 F2 cos  120
2 
= F1  F 2 2 – F1F2 F1
 1 q2  –4q 2q
= 16  4 – 8 B l C
 4 0 l 2 
1  2 3q 2 
= 4  l 2 
0  

(b) Net P.E. of the system
1 q2
= . [–4  2 – 8]
4 0 l
(–10) q 2
=
4 0 l
10q 2 5q 2
 Work done = 
4 0l 2 0l
12. (a) Detintiton and SI unit of conductivity
½ + ½ marks
(b) Derivation of the expression for conductivity
1½ marks
Relation between current density and
electric field ½ mark
(a) The conductivity of a material equals the

reciprocal of the ace of its wire of unit length
and unit area of cross section.
[Alternatively:
The conductivity () of a material is the reciprocal
of its resistivity ()]
1
( = )

Its SI unit is
 e 
(b) The acceleration a = – E
m
The average drift velocity, vd, is given by
eE
vd = –
m
Sample Papers 289

( = average time between collisions/
relaxation time)
If n is the number of free electrons per unit
volumes, the current I is given by
I = neA | vd |
e2 A
= – n | E |
m
But I = | j | A (j = current density)
We, therefore, get
13. (a) Formula and
Calculation of work done in the two cases
(d) Calculation of torque in case (ii)
(a)
Work done = mB (cos1 – cos2)
(i) 1 = 60°, 2 = 90°
 work done = 2 (cos 60 – cos 90°)
1  1
= mB  – 0  mB
2 2
1
=  6  0.44 J = 1.32J
2
(ii) 1 = 60°, 2 = 180°
 work done = mB (cos 60° – cos 180°)
1  3
= mB  – (–1)  mB
2 2
3
=  6  0.44 J  3.96 J
2
[Also sccept calculations done through changes
in potential energy.]

(b)
 
Torpue = | m  B | = mB sin
For = 180°, we hvae
Torpue = 6 × 0.44 sin 180° = 0
[If the student straight away writes that the
torque is zero since magnetic moment and
magnetic field are anti parallel in this orientation,
award full 1 mark]
14. (a) Expression for Ampere’s circuital law ½ mark
Derivation of magnetic field inside the ring 1 mark
(d) Identification of the material ½ mark
Drawing the modification of the field pattern 1 mark
(a) From Ampere’s circuital law, we have,
 
 Bdi = 0rIenclosed
For the field inside the ring, we can write
 
 Bdi =  Bdl = B . 2r
(r = radius of the ring) using equation (i)
 B. 2r = 0r . (2rn)I
 B = 0r. nl
 1 1
[Award these    marks even if the result is written without giving the
2 2
derivation]
(b) The material is paramagnetic.
The field pattern gets modified as shown in the figure below.
15. (a) Diagram ½ mark
Polarisation by reflection 1 mark,
(b) Justification 1 mark
Writing yes/no ½ mark
Sample Papers 291

(a) The diagram, showing polarisation by reflection
is as shown. [Here the reflected and refracted
rays are at right angle to each other.]
Incident Reflected
  Air
 r =  – iB
2  iB
90°
 sin iB 
=   tan iB  r Refracted
 sin r 
MEDIUM
Thus light gets totally polarised by reflection
when it is incident at angle iB
(Brewster’s angle), where iB = tan–1 
(b) The angle of incidence, of the ray, on striking
the face AC is i = 60° (as from figure)
Also, relative refractive index of glass,
with respect ot the surrounding water, is
A
3
2 9
r = 4  8 Normal
3 60°
3 1.732 B C
Also sin i = sin 60° = 
2 2
= 0.866
For total internal reflection, the required critical
angle, in this case, is given by
1 8
sin ic =   0.89
 9
 i < ic
Hence the ray would not suffer total internal reflection
on striking the face AC
[The students-may just write the two conditions

needed for total internal reflection without analysis
of the given case, student may be awarded ( ½ + ½)
mark in such a case.]
16. (a) Finding the (modified) ratio of the maximum 2 marks
and minimum intensities
(b) Fringes obtained with white light 1 mark
(a) After the introduction of the glass sheet
(say, on the second slit), we have
I2 1
 50% 
I2 2
 Ratio of the amplitudes
a2 1 1
=  
a1 2 2
(b) The central fringe remains white.
2
I max  a1  a2 
Hence 
I min  a1 – a2 
2
 1 
1
 2
= 1 
1– 
 2
2
 2 1
=  
 2 1 
(b) The central fringe remains white.
No clear fringe pattern is seen after a few (coloured)
fringes on either side of the central fringe.
[Note : For part (a) of this question,
Sample Papers 293

The student may
(i) Just draw the diagram for the Young’s
double slit experiment.
Or (ii) Just state that the introduction of the glass
sheet would introduce an additional phase
difference and the position of the central
fringe would shift.
For all such answers, the student may be
awarded the full (2) marks for this part of
this question.]
17. Lens maker’s formula ½ mark
Formula for ‘combination of lenses’½ mark
Obtaining the expression for ½ marks
Let l denote the refractive index of the liquid.
When the image of the needle coincides with the
lens itself; its distance from the lens, equals the
relevant focal length.
With liquid layer present, the given set up, is
equivalent to a combination of the given (convex)
lens and a concavo plane / piano concave ‘liquid lens’.
1 1 1
We have  ( – 1)  – 
f  R1 R2 
1 1 1
and  
f  f1 f 2 
as per the given data, we then have
1 1 1 1 
  (1.5 – 1)  –
f2 y  R (– R ) 
1
=
R

1  1  1 –l 2
  ( l – 1)  –    
x  R y y y
l 2 1  2x – y 
  – 
x y y  xy 
 2x – y 
or l =  
x 
18. (a) Statement of Bohr’s postulate ½ mark
Explanation in terms of de Broglie hypothesis
(b) Finding the energy in the n = 4 level 1 mark
Estimating the frequency of the photon ½ mark
(a) Bohr’s postulate, for stable orbits, states

The electron, in an atom revolves around
the nucleus only in those orbits for which
its angular momentum is an integral multiple
h
of (h = Planck’s constant),’’’
2
h
[Also accept mvr = n. (n = 1,2,3 .....)
2
As per de Broglie’s hyothesis
h h
= 
p mv
For a stable orbit, we must have circumference

of the orbit =nl (n = 1,2,3,.....)
 2r = n.mv
nh
or mvr =
2
Sample Papers 295

Thus de –Broglie showed that formation of
stationary pattern for intergral ‘n’ gives rise
to stability of the atom.
This is nothing but the Bohr’s postulate
– E0 E
(b) Energy in the n = 4 level = 2
– 0
4 16
 Energy required to take the electron form
 E0 
the ground state, to the n = 4 level =  –  –  – E0 
16
–1  16
=
16
15
= E0
16
15
=  13.6  1.6  10 –19 J
16
Let the frequency of the photon be v, we have
15
hv =  13.6  1.6  10 –19
16
15  13.6  1.6  10 –19

v= Hz
16  6.63  10 –34
= 3.1 × 1015 Hz
(Also accept 3 × 1015 Hz)
19. (a) Drawing the plot 1 mark
Explaining the process of
Nuclear fission and Nuclear fusion ½/½ mark
(c) Finding the required time
(a) The plot of (B.F / nucleon) verses mass number

is as shown.

[Note: Also accept the diagram that just shows the
general shape of the graph.]
From the plot we note that
(i) During nuclear Fission
A heavy nucleus in the larger mass region ( A>200)
breaks into two middle level nuclei, resulting in an
increase in B.E/ nucleon. This results in a release
of energy.
(ii) During nuclear fusion
Light nuclei in the lower mass region (A<20 ) fuse to
form a nucleus having higher B.E / nucleon. Hence
Energy gets released.
[Alternatively: As per the plot: During nuclear Fission
as well as nuclear fusion, the final value of B.E/
nucleon is more than its initial value. Hence energy gets
released in both these processes. ]
(b) We have
3.125 1 1
3.125% =   5
100 32 2
Half life = 10 years
 Required time = 5 × 10 years
= 50 Years
Sample Papers 297

20. (a) Drawing the labeled circuit diagram 1 mark
Explanation of working 1 mark
(a) The labeled circuit diagram, for the required circuit is as shown.
The working of this circuit is as follows:

(i) During one half cycle( of the input ac) diode
D1 alone gets forward biased and conducts.
During the other half cycle, it is aodeD2 (alone)
that conducts.
Because of the use of the center tapped transformer
the current though the lead flows in the same
direction in both the half cycles.
Hence we get a unidirectional/ direct current through
the load, when the input is alternating current,
[Alternatively: The student may just use the following
diagrams to explain the working.]

SECTION E
24. (a) Definition of electric flux1 mark
Stating scalar/ vector ½ mark
Gauss’s Theorem ½ mark
Derivation of the expression for electric flux
(b) Explanation of change in electric flux
(a) Electric flux through a given surface is
defined as the dot product of electric field
and area vector over that surface.
 
Alternatively    E.dS
s
Also accept
Electric flux, through a surface equals the surface
integral of the electric field over that surface.
It is a scalar quantity
Constructing a cube of side’d’ so that charge ‘q’

gets placed within of this cube (Gaussian surface )
According to Gauss ‘s law the Electric flux
Charge enclosed
=
ε0
This is the total flux through all the six faces of the
cube. Hence electric flux through the square
Sample Papers 299

(b) If the charge is moved to a distance d and
the side of the square is doubled the cube will
be constructed to have a side 2d but the total
charge enclosed in it will remain the same.
Hence the total flux through the cube and
therefore the flux through the square will
remain the same as before.
[Deduct 1 mark if the student just writes No
change /not affected without giving any
explanation.]
OR
(a) Derivation of the expression for electric field E
(b) Graph to show the required variation of
the electric field
(c) Calculation of work done
(a)
To calculate the electric field, imagine a cylindrical

Gaussian surface, since the field is everywhere radial,
flux through two ends of the. Cylindrical Gaussian
surface is zero.
= Flux through the curved cylindrical part of the surface.
= E × 2rl

Applying Gauss’s Law
q enclosed
Flux  =
ε0
Total charge enclosed
= Linear charge density × l
= l
L
 = ............(ii)
0
Using Equations (i) & ii
l
E × 2  rl =
0

 E=
2 0 r
In vector notation
 
E n
2 0 r
(where n is a unit vector normal to the charge)
(b) The required graph is as shown:

E
r
(a) Work done in moving the charge ‘q’
Through a small displacement ‘qr’ .
 
dW = E.dr
 
dW = qE.dr
Sample Papers 301

= qEdrcos0

dW = q  2 r dr
0
Work done in moving the given charge from

r1 to r2(r2 > r1)
r2 r2
qdr
W =  dW   2 r
r1 r1 0
q
W = 2 [log e r2 – log e r1 ]
0
q  r2 
W= log e 
2 0 r1 
26. (a) Principle of ac generator working
Labeled diagram
Derivation of the expression for induced emf
(b) Calculation of potential difference
(a) The AC Generator works on the principle of
electromagnetic induction.
when the magnetic flux through a coil changes,
an emf is induced in it.
As the coil rotates in magnetic field the effective
area of the loop, (i.e. A cos ) exposed to the
magnetic field keeps on changing, hence magnetic
flux changes and an emf is induced.

When a coil is rotated with a constant angular
speed ‘’ , the angle ‘’ between the magnetic
 
field vector B and the area vector A , of the
coil at any instant ‘t’ equals cot;
(assuming  = O° at t = o)
As a result, the effective area of the coil exposed
to the magnetic fielc changes with time ; The
flux at any instant ‘t’ is given by
B = NBA cos  = NBA cos 
d
 The induced emf e = – N
dt
d
= – NBA (cos t )
dt
e = NBA  sin t
(b) Potential difference developed between
the ends of the wings ‘e’ = Blv
Given Velocity v = 900km/hour
= 250m/s
wing span’ (l) = 20 m
Vertical component of Earth’s magnetic field
Bv = BH tan 
= 5 × 10–4 (tan30°) tesla
 Potential difference
= 5 × 10–4 (tan30°) × 20 × 250
5  20  250  10 –4
= V
3
= 1.44 volt
Sample Papers 303

Or
(a) Identification of the device X
Expression for reactance
(b) Graphs of voltage and current with time 1+1
Variation of reactance with frequency
(Graphical variation)
(d) Phasor Diagram
(a) X : capacitor
1 1
Reactance Xc = 
 C 2uC
(a) v
i
t1  2 t
(c) Reactance of the capacitor varies in inverse
1
proportion to the freqency i.e., Xc 
u
XC

26. (a) Ray diagram to show the required image
formation 1 mark
(b) Derivation of mirror formula
Expression for linear magnification
(c) Two advantages of a reflecting telescope over
a refracting telescope
(a)
(b) In the above figure

 BAP and B’A’P are similar
BA NF
 
B ' A ' NF '
Similarly, MNF and B’A’P are similar
For the given figure, as per the sign convention,
(b) Advantages of reflecting telescope over refracting telescope
(i) Mechanical support is easier
(ii) Magnifying power is large
Sample Papers 305

(iii) Resolving power is large
(iv) Spherical aberration is reduced
(v) Free from chromatic aberration (any two)
OR
(a) Definition of wave front
Verification of laws of reflection
(b) Explanation of laws of reflection central maxima
(c) Explanation of the bright spot in the shadow of the obstacle
(a) The wave front may be defined as a surface of constant phase.

(Alternatively: The wave front is the loci of all points that are in the same
phase)
Let speed of the wave in the medium be ‘u’

Let the time taken by the wave front, to advance from point B to point C is ‘’
Let CE represent the reflected wave front
Distance AE = u = BC
AEC and ABC are congruent
BAC = ECA
 i = r
(b) Size of central maxima reduces to half,
(Size of central maxima = )
Intensity increases,

This is because the amount of light, entering the slit, has increased and the
area, over which it falls, decreases.
(Also accept if the student just writes that the intensity becomes four fold)
(c) This is because of diffraction of light.
Light gets diffracted by the tiny circular obstacle and reaches the centre of
the shadow of the obstacle.
[Alternatively:
There is as a maxima, at the centre of the obstacle, in the diffraction pattern
produced by it.]
Sample Papers 307

Sample Question Paper
Class XII –Physics
(Applicable for March 2019 Examination)
Time Allowed: 3 Hours Maximum Marks: 70

General Instructions
1. All questions are compulsory. There are 27 questions in all.
2. This question paper has yow sections: Section A, Section B, Section C and
Section D
3. Section A contains five questions of one mark each, Section B contains seven
questions of two marks each, Section C contains twelve questions of three
marks each, and Section D contains three questions of five marks each.
4. There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in
one question of two marks, one question of three marks and all the three
questions of five marks weightage. You have to attempt only one of the choices
in such questions.
5. You may use the following values ofphysical constants wherever necessary.
c = 3 × 108 m/s
h = 6.63 × 10–34Js
e = 1.6 × 10–19 C
0 = 4 × 10–7 T m–2
0 = 8.854 × 10–12 C2N–1m–2
1
= 9 × 109 Nm2C2
4 0
me = 9.1 × 10–31 kg
mass of neutron = 1.675 × 10–27 kg
mass of proton = 1.673 × 10–27 kg
Avogadro’s number = 6.023 × 1023 per gram mole

Section A
1. Figure shows a point charge +Q, located at a distance R/

2 from the centre of a spherical metal shell. Draw the
electric field lines for the given system. (1)
2. Give an example of a material each for which temperature

coefficient of resistivity is (i) positive, (ii) negative.
3. State the factors on which the refractive index of
a material medium for a given wavelength
depends.
4. Sketch the emergent wavefront.
5. In the wave picture of light, intensity of light is
determined by square of the amplitude of wave. What determines the intensity of
light in the photon picture of light?
Section B
6. (a) An alternating voltage E = E0 sint is applied to a circuit containing a resistor R

connected in series with a black box. The current in the circuit is found to be I
= I0 sin (t + /4).
(i) State whether the element in the black box is a capacitor or inductor.
(ii) Draw the corresponding phasor diagram and find the impedance in terms of R.
7. The magnetic field in a plane electromagnetic wave is given by:
By = 12 × 10–8 sin (1.20 × 107 z + 3.60 × 1015 t) T. Calculate the
(i) Energy density associated with the Electromagnetic wave
(ii) Speed. of the wave
8. A spherical convex surface of radius of curvature 20 cm, made of glass ( =
1.5) is placed in air. Find the position of the image formed, if a point object is
placed at 30 cm in front of the convex surface on the principal axis.
Sample Papers 309

9. Name the optoelectronic device used for detecting optical signals and mention the
biasing in which it is operated. Draw its I- V characteristics.
11. A monochromatic light source of power 5mW emits 8 X 1013 photons per second.
This light ejects photoelectrons from a metal surface. The stopping potential for
this set up is 2V. Calculate the work function of the metal. (2)
12. The following table shows some measurements of the decay rate of a radionuclide
sample. Find the disintegration constant. (2)
Time (min) lnR(Bq)
36 5.08
100 3.29
164 1.52
218 1.00
Section C
13. (a) How many electrons must be added to one plate and removed from the
other so as to store 25.0 J of energy in a 5.0 nF parallel plate capacitor?
(b) How would you modify this capacitor so that it can store 50.0 J of energy
without changing the charge on. its plates?

14. A point charge +Q is placed at the centre 0 of an uncharged hollow spherical
conductor of inner radius ‘a’ and outer radius ‘b’. Find the following:
(a) The magnitude and sign of the charge induced on the inner and outer surface
of the conducting shell.
a
(b) The magnitude of electric field vector at a distance (i) r = , and (ii) r = 2b,
2
from the centre of the shell.
15. The following table gives the length of three copper wires, their diameters, and
the applied potential difference across their ends. Arrange the wires in increasing
order according to the following:
(a) The magnitude of the electric field within them,
(b) The drift speed of electrons through them, and
(c) The current density within them.
Wire Length Diameter Potential

no. Difference
1 L 3d V
2 2L d V
3 3L 2d 2V
16. A musltirange voltmeter can be constructed by using a galvanometer circuit as

shown in the figure. We want to construct a voltmeter that can measure 2V,
20V and 200V using a galvanometer of resistance 10Q and that produces
maximum deflection for current of 1 mA. Find the value of Rl, R2 and R3 that
have to be used.
Sample Papers 311

17· Figure shows a metal .rod PQ of length /, resting on the smooth horizontal rails AB
positioned between the poles of a permanent magnet. The rails, rod and the magnetic
field B are in three mutually perpendicular directions. A galvanometer G connects
the rails through a key ‘k’. Assume the magnetic field to be uniform. Given the
resistance of the closed loop containing the rod is R.
(i) Suppose K is open and the rod is moved with a speed v in the direction shown.
Find the polarity and the magnitude of induced emf.
(ii) With K open and the rod moving uniformly, there is no net force on the electrons
in the rod PQ even though they do experience magnetic force due to the motion
of the rod. Explain.
(iii) What is the induced emf in the moving rod if the magnetic field is parallel to the
rails instead of being perpendicular?
18. With the help of a diagram, explain the principle of a device which changes a low
voltage into a high voltage but does not violate the law of conservation of energy.
Give any one reason why the device may not be 100% efficient.

19. In a double slit experiment, the distance between the slits is 3 mm and the slits are 2
m away from the screen. Two interference patterns can be seen on the screen one
due to light with wavelength 480 nm, and the other due to light with wavelength
600 nm. What is the separation on the screen between the fifth order bright fringes
of the two interference patterns?
20. What do you understand by the statement ‘Light from the sun is unpolarised’.
Explain how does sunlight gets polarized by the process of scattering?
21. Explain how does (i) photoelectric current and (ii) kinetic energy of the
photoelectrons emitted in a photocell vary if the frequency of incident radiation
is doubled, but keeping the intensity same? Show the graphical variation in
the above two cases.
OR
(i) Name the experiment which confirms the existence of wave nature of
electrons. Derive the expression for de-Broglie wavelength of an electron
moving under a potential difference of V volts, (ii) An electron and a proton
have the same Kinetic Energy. Which of these particles has the shorter de-
Broglie wavelength?
23. The energy levels of an atom of element X are shown in the diagram. Which
one of the level transitions will result in the emission of photons of wavelength
620 nm? Support your answer with mathematical calculations.
24. Draw a graph showing the variation of binding energy per nucleon versus the
mass number A. Explain with the help of this graph, the release of energy in
the process of nuclear fission and fusion.
Sample Papers 313

25. A message signal of frequency 20 KHz and peak voltage of 20 volts is used to
modulate a carrier signal of frequency 2 MHz and peak voltage of 40 volts.
Determine (i) modulation index, (ii) the side bands produced. Draw the
corresponding frequency spectrum of amplitude modulated signal.
25. (a) A particle of charge q is moving with velocity v in the presence of crossed
Electric field E and Magnetic field B as shown. Write the condition under
which the particle will continue moving along x- axis. How would the
trajectory of the particle be affected if the electric field is switched off?
(b) A horizontal wire AB of length T and mass ‘m’ carries a steady current l 1;
free to move in vertical plane is in equilibrium at a height of ‘h’ over
another parallel long wire CD carrying a steady current l2, which is fixed
in a horizontal plane as shown. Derive the expression for the force acting
per unit length on the wire AB and write the condition for which wire AB
is in equilibrium.
(a) An electron in the ground state of Hydrogen atom is revolving in a circular

orbit of radius R. Obtain the expression for the orbital magnetic moment
of the electron in (b) Draw the magnetic field lines for a current carrying
solenoid when a rod made of (i) copper, (ii) aluminium and (iii) iron are
inserted within the solenoid as shown.

26. (a) Draw a ray diagram of compound microscope for the final image formed at
least distance of distinct vision?
(b) An angular magnification of 30X is desired using an objective of focal length
1.25 cm and an eye piece of focal length 5 cm. How will you set up the
compound microscope for the final image formed at least distance of distinct
vision?
OR
(a) Draw a ray diagram of an astronomical telescope for the final image formed at
least distance of distinct vision?
(b) An astronomical telescope has an angular magnification of magnitude 5 for
distant objects. The separation between the objective and an eye piece is 36
cm and the final image is formed at infinity. Calculate the focal length of the
objective and the focal length of the eye piece?
Sample Papers 315

Class XII Physics
Sample Question Paper
(Applicable of March 2019 Examination)
(Marking Scheme)
Time Allowed : 3 Hours Maximum Marks : 70
Section A
1. Inside
Outside
2. (i) Cu (metals, alloys)

(ii) Si (semicondctor)
3. Factors are:
(i) Magnetic permeability of the medium
(ii) Electric permittivity of the medium
4. Diagram
5. In photon picture, intensity is determined by the number of photons crossing per

unit time.

6. As the current leads the voltage by , the element used in
4
black box is a ‘capacitor’. (½)
(ii) Phasor diagram
B2
7. (i) Energy density  = ,
0

(ii) Speed =
k
speed = 3 × 108 m/s.

8. correct sign convention
1.0/v – 1.5/–30 = (1.0 – 1.5) / 20
v = –13.3 cm
9. Photodiode (½) Reverse biasing (½)
l-V characteristics NCERT page no. 487. (1)
11. P = 5 X 10 W –3
p
E  6.25  10 19 J (½)
n
E  3.9 eV (½)
W0  E  eV0 (½)
 (3.9  2) eV0
W0  1.9 eV. (½)
12. R = Ro e  t
ln R = ln Ro – t (½)
ln R = – t + ln Ro
slope of ln R v/s. t is ‘-  ’ (½)
0  1.52
  (½)
210  254
  0.038 min ute 1 (½)
13. (a) C = 5 ×10-9 F, U = 25 J

U= Q2/2C (½)
Q2 = 2 U C = 2 ×25 ×5 × 10-9
Q = 5 × 10-4 C (½)
Q=ne (½)
Q
n  3.125  1015 electrons . (½)
e
Sample Papers 317

0 A
(b) Without changing charge on the plates, we can make C half. C = , i.e.
d
double the plate separation or inserting dielectric of dielectric of a value
such that C becomes. (1)
14. (a) As the electrostatic field inside a conductor is zero, using Gauss’s law,
charge on the inner surface of the shell = -Q (½)
Charge on the outer surface of the shell = +Q (½)
(b) To show using Gauss’s law expression
Expression for electric field for radius, (1)
Expression for electric field for radius, (1)
V V 2V
15. (i) E1  , E2  , E3  (½)
L 2L 3L
E2  E3  E1 (½)
(ii) Vd  E (½)
Vd2  Vd3  Vd1 (½)
(iii) I  nAe Vd / J  E (½)
J  n e Vd
J2  J3  J1 . (½)
16. NCERT Exemplar Q4.21 R1, R2, R3 (each 1 mark)
17. NCERT pg no. 301 Q6.14 (1 mark each part)
18. Device : Transformer (½)
Diagram on page number 260 NCERT part I (1)
Principle: statement of mutual induction (1)
Efficiency: Assuming no energy losses, the transformer is 100% efficient i.e. IPVP=
IsVs (½)
19.  = .D/d (½)
5 bright = 51 = 5D/d = 5 × 480 × 10 × 2 / 3 × 10 = 16 × 10 m
th –9 –3 –4
(1)
5th bright = 52 = S1D/d = 5 × 600 × 10–9 × 2 / 3 × 10–3 = 20 × 10–4 m (1)
distance between two 5th bright fringes = (20 – 16) × 10 = 4 × 10 m
–4 –4
(½)

20. ‘Light from the sun is unpolarised’ means the electric field vector vibrates in all
possible directions in the transverse plane rapidly and randomly. (1)
Holarisation of sunlight by the method of scattering: page number 379 of NCERT
part II : Diagram + explanation. (1+1)
21. (i) Page no. 391 figure 11.4 + explanation (½+1)
(ii) Page no. 392 + explanation (½+1)
OR
(i) Davisson-Germer experiment (½)
An electron of charge e, mass m accelerated through a potential difference of v
volts, Kinetic energy equals the work done (eV) on it by the electric field:
K = eV (½)
p2
K = p= (2mk )
2m
(ii) p = (2meV )
the de- Broglie wavelength l of the electron is :
h
 =
p
1
For same KE, 
m
(ii) For same KE, l a ….
As mass of proton is greater than that of electron, pe. (½)
22. E = hc /  = 6.6. × 10–34 × 3 × 108 / 620 × 10–9 (1)
= 3.2 × l0 J
–19
(½)
= 3.2 × 10–19 / 1.6 × 10–19 = 2 eV (½)
This corresponds to the-transition “D” (1)
23. NCERT figure 13.1 on page no. 444 (1)
Fission (1), Fusion (1)
24. (i) Modulation Index = Am/ Ac = 20/40 = 0.5 (½ + ½)
The side bands are. (2000 + 20) KHz
= 2020 KHz and (2000 - 20) KHz
Sample Papers 319
= 1980 KHz (½ + ½)
Amplitude versus w for amplitude modulated signal: page number 525 NCERT
part (ii) Figure 15.9, Ac = 40 volts, Ac/2 = 10 volts. (1)
25. (a) Condition qE = qvB (½)
E
v=
B
Trajectory becomes helical about the direction of magnetic field (1)
(b) To derive the expression of magnetic force acting per unit length of the wire
Fm μ 01112
= , upwards on wire AB(2)
l 2πh
At equilibrium Magnetic Force per unit length = mass per unit length X g
0 I1 I 2 m
= g (1)
2h l
OR
nh
(a) Using the condition mvr = (½)
2
h
For H-atom n = I, V =
2mr
2r
Time period T =
v
4 2 mr 2 Q eh
   , I   2 2 (½)
h T 4 mr
M = IA (½)
 eh 
M =  2
(r 2 ) (1)
4 mr 
2
eh
M= (½)
4m

(b) Diagram for magnetic field lines Cu-diamagnetic (1)
Al- Paramagnetic (1)
Fe- Ferromagnetic (1)
26. (a) Diagram (2) + labelling (½)
(b) me = 1 + 25/5 = 6 (½)
m0 = 30 / me = 5 (½)
m0 = v0 / -u0v0 = -5 u0
1/f0 = l/v0-l/u0f0 = -(5/6) u0 (½)
u0 = 1.5 cm , v0 = 7.5 cm
ue = -4.17cm (½)
Length of the tube = ue + v0 = 11.67 cm (½)
OR
(a) Diagram (2) + labelling (½)
(b) m = -f0/fe (½)
f0 = 5fe (½)
L = f0 + fe (½)
fe = 36/6 = 6cm (½)
f0 = 30 cm (½)
27. (a) circuit diagram (1)
OR
Diagram (1½)
Sample Papers 321

Practice Paper
Class XII –Physics
Time Allowed: 3 Hours Maximum Marks: 70

(ii) This question paper has four sections A, B, C and D.
(iii) Section A contains ‘20’ questions of ‘1’ mark each,
Section B contains ‘7’ questions of ‘2’ marks each,
Section C contains ‘7’ questions of ‘3’ marks each,
Section D contains ‘3’ questions of ‘5’ marks each,
(iv) There is no overall choice. However internal choice is provided in some questions
of each section.
C = 3 × 108 m/s
h = 6.63 × 10–34 JS
e = 1.6 × 10–19 C
u0 = 4 × 10–7 T mA–1
E0 = 8.854 × 10–12 C2 N–1 m–2
1
= 9 × 109 Nm2C–2
4 0
mass of electron = 9.1 × 10–13 Kg

mass of Neutron = 1.675 × 10–27 Kg
mass of proton = 1.673 × 10–27 Kg
Avagadro's number = 6.023 × 1023 per gram mole.

Section : A
1. How does the energy of dipole change when it is rotated from unstable
equilibrium to stable equilibrium in uniform Electric field?
2. The vertical component of Earth's magnetic field at a place is 3 times
the horizontal component, what is the value of dip at that place?
3. Name the type of biasing used in diode in the following circuit diagram
(–10V) (–5V)
A B
4. What is the ratio of radii of the orbits corresponding to first excited state
and ground state of hydrogen atom?
5. Arrange the following e.m. waves in descending order of wavelength.
(Gamma ( ray),. UV radiation, microwaves)
Or
Name the two physical quantities which are imparted by an em wave to a
surface on which it falls.
6. The power factor of an a.c. circuit is 0.5. What will be the phase difference
between voltage and current in this circuit?
7. What is the function of radial magnetic field in moving coil galvanometer?
8. Draw the electric field versus distance for a spherical shell of radius R
and charge Q > 0 from centre to the r > R.
Or
What is the work done in moving a test charge ‘q’ through a distance of 1
cm along the equatorial axis of an electric dipole?
9. What is Doping in semiconductors?
Or
Write one use of photodiode.
10. In a single slit diffraction experiment the width of slit is reduced to half
of its original width. How does it affect the size of central maxima?
Practice Papers 323

11. The number of turns of a solenoid is doubled keeping the other factors
constant. How does the self inductance of the solenoid change?
12. A proton and an alpha particle has same de-Broglie wavelength. What will
be the ratio of kinetic energies of the two.
13. In the following figure, what is the potential difference between A and B?
A 10  2A 12V B
14. How does the angle of minimum deviation of a glass prism of refractive index.
1.5 change. If it is immersed in a liquid of refractive index of 1.3?
Or
If a ray of light propagates from rare to denser medium, how does its frequency
and wavelength change.
15. Name the radiations used for detecting fake currency notes?
16. Two point charges repel each other with a force F when placed in water of
dielectric constant 81. What will be the force between them when placed the
same distance apart in air?
17. Under what condition on electron will move undeflected in the presence of
crossed electric and magnetic fields?
Or
Write any two uses of eddy current.
18. A point charge Q > 0 is placed at ‘0’ as shown in Fig. what will be the value
of VA – VB.
Q>0
O A B
19. You are required to select a carbon resistor of resistance 47 K ± 10%

from a large collection. What should be the sequence of color bands
used to code it.
20. Which optical phenomenon is responsible for sparkling of diamond?

Section B
21. State Gauss's theorem is Electrostatics. A charge of 17.7 × 10 –4C is

distributed over a large sheet of area 200 m2. Calculate the electric field
intensity at a distance 20 cm from it in air.
22. What is induced e.m.f.? Write Faraday's law of electromagnetic induction.
Express it mathematically.
Or
A metallic rod of length ‘l’ is rotated with angular frequency of ‘w’ with
one end hinged at the centre and the other end at the circumference of a
circular metallic ring of radius ‘l’ about an axis passing through its centre
and perpendicular to the plane of ring. A constant and uniform magnetic
field ‘B’ parallel to the axis is present everywhere. Deduce an expression
for the emf between the centre and the metallic ring.
23. (a)Why do welders wear special glass goggles?
(b)Ultraviolet rays are used in LASIK eye surgery. Why?
24. Using Bohr's quantisation condition, show that the circumference of the
electron orbit in nth orbital state in hydrogen atom in n times the de-
Broglie wavelength associated with it.
25. Name the device which is used as a voltage regulator. Draw the necessary
circuit diagram and explain its working.
26. A galvanometer needs 50 mV for full scale deflection of 50 divisions. Find its
voltage sensitivity. What must be the galvanometer resistance if its current
sensitivity is 1 Div/A.
27. The value of ground state energy of hydrogen atom is – 13.6 eV.
(a)What does the negative sign signify?
(b)How much energy is required to take the electron from ground state to
first excited state.
Or
Practice Papers 325

Show that Nuclear density of a nucleus is independent of its mass number.
Section C
28. (a)Derive an expression for the work done in rotating on electric dipole of
dipole moment p in a uniform electric field ‘E’ from an orientation 1 to 2.
(b)Show that potential at a point on equational line of an electric dipole is
zero.
Or
(a)Obtain an expression for the energy stored in a parallel plate capacitor.
(b)A battery of 10 V is connected to a capacitor of 0.1 F. The battery is now
removed and the capacitor is then connected to a second uncharged capacitor
of same capacitance. Calculated the total energy stored in the system.
29. (a)What do you understand by power of a lens. Define its unit.
(b)A convex lens of focal length 25 cm is placed coaxially in contact with a
concave lens of focal length 20 cm.
Determine the power and Nature of Combination.
30. On the basis of Energy band diagrams distinguish between conductors,
insulators and semiconductors.
31. Plot a graph showing the variation of stopping potential with the frequency
of incident radiation for two difference photosensitive materials having
work function W1 and W2 (W1 > W2). On what factors does the (i) slope
(ii) intercept of lines depend?
32. (a)Define magnetic dipole moment. Give its S.I. unit.
(b)A circular coil of N turns and radius R carries a current I. It is unwound
and rewound to make a square coil of side a having same number of
turns N. Keeping the current I same, find the ratio of the magnetic moments
of a square and circular coil?
33. Using Huygen's principle, prove Snell's law of refraction of a plane
wave propagating from rarer to denser medium.

Or
(a) Draw a ray diagram to show the formation of the real image of a point
Object due to a convex spherical refracting surface, when the ray is
travelling from a rarer to denser medium.
(b) Using this diagram, derive a relation between object distance range
distance and radius of curvature of convex spherical surface.
34. (a) Write a relation between mean life and half life of a radioactive
sample.
(b) A radioactive sample contains 2.2 mg of pure 11C which has half life
period of 1224 seconds calculate:
(i) No. of atoms present initially.
(ii) The activity when 5 µg of the sample will be left.
SECTION D

35. (a) Derive the relation between current density ‘ j ’ and potential difference
V across a current carrying conductor of length ‘l’, area of cross section
‘A’ and the number density ‘n’ of free electrons.
(b) Estimate the average drift speed of conduction electrons in a copper
wire of cross-sectional area 1.0× 10–7 m2 carrying a current of 1.5 A.
The no. density of conduction electrons is 9 × 1028 m–3.
Or
(a) State the principle of working of a metre bridge.
(b) Which material is used for metre bridge wire and why.
(c) In a metre bridge shown in diagram, the null point is found 60 cm from
end A. If now a resistance of 5 is connected in series with S. The null
point is at 50 cm. Determine the value of R and S.
Practice Papers 327

R
S
G
A B
()
36. (a) With the help of a labelled diagram, describe briefly the underlying principle
and working of a step up transformer.
(b) Write any two sources of energy loss in a transformer.
(c) A step up transformer converts a low input voltage into a high voltage
output. Is law of conservation of energy valid explain.
Or
(a) A voltage V = Vm sin t is applied to a series LCR circuit. Derive
an expression for the average power dissipated over a cycle.
(b) Under what condition (i) no power is dissipated even though the
current flows throught the circuit (ii) maximum power is dissipated
in the circuit.
37. (a) In Young's double slit experiment, derive the condition for
constructive interference and (ii) destructive interference at a point
on the screen.
(b) A beam of light consisting of two wavelengths 800 nm and 600 nm
is used to obtain the interference fringes in a YDSE on a screen 1.4
m away. If the two slits are separated by 0.28 mm. Calculate the
least distance from the central bright maximum where the bright
fringes of the two wavelengths Coincide.
Or
(a) Explain with the help of a suitable ray diagram how an unpolarised
light can be polarised by reflection from a transparent medium.
Deduce the necessary condition for it.
(b) The refractive index of a medium is 3 . What is the angle of
refraction, if the unpolarised light is incident on it act the polarising
angle of the medium.

SOLUTIONS
1. u = PE (cos 180° – cos 0°) = – 2PE
V
2. tan  =  3
H
  = tan–1 3
  = 60°
3. As p is connected to move negative
 Diode is R.B.
4. r  n2
r1 22 4
 = 2 
r0 1 1
5. Microwaves, UV radiation, Gamma rays
Or
Energy and pressure.
6. cos  = 0.5
1
  = cso–1
2
  = 60°
7. It provide strong magnetic field so that torque actual on coil is max. i.e.,
NIAB.
8. Zero as V(equitional) = 0

Eo
9. Process of adding impurity in pure semiconductor in a controlled and small

quantity.
Or
Detection of optical signal.
Practice Papers 329
1
10. Double as b 
d
11. L  n2  Four times
h K.E p m2 4
12.  =   
2 mE K.E  mp 1
13. VA – VB = – 20 + 12 = – 8 V
1.5
14. µge = = 1.15 as µ decreases so m decreases
1.3
Or
Frequency same, wavelength decreases.
15. UV radiation
Fo
16. K =  Fo = KF = 81 F
Fm
or K = 81, Fm = F
E
17. v = Or Furnace, magnetic brakes or any other
B
1
18. VA – VB = positive as v 
r
19. Yellow, violet, orange, silver.
20. Total internal reflection.
1
21. Total electric flux over a closed surface in a free space is times the net
E0
charge enclosed within the surface.
Q 17.7  104
= = = 8.85 × 10–6 cm–2
A 200
 8.85  106
E=  = 0.5 × 106 NC–1
2E 0 2  8.85  10 12
22. The emf developed in a circuit when the flux linked with that circuit changes
is called induced emf.

Whenever a magnetic flux linked with the circuit. Changes on e.m.f. is induced
in the circuit which is equal to the rate of change of magnetic flux and lasts as
long as the change continues
d B
e= 
dt
Or X X X X
d B dA X X X X W
|e|= B
dt dt P Q
l 2 X X X X
= B
T
X X X X
2
l 1
|e|= B  Bl 2
2  / 2
23. (a)To protect their eyes from harmful UV radiation produced by welding.
(b)Because to its shorter wavelength there can be focussed into very narrow
beams.
nh
24. mvr = (Bohr quantisation condition)
2
nh
 2r =
mv
 h 
2r = ne   e  mV 
25. Zener diode
Practice Papers 331

Working : If the input voltage decreases, current I' and iz decreases. The
potential drop across R decreases without any change in potential across
zener diode as above vz the potential across zener diode is constant whatever
the current is. Hence we get a regulated voltage in output.
 50
26. VS =  = 103 div/V
V 50  10 3
Current sensitivity(IS )
as VS =
R
IS 1
 R= = = 10–3 .
VS 103
27. (a)That the electron is bound to the nucleus or the force between electron
and nucleus of atom is attractive.
13.6
E= 
n2
 13.6
 Energy of first excited state = = – 3.4 eV
22
 E = E2 – E1 = – 3.4 – (– 13.6) = 10.2 eV.
Or
R = R0A1/3 ....(1)
Mass of nucleus
Density of nucleus =
Volume of nucleus
Au 3Au
= 4  [From eqn. (1)
R 3 4R 30 A
3
where [ u = 1.66 × 10–27] kg and R0 = 1.2 fm
3u
 Density of nucleus = = constant
4R 30
2
28. (a) W=  1
d 
2   
=  1
PE sin d  [As   P  E ]
= PE   cos 12

W = – PE[cos 2 – cos 1]
V = V–q + V+ q
q q
=  =0
2 2
4E 0 r  q 4 E 0 r 2  q 2
Or
Q
(b) U=W= 0 Vdq
1 Q  q
=
C 0 qdq  V  C 
Q
1  q2 
=  
C  2 0
Q2
U=
2C
1 1
or U= CV 2  QV [Q = CV]
2 2
(b) V1 = 10 V, V2 = 0, C1 = C2 = 0.1 F
C1V1 +C 2 V2
Common potential V=
C1 +V2
0.1  10  0.1  0
= = 5V
0.1  0.1
1 1
 Total energy stored U = (C1 + C2) V2 = (0.1 + 0.1) × 52
2 2
Practice Papers 333

= 2.5 J
29. (a) The degree of convergence and divergence of a ray is mathematically P =
1
where ‘f’ is measured in metre
f
100
(b) P1 =   4D
25
100
P2 =  5D
 20
P = P1 + P2 = (4 – 5)D = – 1D
Nature of combination is concave (Diverging)
30. Fig.
Fig. 14.60

31. A graph showing the variation of stopping
potential V0 with the frequency  of incident
radiation for two different photosensitive
materials having work functions W1 and W2
(W1 > W2) have been shown. The graph are
straight lines as shown.
(i) Slope of the V0 –  lines is same for both
h
materials and has a value , where h =
e
Planck's constant and e = electron charge.
(ii) Intercept of V0 –  line along -axis depends on the work function or the
W
threshold frequency 0 of the photosensitive material where 0 = .
h
32. (a) The magnetic moment of a given coil of ‘N’ no. of turns, A = Area of
cross section and carrying a current I is defined as
m = NIA unit = Am2
(b) Magnetic moment of circular coil of N turns and radius R carrying a
current I
m1 = NA1I = NR2I
When the coil is unwound and is rewound to make another square coil of
side ‘a’ and number of turns N, as total length of wire remains constant, we
have
N2R = N.4a
R
 a=
2
 Magnetic moment of square coil for same current I
2
R 2R 2
m2 = NA2I = Na2I = N   I  N I
2 4
m2 
 =
m1 4
Practice Papers 335

33. Consider a plane surface XY separating a rarer medium of refractive index
n1 from a denser medium of refractive index n2. Let c1 and c2 be the values
of speed of light in the two media. AB is a plane wavefront incident on XY at
an angle i. Let at a given instant the end A of wavefront just strikes the
surface XY but the other end B has still to cover a path BC. If it takes time t,
then BC = C1t.
Fig. 10.15
According to Huygen's principle point A meanwhile begins to emit secondary
wavelets which will cover a distance c2t in second medium in time t. Draw a
circular arc with A as centre and c2t as radius and draw a tangent CD from
point C on this arc. Then CD is the refracted wavefront, which advances in
the direction of rays 1 2. The refracted wavefront subtends an angle r from
surface XY.
BC c1t
Now in ABC sin i = 
AC AC
AD c2t
and in ADC sin r = 
AC AC
sin i c t /AC c1 n
 = 1  = a constant = 2 = n21
sin r c2t /AC c2 n1
which is Snell's law of refraction.

Or
Refraction formula : Consider a spherical surface XPY, convex towards

the rarer medium. As shown in Figure for a point object situated in rarer
medium of refractive index n1, the image is formed in desier medium of
refractive index n2 at point I. If i and r be the angles of incidence and refraction
respectively, then from Snell's law
sin i n
= 2
sin r n1
Fig. 9.96
or n1 sin i = n2 sin r
and for small aperture angles i and r are small and therefore sin i  i and sin
r  r, hence
n1i = n2r
From OAC, i=a+
and from  IAC,  =  + r or r =  – 
 n1( + ) = n2( – )
Again for spherical surface of small aperture angles ,  and  are small,
hence
AN AN
 = tan  =  ,
ON OP
AN AN
 = tan  =  ,
IN PI
AN AN
and  = tan  =  ,
NC PC
Substituting these values of ,  and  in (ii), we have
Practice Papers 337

 AN AN   AN AN 
n1   = n2  
 OP PC   PC PI 
n1 n n n
or  1 = 2  2
OP PC PC PI
As per sign convention followed, OP = – u, PC = + R and PI = + v, hence,
equation (iii) becomes
n1 n n2 n
 1 =  2
( u ) ( R) ( R) ( v)
n2 n1 n n
or  = 2 1
v u R
which is the relation between object distance u, image distance v and the
radius R of the given spherical surface.
34. (a)Half life = 0.693 × mean life
(b) (i) As 11 g of 116 C contains NA = 6.023 × 1023 atoms, hence number of
atoms present initially in 2.2 mg = 2.2 × 10–3 g of sample
2.2  103  6.023  1023
N0 = = 1.2046 × 1020
11
(ii) Number of atoms actually present in 5µg = 5 × 10–6 g of sample
5  106  6.023  1023 5  6.023
N=   1017
11 11
0.6931 0.6931 –1
and decay constant = = s
T1/ 2 1224
0.6931 5  6.023
 Activity of the sampleR = N =   1017
1224 11
= 1.55 × 1014 Bq
35. (a)We know that in terms of drift velocity vd of conduction electrons, the
current flowing through a conductor is expressed as :
I = nAe vd
eE
and vd =  , where E is the applied electric field and t the relaxation time
m
for conduction electrons.
 eE  nAe 2
 I = nAe   = E
m  m
If V be the potential difference across the ends of current carrying conductor
V
of length l, then E = and hence
l
nAe 2 V nAe2 
I=   V
m l ml
I ne 2 
 Current density j=  V
A ml
(b) Here A = 1.0 × 10–7 m2
I = 1.5 A, n = 9 × 1028 m–3
and e = 1.6 × 10–19 C
 I = n A evd
I 15
 Average drift speed vd = 
nAe 9  10 28  1.0  10 7  1.6  10 19
= 1.04 × 10–3 ms–1 or 1.04 mm s–1
Or
(a)It is based on the principle of wheatstone bridge that when bridge is
balanced then
P R
=
Q S
(b)We prefer manganin material for the metre bridge wire because its resistivity
is quite high and resistivity does not change with change in temperature.
R 60 60 3
=  
S (100  60) 40 2
3
 R= S
2
When a resistance of 5 is connected in series with S the effective resistance
becomes (S + 5)W. As now null point occurs at 50 cm, hence
Practice Papers 339

R 50 cm 50
=  1
(S + 5) (100  50) cm 50
 R=S+5
 S = 10  and R = 15 
36. (a)
Principle : It is based on mutual induction working.

Theory and Working : When an alternating emf/voltage source is applied
across the P coil, the input current and, hence, magnetic flux through P
coil keeps on changing with time. The changing magnetic flux gets linked
up with S coil through the iron core, which in turn produces induced
voltage across the secondary coil. If coupling of two coils is good then
all flux lines across P coil link up with S coil too. If at any time, the flux
linked per unit turn of primary be B, then
Total magnetic flux of P coil, P = Np. fB [where Np = Total number of
turns in P coil] and instantaneous value of induced emf in P coil, p =
d p d B
  N p
dt dt
If total number of turns in S coil be Ns, then magnetic flux of S coil, s =

Ns . B
and instantaneous value of induced emf in S coil,

d s d
s =    Ns B
dt dt
For an ideal transformer | p | = input voltage Vp and s = Vs = output
voltage obtained across secondary coil. Then,
s Vs N
=  s
p Vp N p
Again for an ideal transformer input power = output power

 Vp · Ip = Vs · Is
Vs Ip Ns
 =  = k (the transformer ratio)
Vp Is Np
Ip
For a step up transformer Vs = kVp but Is = . It can be shown that input
k
and ouput alternating voltages are in mutually opposite phase.
However, for a practically transformer
output power Vs  I s
Efficiency  = 
input power Vp  I p
(c)Yes, because when V is increased in output I decreases keeping power

same.
Or
Let, in general, applied voltage and current flowing in a LCR series a.c.
circuit be given by
V = Vm sin t and I = Im sin (t – )
 Instantaneous powerP = VI = Vm sin t · Im sin (t – )
= Vm Im sin t · [sin2 t cos  – cos t sin
]
Practice Papers 341

1
= Vm Im [sin2 t cos  – sin 2 t sin ]
2
 Average power for one complete cycle of a.c.
 2 1 2 
P = Vm Im  (sin t ) cos   (sin t )sin  
 2 
1
But we know that average value of sin2t for a complete cycle is , whereas
2
average value of sin 2t for one complete cycle is zero. Hence,
1  1
P or Pav = VmIm  cos   = V I cos  = Vrms Irms
2  2 mm
cos 

(i)If phase difference  between V and I be (as for a pure inductor or
2

a pure capacitor or a series LC circuit) then cos  = cos = 0 and
2
hence average power dissipated in zero even though the current flows
through the circuit.
(ii)If phase difference  = 0° (as for a pure resistor or for a resonant
circuit) then cos  = cos 0° = 1 and hence average power Pav = Vrms Irms,
which is maximum power dissipated in the circuit.
37. (a)
Fig. 10.17

Fig. 10.18
2
 d
(S2P)2 = D2 +  x  
2
2
 d
and (S1P)2 = D2 +  x  
2
 d  
2
d 
2
 (S2P)2 – (S1P)2 =  D2   x      D 2   x    = 2xd
 2   2 
2 xd
or (S2P – S1P) =
(S2 P  S1 )
If x and d are very very small as compared to D, then (S2P + S1P) may be
considered as 2D. Hence
2 xd xd
[S2P – S1P] = 
2D D
For constructive interference, path difference must be an integer multiple of
xd
 i.e., = n, where n = 0, 1, 2, 3, .... etc.
D
nD
 x=
d
i.e., positions of various maxima (bright bands) will be given by :
D
x0 = 0, x1 = ,
d
2D 3D
x2 = , x3 = ...........
d d
Practice Papers 343

For destructive interference, path difference must be an odd multiple of
 xd 
i.e., = (2n – 1) , where n = 1, 2, 3, .... etc.
2 D 2
(2n  1)D
 x=
2d
i.e., positions of various minima (dark bands) will be given by :
(b) Here 1 = 800 nm, 2 = 600 nm, D = 1.4 m and d = 0.28 mm = 2.8 × 10–
4 m.
Let at a distance ‘x’ from central maxima the bright fringes due to 1 and
2 coincide first time. For this to happen
n1 = (n + 1)2, where n is an integer
n 1  800 nm 4
 = 1 
n  2 600 nm 3
 n=3
It means that at distance x, nth i.e., 3rd maxima for wavelength 1 is just
coinciding with (n + 1)th i.e., 4th maxima for wavelength 2.
nD1 3  1.4  800  10 9
 x=  = 1.2 × 10–2 m or
d 2.8  10 4
1.2 cm
Or
Ordinary light propagating in a given direction consists of many
independent waves whose planes of vibration are randomly oriented in
all directions in a transverse plane. Such light is said to be unpolarised
light. In an unpolarised light the electric vector takes all possible
directions in the transverse plane.

Fig. 10.24
Plane polarised light can be obtained by reflection from a ramparts surface
(say a plane glass plate) when the light is incident on the surface at the polarising
angle ip.
In such a condition, the reflected light contains vibrations of electric vector
perpendicular to the plane of incidence only and is, thus, completely plane
polarised one.
When light is incident at the polarising angle ip, the reflected and refracted
rays make a right angle with each other i.e., r = (90° – ip). Therefore,
as per Snell's law, we have
sin i p sin i p sin i p
n=  =  tan i p
sin r sin(90  i p ) cos i p
The condition n = tan ip is referred as ‘Brewster's law’.

(b) µ = tan ip  3 = tan ip
ip = tan–1 3
ip = 60°
ip + r = 90°
 r = 90° – 60° = 30°
Practice Papers 345

PRACTICE PAPER
PHYSICS
Time : 3 Hrs. M.M.: 70
(ii) This question paper has four sections A, B, C and D.
(iii) Section A contains ‘20’ questions of ‘1’ mark each,
Section B contains ‘7’ questions of ‘2’ marks each,
Section C contains ‘7’ questions of ‘3’ marks each,
Section D contains ‘3’ questions of ‘5’ marks each,
(iv) There is no overall choice. However internal choice have been provided in
Five questions of one mark, two questions of two marks, two questions of
three marks and three questions of five marks weightage. You have to
attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
C = 3 × 108 m/s
h = 6.63 × 10–34 JS
e = 1.6 × 10–19 C
u0 = 4 × 10–7 T mA–1
0 = 8.854 × 10–12 C2 N–1 m–2
1
= 9 × 109 Nm2C–2
4 0
mass of electron = 9.1 × 10–13 Kg

mass of Neutron = 1.675 × 10–27 Kg
mass of proton = 1.673 × 10–27 Kg
Avagadro's number = 6.023 × 1023 per gram mole.

SECTION A
1. What orientation of an electric dipole in uniform electric field corresponds to
its (i) stable and (ii) unstable equilibrium.
2. The plot of the variation of potential difference across a combination of three
identical cells in series versus current is as shown below. What is the emf of
each cell?
I-V graph for a metallic wire at two different temperatures, T1 and T2 is as

shown in figure. Which of the two temperature is lower and why?
3. How will you produce EMW?

4. An equiconvex lens has refractive index 1.5. Write its focal length in terms of
radius of curvature?
Or
How does the power of a lens, vary, if the incident red light is replaced by
violet light?
5. In the given figure, charge + Q is placed at the centre of a dotted circle.
Practice Papers 347

Work done in taking another charge + q from A to B is W1 and from B to C
is W2. Which one of the following is correct : W1 > W2, W1 = W2 and W1
< W 2?
6. Plot a graph showing the variation of current ‘l’ versus resistance ‘R’,
connected to a cell of emf E and internal resistance ‘r’.
7. State the factor on which the refractive index of a material medium for a
given wavelength depends.
8. Sketch the emergent wavefront.
9. In the wave picture of light, intensity of light is determined by square of the

amplitude of wave. What determines the intensity of light in the photon picture
of light?
10. A point charge Q is placed at point O as shown in the figure. The potential
difference VA – VB is positive. Is the charge Q negative or positive?
Or
A hollow metal sphere of radius 5 cm is charged such that the potential on its
surface is 10 V. What is the potential at the centre of the sphere?

11. Give an example of a material each for which temperature coefficient of
resistivity is (i) positive, (ii) negative.
12. Sketch a schematic diagram depicting oscillating electric and magnetic fields
of an electromagnetic wave propagating along + z-direction.
13. For the same angle of incidence, the angle of refraction in two media A and B
are 25° and 30° respectively. In which one of the two media is the speed of
light lesser?
Or
The refractive index of a material of concave lens is n1. It is immersed in a
medium of refractive index n2. A parallel beam of light is incident on the lens.
Trace the path of emergent rays when n1 > n2.
14. The figure shows a plot of three curves a, b, c show in the variation of
photocurrent versus collector plate potential for three different intensities I1,
I2 and I3 having frequencies v1, v2 and v3 respectively incident on a
photosensitive surface.
Point out the two curves for which the incident radiations have same frequency
but different intensities.
15. Two metals A and B have work functions 4 eV and 10 eV respectively.
Which of the metal has higher threshold wavelength?
16. State the SI unit of the electric polarization vector?
17. Define temperature coefficient of resistivity.
Practice Papers 349

18. Name the electromagnetic waves that are widely used as a diagnostic tool in
medicine.
Or
Name the current which can flow even in the absence of electric charge.
19. A ray of light is incident on a medium with angle of incidence ‘i’ and is refracted
into a second medium with angle of refraction ‘r’. The graph of sin i versus
sin r is as shown. Find the ratio of the velocity of light in the first medium to
the velocity of light in the second medium.
20. Two particles have equal momenta. What is the ratio of their de-Broglie
wavelengths?
Or
Monochromatic light of frequency 0.6 × 1014 Hz is produced by a laser.
What is the energy of a photon in the light beam?
21. Six-lead-acid type of secondary cells each of emf 2V and internal resistance
0.015  joined in series to provide a supply to a resistance of 8.5 . What are
the current drawn from the supply and its terminal voltage?
22. An alternating voltage E = E0 sin t is applied to a circuit containing a resistor
R connected in series with a black box. The current in the circuit is found to
be I = I0 sin (t + /2).

(a)State whether the element in the black box is a capacitor or inductor.
(b)Draw the corresponding phasor diagram and find the impedance in terms
of R.
23. A network of resistors is connected to a 16 V battery with internal resistance
of 1 , as shown in the following figure. Compute the equivalent resistance
of the network.
Or
A 9V battery is connected in series with a resistor. The terminal voltage is
found to be 8 V. Current through the circuit is measured as 5A. What is the
internal resistance of the battery?
24. The diagram below shows a potentiometer set up. On touching the jockey
near to the end X of the potentiometer wire, the galvanometer pointer
deflects to left. On touching the jockey near to end Y of the potentiometer,
the galvanometer pointer again deflects to left but now by a larger amount.
Identify the fault in the circuit and explain, using appropriate equations
or otherwise, how it leads to such a one-sided deflection.
Practice Papers 351

Or
Following circuit was set up in a meter bridge experiment of determine the
value X of an unknown resistance.
(a) Write the formula to be used for finding X from the observations.
(b) If the resistance R is increased, what will happen to balancing length?
25. The figure shows two sinusoidal curves representing oscillating supply voltage
and current in an ac circuit.
Draw a phasor diagram to represent the current and supply voltage

appropriately as phasors. State the phase different between the two
quantities.
26. Compare the following :
(a) Wavelengths of the incident solar radiation absorbed by the earth's
surface and the radiation re-radiated by the earth.
(b) Tanning effect produced on the skin by UV radiation incident directly on
the skin and that coming through glass window.
27. A narrow slit is illuminated by a parallel beam of monochromatic light of

wavelength  equals to 6000 Å and the angular width of the central maxima
in the resulting diffraction pattern is measured. When the slit is next illuminated
by light of wavelength , the angular width decreases by 30%. Calculate the
value of the wavelength .
SECTION C
28. (a) How many electrons must be added to one plate and removed from the
other so as to sore 25.0 J of energy in a 5.0 nF parallel place capacitor?
(b) How would you modify this capacitor so that it can store 50.0 J of
energy without changing the charge on its plates?
29. A point charge + Q is placed at the centre O of an uncharged hollow
spherical conductor of inner radius ‘a’ and outer radius ‘b’. Find the
following:
(a) The magnitude and sign of the charge induced on the inner and outer
surface of he conducting shell.
a
(b) The magnitude of electric field vector at a distance (i) r = , and (ii) r =
2
2b, from the centre of the shell.
30. The following table gives he length of three copper wires, their diameters,
and the applied potential difference across their ends. Arrange the wires
in increasing order according to the following:
(a) The magnitude of the electric field within them,
(b) The drif speed of electrons through them, and
(c) The current density within them.
Practice Papers 353

Wire no. Length Diameter Potential difference
1 L 3d V
2 2L d V
3 3L 2d 2V
31. A multirange voltmeter can be constructed by using a galvanometer circuit as
shown in the figure. We want to construct a voltmeter that can measure 2V,
20V and 200V using a galvanometer of resistance 10 and that produces
maximum deflection for current of 1 mA. Find the value of R1, R2 and R3
that have to be used.
Or
Figure shows a metal rod PQ of length l, resting on the smooth horizontal
rails AB positioned between the poles of a permanent magnet. The rails,
rod and the magnetic field B are in three mutually perpendicular
directions. A galvanometer G connects the rails through a key ‘k’. Assume
the magnetic field to be uniform. Given the resistance of the closed loop
containing the rod is R.
(a) Suppose K is open and the rod is moved with a speed v in the
direction shown. Find the polarity and the magnitude of induced
emf.
(b) With K open and the rod moving uniformly, there is no net force on the
electrons in the rod PQ even though they do experience magnetic force
due to the motion of the rod. Explain.

(c)What is the induced emf in the moving rod if the magnetic field is parallel
to the rails instead of being perpendicular?
32. With the help of a diagram, explain the principle of a device which changes a
low voltage into a high voltage but does not violate the law of conservation of
energy. Give any one reason why the device may not be 100% efficient.
33. In a double slit experiment, the distance between the slits is 3 mm and the
slits are 2 m away from the screen. Two interference patterns can be seen on
the screen one due to light with wavelength 480 nm, and the other due to
light with wavelength 600 nm. What is the separation on the screen between
the fifth order bright fringes of the two interference patterns?
Or
What do you understand by the statement ‘Light from the sun is unpolarised’.
Explain how does sunlight gets polarized by the process of scattering?
34. Explain how does (i) photoelectric current and (ii) kinetic energy of the
photoelectrons emitted in a photocell vary if the frequency of incident
radiation is doubled, but keeping the intensity same? Show the graphical
variation in the above two cases.
Section D
35. (a) A particle of charge q is moving with velocity v in the presence of crossed
Electric field E and Magnetic field B as shown. Write the condition
under which the particle will continue moving along x-axis. How would
the trajectory of the particle be affected if the electric field is switched
off?
Practice Papers 355

(b) A horizontal wire AB of length ‘l’ and mass ‘m’ carries a steady current
I1, free to move in vertical plane in equilibrium at a height of ‘h’ over
another parallel long wire CD carrying a steady current I2 which is fixed
in a horizontal plane as shown. Derive the expression for the force acting
per unit length on the wire AB and write the condition for which wire AB
is in equilibrium.
Or
(a) An electron in the ground state of Hydrogen atom is revolving in a circular
orbit of radius R. Obtain the expression for the orbital magnetic moment
of the electron in terms of fundamental constants.
(b) Draw the magnetic field lines for a current carrying solenoid when a rod
made of (i) copper, (ii) aluminium and (iii) iron are inserted within the
solenoid
36. (a) There are two sets of apparatus of Young's double slit experiment. In set
A, the phase difference between the two waves emanatin from the slits

does not change with time, whereas in set B, the phase difference between
he two waves from the slits changes rapidly with time. What difference
will be observed in the pattern obtained on the screen in the two set
ups?
(b) Deduce the expression for the resultant intensity in both the above
mentioned set ups (A and B), assuming that the waves emanating from
the two slits have the same amplitude A and same wavelength l.
Or
(a) The two polaroids, in a given set up, are kept ‘crossed’ with respect to
each other. A third polaroid, now put in between these two polaroids,
The third poland can be rotated. Find an expression for the dependence
of the intensity of light I, transmitted by the system, on the angle between
the pass axis of first and the third polaroid. Draw a graph showing the
dependence of Intensity on angle of rotation.
(b) When an unpolarized light is incident on a plane glass surface, find the
expression for the angle of incidence so that the reflected and refracted
light rays are perpendicular to each other. What is the state of polarisation,
of reflected and refracted light, under this condition?
37. (a) Why are photodiodes preferably operated under reverse bias when the
current in the forward bias is known to be more than that in reverse
bias?
(b) The two optoelectronic devices: Photodiode and solar cell, have the
same working principle but differ in terms of their process of operation.
Explain the difference between the two devices in terms of (i) biasing,
(ii) junction area and (iii) I-V characteristics.
Or
(a) Explain the processes involved in the formation of p-n junction.
(b) Draw a circuit diagram of full wave rectifier. Explain its working principle.
Draw the input/output waveforms indicating clearly the functions of the
two diodes used.
Practice Papers 357

PRACTICE PAPER
CLASS XII
PHYSICS
Time : 3 Hrs. M.M.: 70
Section A
1. Draw the pattern of electric field lines, when a point charge - Q is kept near
an uncharged conducting plate.
Or
Define the term ‘dielectric constant’ of a material.
2. Why is the electrostatic potential inside a charged conducting shell constant
throughout the volume of the conductor?
3. How is the drift velocity in a conductor affected with the rise in temperature?
4. A carbon resistor is shown in the figure. Using colour code, write the value of
the resistance.
5. Where on the surface of the Earth, is the vertical component of Earth's

magnetic field zero?
Or
The magnetic susceptibility x of a given material is – 0.5. Identify the
magnetic material.
6. The magnetic susceptibility of magnesium at 300 K is 1.2 × 105. At what
temperature will its magnetic susceptibility become 1 : 44 × 105?
7. Write the relation for the force acting on a charged particle q moving with
velocity v in the presence of a magnetic field B.
8. Define curie’s point for Magnetic Material.

9. Write two observation of Rutherford Experiment.
10. Write one drawback of Bohr's model of hydrogen atom.
11. What is the speed of light in a denser medium of polarising angle 30°?
Or
Why is convex mirror used as a side view mirror in a car?
12. A lens of large optical power bends the incident light more. Why?
13. Define the term “threshold frequency”, in the context of photoelectric emission.
Or
Plot a graph of the de-Broglie wavelength associated with a proton versus its
momentum.
14. Write any two properties of photon.
15. Define packing fraction.
Or
What is the unit of Decay constant?
16. Draw resistivity versus temperature graph for a semiconductor.
17. Which part of the electromagnetic spectrum is used in RADAR? Give its
frequency range.
18. What is the phase difference between E and B vector in a electromagnetic
wave.
19. What is physical significance of self inductance.
20. Define rms value of alternating current.
Section B
21. Apply Gauss's law to show that for a charged spherical shell, the electric
field outside the shell is, as if the entire charge were concentrated at the
centre.
22. The figure shows a network of five capacitors connected to 100 V supply.
Calculate the total energy stored in the network.
Practice Papers 359

23. State Kirchhoff's laws for a circuit.
Or
Establish the relation between drift velocity and current.
24. Two long straight wires carrying currents of 2A and 5A in the same direction
are kept parallel, 10 cm apart from each other. Calculate the force acting
between them and write its nature.
25. A charged particle q is moving in the presence of a magnetic field B which is
inclined to an angle 30° with the direction of the motion of the particle. Draw
the trajectory followed by the particle in the presence of the field and explain
how the particle describes this path.
26. Calculate the radius of curvature of an equi-concave lens of refractive index
1.5, when it is kept in a medium of refractive index 1.4 to have a power of
5D?
Or
Draw the ray diagram of an astronomical telescope showing image formation
in the normal adjustment position. Write the expression for its magnifying
power.
27. Distinguish between nuclear fusion and nuclear fission. Give one example for
each.

Section C
28. (a) Draw the equipotential surfaces corresponding to a uniform electric field
in the z-direction.
(b) Derive an expression for the electric potential at any point along the
axial line of an electric dipole.
29. (a) Briefly explain how a galvanometer is converted into a voltmeter.
(b) A voltmeter of a certain range is constructed by connecting a resistance
of 980  in series with a galvanometer. When the resistance of 470 W
is connected in series, the range gets halved. Find the resistance of the
galvanometer.
Or
Find out magnetic field at a point on the axis due to current carrying circular loop.
30. The figures shows a series LCR circuit connected to a variable frequency
230 V source.
(a) Determine the source frequency which drives the circuit in resonance.
(b) Calculate the impedance of the circuit and amplitude of current at
resonance.
31. A triangular prism of refracting angle 60° is made of a transparent material
of refractive index 2 . A ray of light is incident normally on the face KL

3
as shown in the figure. Trace the path of the ray as its passes through the
prism and calculate the angle of emergence and angle of deviation.
Practice Papers 361

32. How is a light emitting diode fabricated? Briefly explain the basic processes
involved in the emission of spontaneous radiation from it. Write two advantages
of LED lamps over the incandescent low power lamps.
33. (a) Draw the energy level diagram for the line spectra representing Lyman
series and Balmer series in the spectrum of hydrogen atom.
(b) Using the Rydberg formula for the spectrum of hydrogen atom, calculate
the longest and shortes-wavelengths of the emission lines of the Balmer
series in the spectrums of hydrogen atom. (Use the value of Rydberg
constant R = 1.1 × 107 m–1)
34. Write postulates of Bohr's atomic model of atom.
35. Derive expression for equivalent e.m.f. and equivalent resistance of a.
(a) Series combination
(b) Parallel combination
of three cells with emf E1, E2, E3 and internal resistance r1, r2, r3 respectively.
Or
(a) Describe briefly, with the help of a circuit diagram, the method of
measuring the internal resistance of a cell.
(b) Give reason why a potentiometer is preferred over a voltmeter for the
measurement of emf of a cell.
36. State the underlying principle of a cyclotron. Explain its working with the
help of a schematic diagram. Obtain the expression for cyclotron frequency.
(a) Why is the magnetic field radial in a moving coil galvanometer? Explain
how it is achieved.
(b) A galvanometer of resistance ‘G’ can be converted into a voltmeter of
range (0 – V) volts by connecting a resistance R in series with it. How
much resistance will be required to change its range from 0 to V/2 volt?
Or
(a) A rectangular loop of N turns and auq A of each turn, is kept in uniform
magnetic field of intensity, B. Deduce expression for torque acting on
the loop when its plane is inclined of angle q w.r.t. magnetic field B.

(b) A short bar magnet of magnetic moment M is turned in uniform magnetic
field of intensity B from stable equilibrium to unstable equilibrium.
Calculate mark done.
37. (a) Draw a labelled ray diagram of compound microscope, when final image
forms at the least distance of distinct vision.
(b) Why its objectives is of short focal length and of short aperture, compared
to its eyepiece lens? Explain.
(c) The focal length of the objective is 4 cm while that of eyepiece is 10 cm.
The object is placed at a distance of 6 cm from the objective lens.
Calculate the magnifying power of the compound microscope, if its final
image is formed at the near point.
Or
(a) Can the interference pattern by produced by two independent
monochromatic sources of light? Explain.
(b) The intensity at the central maximum (O) in a Young's double slit
experimental set-up shown in the figure is I0. If the distance OP equals
one-third of the fringe width of the pattern, show that the intensity at
I0
point P, would equal to .
4
(c) In Young's double slit experiment, the slits are separated by 0.5 mm and
screen is placed 1.0 m away from the slit. It is found that the 5th bright
fringe is at a distance of 4.13 mm from the 2nd dark fringe. Find the
wavelength of light used.
Practice Papers 363

NOTES
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________

12 SM Physics English 2019 20

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

12 SM Physics English 2019 20

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

12 SM Physics English 2019 20

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DIRECTORATE OF EDUCATION

GNCT of Delhi, Delhi Government

Mr. Sandeep Kumar

Mr. Binay Bhushan

Dr. Saroj Bala Sain

Anil Kumar Sharma

NOT FOR SALE

PUBLISHED BY : DELHI BUREAU OF TEXTBOOKS

Sr.No. Name Designation School

1. Sh. Pundrikaksh Kaudinya Principal RPVV, Raj Niwas Marg

2. Dr. Arvid Kumar Lecturer Physics Core Academic Unit,

3. Sh. Devender Kumar Lecturer Physics RPVV Kishan Ganj

4. Sh. Mayank Kumar Singh Vice Principal GBSSS F-Block

5. Mrs. Garima Singh Solanki Lecturer Physics G.G.S.S.S. C-Block

Time : 3 hrs. Marks : 70

Dielectric constant (or relative KD = ∈r = = = Unit less

Hence F0 > Fm as free space has

Linear charge density λ= Cm–1

Surface charge density σ= Cm–2

Volume charge density ρ= Cm–3

Electric field due to a

Torque on a dipole in a uniform (or τ = pE sin θ) Nm

Potential energy of a dipole in a U= (or U = – pE cos θ) J

uniform electric field

Electric field on axial line of an Eaxial = NC–1

When 2a << r, Eaxial =

Electric field on equatorial line Eequatorial =

Electric potential differences VA – VB = Volts (or JC–1)

Electric potential at a point VA = =

2 Physics Class - XII)

Electric potential at any point due When, θ = 0° or θ = 180°,

When, θ = 90°, Vequi = 0

closed surface S qnet = Net charge enclosed by a

Electric field due to line charge E= NC–1 (or V/m)

Electric field due to an infinite E=

plane sheet of charge

Electric field between two infinitely E =

charged spherical shell

When r < R, E × 4πr2 = 0

Electrical capacitance C= F(SI Unit)

Capacitance of an isolated sphere C0 = 4π∈0 r

Capacitance of a parallel plate C=

Capacitance of a parallel plate C=

Capacitance of a parallel plate

Energy stored in a charged U= J

Resultant electric field in a where Cm–1

Polarization density P = ∈0 χE Vm–1 or Nc–1

Dielectric constant (in terms of KD = 1 + χ

4 Physics Class - XII)

4. Resistance R= V = potential difference across

9. Temperature Rt = R0 (1 + αt) Rt = Resistance at t°C

11. Power P = VI = I2R =

12. Cells in Series Eeq = E1 + E2

13. Cells in parallel Equivalent e.m.f.

Equivalent Current I= m = number of cells in parallel

14. Kirchoff’s Laws Σi = o (at a junction) i = Current

16. Slide wire Bridge or S= R

Comparison of Emf l1 and l2 are balancing lengths

Internal Resistance r= l1 and l2 are balancing lengths on